Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisThe new edition of the popular introductory textbook on numerical approximation methods and mathematical analysis, with a unique emphasis on real-world application An Introduction to Numerical Methods and Analysis helps students gain a solid understanding of a wide range of numerical approximation methods for solving problems of mathematical analysis. Designed for entry-level courses on the subject, this popular textbook maximizes teaching flexibility by first covering basic topics before gradually moving to more advanced material in each chapter and section. Throughout the text, students are provided clear and accessible guidance on a wide range of numerical methods and analysis techniques, including root-finding, numerical integration, interpolation, solution of systems of equations, and many others. This fully revised third edition contains new sections on higher-order difference methods, the bisection and inertia method for computing eigenvalues of a Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introductory Concepts and Calculus Review 1 1.1 Basic Tools of Calculus 2 1.1.1 Taylor’s Theorem 2 1.1.2 Mean Value and Extreme Value Theorems 9 1.2 Error, Approximate Equality, and Asymptotic Order Notation 14 1.2.1 Error 14 1.2.2 Notation: Approximate Equality 15 1.2.3 Notation: Asymptotic Order 16 1.3 A Primer on Computer Arithmetic 20 1.4 A Word on Computer Languages and Software 29 1.5 A Brief History of Scientific Computing 32 1.6 Literature Review 36 References 36 2 A Survey of Simple Methods and Tools 39 2.1 Horner’s Rule and Nested Multiplication 39 2.2 Difference Approximations to the Derivative 44 2.3 Application: Euler’s Method for Initial Value Problems 52 2.4 Linear Interpolation 58 2.5 Application—The Trapezoid Rule 64 2.6 Solution of Tridiagonal Linear Systems 75 2.7 Application: Simple Two-Point Boundary Value Problems 81 3 Root-Finding 87 3.1 The Bisection Method 88 3.2 Newton’s Method: Derivation and Examples 95 3.3 How to Stop Newton’s Method 101 3.4 Application: Division Using Newton’s Method 104 3.5 The Newton Error Formula 108 3.6 Newton’s Method: Theory and Convergence 113 3.7 Application: Computation of the Square Root 117 3.8 The Secant Method: Derivation and Examples 120 3.9 Fixed-Point Iteration 124 3.10 Roots of Polynomials, Part 1 133 3.11 Special Topics in Root-finding Methods 141 3.11.1 Extrapolation and Acceleration 141 3.11.2 Variants of Newton’s Method 145 3.11.3 The Secant Method: Theory and Convergence 149 3.11.4 Multiple Roots 153 3.11.5 In Search of Fast Global Convergence: Hybrid Algorithms 157 3.12 Very High-order Methods and the Efficiency Index 162 3.13 Literature and Software Discussion 166 References 166 4 Interpolation and Approximation 169 4.1 Lagrange Interpolation 169 4.2 Newton Interpolation and Divided Differences 175 4.3 Interpolation Error 185 4.4 Application: Muller’s Method and Inverse Quadratic Interpolation 190 4.5 Application: More Approximations to the Derivative 194 4.6 Hermite Interpolation 196 4.7 Piecewise Polynomial Interpolation 200 4.8 An Introduction to Splines 207 4.8.1 Definition of the Problem 207 4.8.2 Cubic B-Splines 208 4.9 Tension Splines 223 4.10 Least Squares Concepts in Approximation 229 4.10.1 An Introduction to Data Fitting 229 4.10.2 Least Squares Approximation and Orthogonal Polynomials 233 4.11 Advanced Topics in Interpolation and Approximation 246 4.11.1 Stability of Polynomial Interpolation 247 4.11.2 The Runge Example 249 4.11.3 The Chebyshev Nodes 253 4.11.4 Spectral Interpolation 257 4.12 Literature and Software Discussion 265 References 266 5 Numerical Integration 269 5.1 A Review of the Definite Integral 270 5.2 Improving the Trapezoid Rule 272 5.3 Simpson’s Rule and Degree of Precision 277 5.4 The Midpoint Rule 288 5.5 Application: Stirling’s Formula 292 5.6 Gaussian Quadrature 294 5.7 Extrapolation Methods 306 5.8 Special Topics in Numerical Integration 313 5.8.1 Romberg Integration 313 5.8.2 Quadrature with Non-smooth Integrands 318 5.8.3 Adaptive Integration 323 5.8.4 Peano Estimates for the Trapezoid Rule 329 5.9 Literature and Software Discussion 335 References 335 6 Numerical Methods for Ordinary Differential Equations 337 6.1 The Initial Value Problem: Background 338 6.2 Euler’s Method 343 6.3 Analysis of Euler’s Method 346 6.4 Variants of Euler’s Method 350 6.4.1 The Residual and Truncation Error 352 6.4.2 Implicit Methods and Predictor–Corrector Schemes 355 6.4.3 Starting Values and Multistep Methods 360 6.4.4 The Midpoint Method and Weak Stability 362 6.5 Single-Step Methods: Runge–Kutta 367 6.6 Multistep Methods 374 6.6.1 The Adams Families 374 6.6.2 The BDF Family 378 6.7 Stability Issues 380 6.7.1 Stability Theory for Multistep Methods 380 6.7.2 Stability Regions 384 6.8 Application to Systems of Equations 385 6.8.1 Implementation Issues and Examples 385 6.8.2 Stiff Equations 389 6.8.3 A-Stability 390 6.9 Adaptive Solvers 394 6.10 Boundary Value Problems 407 6.10.1 Simple Difference Methods 407 6.10.2 Shooting Methods 414 6.10.3 Higher Order Difference Methods for BVPs 417 6.10.4 Finite Element Methods for BVPs 424 6.11 Literature and Software Discussion 432 References 433 7 Numerical Methods for the Solution of Systems of Equations 435 7.1 Linear Algebra Review 436 7.2 Linear Systems and Gaussian Elimination 438 7.3 Operation Counts 445 7.4 The LU Factorization 447 7.5 Perturbation, Conditioning, and Stability 459 7.5.1 Vector and Matrix Norms 459 7.5.2 The Condition Number and Perturbations 461 7.5.3 Estimating the Condition Number 468 7.5.4 Iterative Refinement 471 7.6 SPD Matrices and the Cholesky Decomposition 475 7.7 Application: Numerical Solution of Linear Least Squares Problems 478 7.8 Sparse and Structured Matrices 484 7.9 Iterative Methods for Linear Systems: A Brief Survey 485 7.10 Nonlinear Systems: Newton’s Method and Related Ideas 493 7.10.1 Newton’s Method 494 7.10.2 Fixed-Point Methods 497 7.11 Application: Numerical Solution of Nonlinear Boundary Value Problems 499 7.12 Literature and Software Discussion 501 References 502 8 Approximate Solution of the Algebraic Eigenvalue Problem 503 8.1 Eigenvalue Review 503 8.2 Reduction to Hessenberg Form 509 8.3 Power Methods 515 8.4 Bisection and Inertia to Compute Eigenvalues of Symmetric Matrices 533 8.5 An Overview of the QR Iteration 539 8.6 Application: Roots of Polynomials, Part II 548 8.7 Application: Computation of Gaussian Quadrature Rules 549 8.8 Literature and Software Discussion 557 References 557 9 A Survey of Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations 559 9.1 Difference Methods for the Diffusion Equation 559 9.1.1 The Basic Problem 559 9.1.2 The Explicit Method and Stability 560 9.1.3 Implicit Methods and the Crank–Nicolson Method 565 9.2 Finite Element Methods for the Diffusion Equation 574 9.3 Difference Methods for Poisson Equations 578 9.3.1 Discretization and Examples 578 9.3.2 Higher Order Methods 588 9.3.3 Iteration and the Method of Conjugate Gradients 593 9.4 Literature and Software Discussion 605 References 605 10 More on Spectral Methods 607 10.1 Spectral Methods for Two-Point Boundary Value Problems 608 10.2 Spectral Methods in Two Dimensions 621 10.3 Spectral Methods for Time-Dependent Problems 631 10.4 Clenshaw–Curtis Quadrature 635 10.5 Literature and Software Discussion 637 References 637 Appendix A: Proofs of Selected Theorems, and Additional Material 639 A.1 Proofs of the Interpolation Error Theorems 639 A.2 Proof of the Stability Result for ODEs 641 A.3 Stiff Systems of Differential Equations and Eigenvalues 642 A.4 The Matrix Perturbation Theorem 644 Index 646

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnderstanding the potential synergies between computer simulation and wargamingBased on the insights of experts in both domains, Simulation and Wargaming comprehensively explores the intersection between computer simulation and wargaming. This book shows how the practice of wargaming can be augmented and provide more detail-oriented insights using computer simulation, particularly as the complexity of military operations and the need for computational decision aids increases. The distinguished authors have hit upon two practical areas that have tremendous applications to share with one another but do not seem to be aware of that fact. The book includes insights into: The application of the data-driven speed inherent to computer simulation to wargamesThe application of the insight and analysis gained from wargames to computer simulationThe areas of concern raised by the combination of these two disparate yet related fieldsNew research and application opportunities emerging from the inteTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface xxiii List of Contributors xxv Author Biography xxix Prologue xli Part I Introduction 1 1 An Introduction to Wargaming and Modeling and Simulation 3Jeffrey Appleget Introduction 3 Terminology 3 An Abbreviated History of Wargames and Simulations 5 Wargames and Computer-Based Combat Simulations: From the Cold War to Today 6 Wargames Today 10 Simulations Today 13 Introduction 13 Simulation Types 13 Aggregate Simulations 13 Entity Simulations 14 Simulations and Prediction 14 Standard Assumptions 14 Data 15 Simulating the Reality of Combat 16 The Capability and Capacity of Modern Computing to Represent Combat 16 Finite Size 17 Number of Pieces/Entities 17 Terrain 18 Rules 18 Movement 18 Attack 19 Adjudication 19 Victory Conditions 19 Summary 20 Campaign Analysis 20 Conclusion 21 Part II Historical Context 23 2 A School for War – A Brief History of the Prussian Kriegsspiel 25Jorit Wintjes Introduction 25 Kriegsspiel Prehistory 29 A School for War – the Prussian Kriegsspiel 36 The Prussian Kriegsspiel 1824/28 – 1862 42 The Golden Age – 1862 to c. 1875 46 The Changing Kriegsspiel – c. 1875 to 1914 50 Kriegsspiel Beyond Borders – 1871 to 1914 54 Conclusion 59 3 Using Combat Models for Wargaming 65Joseph M. Saur The Nature of Combat Models 67 Europe’s Plan to Simulate the Entire Planet 77 China Exclusive: China’s “Magic Cube” Computer Unlocks the Future 77 A Model to Predict War 78 Afghanistan Stability/COIN Dynamics – Security 79 The Nature of Wargames 81 The Players – Who Might Be Involved? 85 The CRT – How Do We Adjudicate Political, Economic, Information and Other Non-Kinetic Actions? How DO WE ADJUDICATE KINETIC INTERACTIONS (Which, in This Case, We Hope Do Not Occur!)? 86 Organizational Behaviors 88 Issue in Wargames (and Combat Models) 89 Yyyyn 90 Part III Wargaming and Operations Research 91 4 An Analysis-Centric View of Wargaming, Modeling, Simulation, and Analysis 93Paul K. Davis Background and Structure 93 Relationships, Definitions, and Distinctions 94 Different Purposes for Wargaming 94 Backdrop 94 A Common Critique of M&S 94 Humans and M&S 98 Distinctions 98 A Model-Game-Model Paradigm 100 The Core Idea 100 Can Human Gaming Truly Serve as “Testing”? 101 Case Study: Deterrence and Stability on the Korean Peninsula 103 Background 103 Model Building 104 Ideal Methods and Practical Expedients 104 Modernizing the Escalation Ladder 106 Cognitive Decision Models 108 Top-Level Structure 109 Lower Level Structure 109 Designing and Executing a Human Game 111 Reflections and Conclusions 114 Implications for Simulation 117 5 Wargaming, Automation, and Military Experimentation to Quantitatively and Qualitatively Inform Decision-Making 123Jan Hodicky and Alejandro Hernandez Introduction 123 Military Methods to Knowledge Discovery 124 Technology: Knowledge Enablers 126 Wargaming Automation Challenges in M&S Perspective 128 Wargaming Relation to M&S 128 Wargaming Elements 129 Constructive Simulation Building Blocks 131 Wargaming Elements Not Supported by Constructive Simulation 131 Challenges to Combined Methodologies for Knowledge Discovery 132 Constructive Simulation Constrains in the Context of Automation and Wargaming 133 Stage- Wise Experimentation in CAW 139 A Progression of Mixed Methods to Grand Innovation 139 A Complete Application of ACAW and SWE for Future Capability Insights 144 Computer- Assisted Wargaming Classification 148 Conclusion 151 6 Simulation and Artificial Intelligence Methods for Wargames: Case Study – “European Thread” 157Andrzej Najgebauer, Sławomir Wojciechowski, Ryszard Antkiewicz, and Dariusz Pierzchała Introduction 157 Assumptions and Research Tools 159 Modeling of Complex Activities 161 Network Model of Complex Activities 161 The MCA Software Package for Wargaming 166 Wargame – Course of Action Evaluation 169 Assumptions 169 Situation 170 Model of Operation 173 A Collection of Values of the Function h(g) 173 Deterrence Phase 175 Parameters Value – Deterrence Phase 175 COA Evaluation 179 Summary 180 7 Combining Wargaming and Simulation Analysis 183Mark Sisson Introduction 183 Current Efforts Underway 184 Methodology 185 Frameworks or Schemas to Support Portfolios 186 Comparability 188 Emergence 190 Triangulation 190 Exercises 191 Artificial Intelligence 192 Wargames 193 Computer Simulation Models 194 Mathematical Models 195 Experimentation 196 Building Portfolios 196 Conclusion 199 8 The Use of M&S and Wargaming to Address Wicked Problems 203Phillip Pournelle Why Are We Doing This? 205 Framing the Problem 207 M&S Support to Wargames 212 Pathologies and How to Avoid Them 213 Combining Wargaming and M&S 219 Part IV Wargaming and Concept Developing and Testing 223 9 Simulation Support to Wargaming for Tactical Operations Planning 225Karsten Brathen, Rikke Amilde Seehuus, and Ole Martin Mevassvik Introduction 225 Operational Planning and Wargaming 226 What are the Benefits of Simulation Support to COA Wargaming? 231 Principles of Technology Support to Wargaming for Operations Planning 232 Enabling Technologies 234 Models 235 System Implementation 237 SWAP 238 SWAP Experiment 241 Conclusion and Way Forward 243 10 Simulation-Based Cyber Wargaming 249Ambrose Kam Motivation and Overview 249 Introduction 250 Cyber Simulation 253 Mission Analysis Tool 258 Wargames 261 Commercial Wargames 265 Future Work 267 Summary 269 11 Using Computer-Generated Virtual Realities, Operations Research, and Board Games for Conflict Simulations 273Armin Fügenschuh, Sönke Marahrens, Leonie Marguerite Johannsmann, Sandra Matuszewski, Daniel Müllenstedt, and Johannes Schmidt Introduction 273 Public Software (C:MA/NO) 275 User- Tailored Software (VBS3) 277 Artificial Intelligence for Solving Tactical Planning Problems 278 Wargaming Support 282 Conclusion 285 Part V Emerging Technologies 289 12 Virtual Worlds and the Cycle of Research: Enhancing Information Flow Between Simulationists and Wargamers 291Paul Vebber and Steven Aguiar The Cycle of Research as a Communications Framework 293 Bridging the Wargaming – Simulation Gap 297 Virtual World Beginnings 299 Elgin Marbles – An Analytic Game 301 Analytical vs. Narrative Games 303 Virtual Worlds as a Virtual Reality 307 Operational Wargames 308 Distributed LVC Wargames 312 The Future 315 13 Visualization Support to Strategic Decision-Making 317Richard J. Haberlin and Ernest H. Page Introduction 317 Impact/Capabilities 318 Strategic Planning 318 Acquisitions 318 Spectrum of Visualizations 319 Interactive Visualizations 320 Commercial Interactive Data Visualization 320 Custom Data and Analytics Visualization 320 Methodology 322 Model Elicitation 322 Framework 323 Considerations 323 Data 324 Analytic Tools 324 Colors of Money 324 Courses of Action 325 Model Construction 325 Strategic 326 Budget 327 Risk Identification and Mitigation 328 Example: The MITRE Simulation, Experimentation and Analytics Lab (SEAL) 329 Audio Visual Support 329 Multi-Level Security 331 Enterprise Integration 331 Community of Practice 332 Summary 333 14 Using an Ontology to Design a Wargame/Simulation System 335Dean S. Hartley, III Motivation and Overview 335 Introduction 336 A Modern Conflict Ontology 337 An Introduction to the MCO 337 Actors 338 Objects 339 Actions 340 Metrics or State Variables 342 MCO Examples 343 Provenance of the MCO 346 Knowledge of Warfare 346 Knowledge of OOTWs 346 Modeling Issues 347 Precursor Ontologies 348 Early Versions of the MCO 349 Creating a Simulation/Wargame from the Ontology 349 Model Building Steps 350 Moving from the Ontology to the Conceptual Model 352 Building Block Concept 354 Agendas and Implicit Metric Models 356 Theoretical Metric Models 357 VV&A 358 Constructing the Scenario 361 Model Infrastructure 361 Conclusion 362 15 Agent-Driven End Game Analysis for Air Defense 367M. Fatih Hocaogl̆ u Motivation and Overview 367 Introduction 367 Related Studies 369 Agent- Directed Simulation and AdSiF 371 AdSiF: Agent Driven Simulation Framework 373 End Game Agent 374 Command and Control Agent 374 C2 Architecture and Information Sharing 379 Target Evaluation 379 Fire Decision 380 Fire Doctrine 381 Decision-Level Data Fusion 382 Aims and Performance Measurement 384 Types of End Game Analysis 388 Footprint Analysis 390 Operating Area 394 Defended Area Analysis 395 Scenario View 397 Online Analysis and Scenario Replication Design 397 An Air Defense Scenario: Scenario View 398 Discussions 402 Epilogue 407 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is the first and most comprehensive guide on the modeling, engineering and reliable design of indoor photovoltaics which currently is the most promising and energy efficient power supply for edge nodes for the Internet of Things and other indoor devices. Indoor photovoltaics (IPV) has grown in importance over recent years. This can in part be attributed to the creation of the Internet of Things (IoT) and Artificial Intelligence (AI) along with the vast amounts of data being processed in the field, which has been a massive accelerator for this development. Moreover, since energy conservation is being imposed as the national strategy of many countries and is being set as a top priority throughout the world, understanding and promoting IPV as the most promising indoor energy harvesting source is considered by many to be essential these days. The book provides the engineer and researcher with guidelines, and presents a comprehensive overview of theoretical modeTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Will Photovoltaics Stay Out of the Shadows? 1Joseph A. Paradiso 1.1 Introduction 1 References 6 2 Introduction to Micro Energy Harvesting 9Monika Freunek (Müller) 2.1 Introduction and History 9 2.1.1 Brief History of Electric Generators and Loads 10 2.1.2 Forms of Energies and Energy Converters 10 2.2 Kinetic Energy 11 2.2.1 Oscillating Solid Objects 12 2.2.1.1 Human Motion 13 2.2.1.2 Vibrations 13 2.2.1.3 Flow of Gas and Fluids 14 2.2.1.4 Acoustic Vibrations 15 2.2.1.5 Elastic Energy 16 2.3 Thermoelectric Conversion 16 2.4 Electrochemical Potential 18 2.5 Electromagnetic Transmission 19 2.6 Atomic Batteries 19 2.7 Challenges 20 2.8 Conclusions and Outlook 20 Acknowledgment 21 References 21 3 Introduction to Indoor Photovoltaics 25Monika Freunek (Müller) 3.1 Introduction 25 3.2 Indoor Spectra and Efficiencies 28 3.3 State of IPV Design, Issues, Approaches 31 3.4 Fields of Application 32 3.4.1 Customer and Office Applications 32 3.4.2 Ambient Assisted Living and Building Automatization 32 3.4.3 Industry, Agriculture, Horticulture, Retail, and Logistics 33 3.4.4 Relation of IPV to Outdoor Applications – Hiking, Emergency Kits 34 3.5 Degradation and Lifetime Issues 34 3.6 Conclusions and Outlook 35 References 35 4 Modeling Indoor Irradiance 39Monika Freunek (Müller) 4.1 Introduction 39 4.2 Fundamentals 40 4.2.1 Photometry and Its Impact on IPV 41 4.2.2 Comparison Measurements of Different Luxmeter Products and Settings 44 4.2.3 Conclusions for Indoor Irradiance Measurements 45 4.2.4 Available Data on Indoor Irradiance 45 4.3 Radiometric Solutions 47 4.3.1 Structure 47 4.3.2 Settings of the Studied Rooms 48 4.3.3 Investigated Installation Points 49 4.4 Analytical Model 52 4.4.1 Solar Radiation 52 4.4.2 Artifical Lighting 56 4.4.3 Interaction with Objects 60 4.4.4 Indirect Contributions of Solar Radiation 61 4.4.5 Final Results and Limits of Analytical Models 62 4.5 Simulations 62 4.5.1 Ray Tracing: Fundamental Principles 62 4.5.2 Radiance 64 4.5.3 DAYSIM 65 4.5.4 Calculation Methods and Parameters 66 4.5.5 Daylight Coefficient in DAYSIM 68 4.5.6 Environmental Parameters 69 4.5.7 Model Parameters 71 4.5.8 Results 73 4.5.9 Summary and Conclusion 85 4.6 Measurements 86 4.6.1 Available Measurement Methods 86 4.6.2 Long-Term Measurements Reference Year 89 4.6.3 Validating Simulation 94 4.6.4 Comparison Measurement Methods under Controlled Conditions 100 4.7 Discussion and Recommendation 103 4.8 Conclusion and Outlook 104 4.8.1 Autarky Factors 105 4.9 Acknowledgements 106 4.10 Symbols and Abbreviations 106 4.11 Constants 109 4.12 Abbreviations 109 Appendix 110 References 112 5 Characterization and Power Measurement of IPV Cells 115Stefan Winter 5.1 Features of IPV Compared to Outdoor PV 115 5.1.1 Irradiance 116 5.1.2 Spectrum 116 5.1.2.1 Consequences of the Different Spectra Regarding Efficiency 117 5.1.3 Incident Angle Distribution 117 5.1.4 Modulated Light Sources 117 5.1.5 Further Effects 118 5.1.6 Standardization 118 5.2 Calibration Chain and Quality Management 119 5.2.1 Basic Laboratory Measurement Methods for the Secondary Calibration of IPV Cells 119 5.3 Flexible and Precise Method for Comprehensive and Primary Calibration of IPV Devices 122 5.3.1 Lamp-Based Facility 124 5.3.2 Laser-Based Facility 124 5.4 DSR Calibration of IPV Cells 128 5.4.1 Self-Referenced IV Characteristic 129 Acknowledgment 130 References 131 6 Luminescent Solar Concentrators 133Evert P.J. Merkx and Erik van der Kolk 6.1 Introduction 134 6.2 A Crash Course in Luminescence 135 6.2.1 Luminescence in Organic Dyes 136 6.2.2 Luminescence in Rare Earth Ions 138 6.2.3 Luminescence in Quantum Dots 142 6.2.4 Hybrid Combinations 143 6.3 Principle of Operation 144 6.3.1 Absorption of Light 144 6.3.2 Emission within the LSC 145 6.3.3 Effects of Self-Absorption 146 6.3.4 Influence of the Waveguide 147 6.3.5 Conversion of Concentrated Light to Electricity 147 6.4 Calculating LSC Performance 148 6.4.1 Figures of Merit 148 6.4.2 Upper Bound for LSC Efficiency 149 6.4.3 Analytical Approach for Simple Geometries 152 6.4.4 Semi-Analytical Optimization Calculations for Arbitrary Geometries 153 6.4.5 Monte Carlo Simulations for Ray-Traced Complex Geometries 157 6.4.6 Considerations for Thin-Film LSCs 162 6.5 State-of-the-Art LSC Materials 163 6.5.1 Measures for the Visual Performance of LSC Materials 163 6.5.2 Evaluating the Performance of State-of-the-Art LSCs 165 6.5.3 Dye-Based Luminescent Solar Concentrators 167 6.5.4 Rare Earth-Based Luminescent Solar Concentrators 168 6.5.5 Quantum Dot and Doped Quantum Dot-Based Luminescent Solar Concentrators 169 6.6 Tm2+-Doped Halide Luminescent Solar Concentrators 174 6.7 LSC for an IPV Perspective 177 6.7.1 Performance Assessment 177 6.7.2 Application Examples 179 6.8 Conclusion 180 Acknowledgements 181 References 181 7 Organic Photovoltaic Cells and Modules for Applications under Indoor Lighting Conditions 189Birger Zimmermann and Uli Würfel 7.1 Introduction 190 7.2 Implications of Indoor Lighting 192 7.3 OPV Modules 198 7.4 OPV Devices and Applications 201 7.5 Acceptance and Safety Considerations 202 References 203 8 High-Efficiency Indoor Photovoltaic Energy Harvesting 213Matthias Kauer and Mathieu Bellanger 8.1 Introduction 214 8.2 Approaches for Efficient Indoor PV Energy Harvesting 216 8.2.1 PV Energy Harvesting Technologies 216 8.2.2 Commercial PV Energy Harvesting Devices 217 8.2.3 Recent Research Results for PV Energy Harvesting Devices 217 8.3 Lightricity’s PV Energy Harvesting Technology 221 8.3.1 Introduction 221 8.3.2 Energy Harvester Device Fabrication and Device Characteristics 222 8.4 High-Efficiency PV Energy Harvesting Power Supplies 225 8.4.1 Introduction 225 8.4.2 Energy Harvesting Power Management Solutions 226 8.4.3 System Integration and Performance Testing 230 8.5 Applications of Light Indoor Energy Harvesting 233 8.5.1 Watches and Wearable Devices 233 8.5.2 Wireless Building Automation Sensors 233 8.5.3 Wireless Beacons 236 8.6 Summary and Concluding Remarks 237 Acknowledgments 238 References 238 9 Indoor Photovoltaics Based on AlGaAs 241Jamie Phillips, Eunseong Moon and Alan Teran 9.1 Importance of AlGaAs for Indoor Photovoltaics 242 9.2 Design Consideration for AlGaAs III-V Photovoltaic Cells 245 9.2.1 Base/Absorber 246 9.2.2 Contact 247 9.2.3 Window 248 9.2.4 Emitter 248 9.2.5 Back Surface Field 248 9.3 Large-Area AlGaAs III-V Photovoltaics 249 9.4 Small-Area AlGaAs Photovoltaics 252 9.4.1 Model of J-V Characteristics 254 9.4.2 Performance of mm-Scale AlGaAs Photovoltaics 257 9.4.3 Dark Current Limitations 260 9.5 Monolithic GaAs PV Cell Arrays 262 9.6 Conclusion 267 References 268 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines the design and use of Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS) to secure Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) systems Cyber-attacks on SCADA systems?the control system architecture that uses computers, networked data communications, and graphical user interfaces for high-level process supervisory management?can lead to costly financial consequences or even result in loss of life. Minimizing potential risks and responding to malicious actions requires innovative approaches for monitoring SCADA systems and protecting them from targeted attacks. SCADA Security: Machine Learning Concepts for Intrusion Detection and Prevention is designed to help security and networking professionals develop and deploy accurate and effective Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS) for SCADA systems that leverage autonomous machine learning. Providing expert insights, practical advice, and up-to-date coverage of developments in SCADA security, this authoritative guide presents Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acronyms xv 1. Introduction 1 2. Background 15 3. SCADA-Based Security Testbed 25 4. Efficient k-Nearest Neighbour Approach Based on Various-Widths Clustering 63 5. SCADA Data-Driven Anomaly Detection 87 6. A Global Anomaly Threshold to Unsupervised Detection 119 7. Threshold Password-Authenticated Secret Sharing Protocols 151 8. Conclusion 179 References 185 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the practical issues and applications in database programming with updated Visual Basic.NET SQL Server Database Programming with Visual Basic.NET offers a guide to the fundamental knowledge and practical techniques for the design and creation of professional database programs that can be used for real-world commercial and industrial applications. The authora noted expert on the topicuses the most current version of Visual Basic.NET, Visual Basic.NET 2017 with Visual Studio.NET 2017. In addition, he introduces the updated SQL Server database and Microsoft SQL Server 2017 Express. All sample program projects can be run in the most updated version, Visual Basic.NET 2019 with Visual Studio.NET 2019. Written in an accessible, down-to-earth style, the author explains how to build a sample database using the SQL Server management system and Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio 2018. The latest version of ASP.NET, ASP.NET 4.7, is also discussed to prTable of ContentsAbout the Author xix Preface xxi Acknowledgment xxiii About the Companion Website xxiv Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Outstanding Features About This Book 2 1.2 This Book is For 2 1.3 What This Book Covers 2 1.4 How This Book is Organized and How to Use This Book 5 1.5 How to Use Source Codes and Sample Database 6 1.6 Instructors and Customers Supports 8 Chapter 2 Introduction to Databases 9Ying Bai and Satish Bhalla 2.1 What are Databases and Database Programs? 10 2.1.1 File Processing System 10 2.1.2 Integrated Databases 11 2.2 Develop a Database 12 2.3 Sample Database 13 2.3.1 Relational Data Model 13 2.3.2 Entity-Relationship Model (ER) 17 2.4 Identifying Keys 18 2.5 Define Relationships 18 2.6 ER Notation 22 2.7 Data Normalization 23 2.7.1 First Normal Form (1NF) 23 2.7.2 Second Normal Form (2NF) 24 2.7.3 Third Normal Form (3NF) 26 2.8 Database Components in Some Popular Databases 28 2.8.1 Microsoft Access Databases 28 2.8.2 SQL Server Databases 29 2.8.3 Oracle Databases 32 2.9 Create Microsoft SQL Server 2017 Express Sample Database 35 2.9.1 Create the LogIn Table 36 2.9.2 Create the Faculty Table 37 2.9.3 Create Other Tables 39 2.9.4 Create Relationships Among Tables 45 2.9.4.1 Create Relationship Between the LogIn and the Faculty Tables 46 2.9.4.2 Create Relationship Between the LogIn and the Student Tables 49 2.9.4.3 Create Relationship Between the Faculty and the Course Tables 50 2.9.4.4 Create Relationship Between the Student and the StudentCourse Tables 50 2.9.4.5 Create Relationship Between the Course and the StudentCourse Tables 51 2.9.5 Store Images to the SQL Server 2017 Express Database 53 2.10 Chapter Summary 61 Homework 63 Chapter 3 Introduction to ADO.NET 67 3.1 The ADO and ADO.NET 67 3.2 Overview of the ADO.NET 69 3.3 The Architecture of the ADO.NET 70 3.4 The Components of ADO.NET 71 3.4.1 The Data Provider 72 3.4.1.1 The ODBC Data Provider 73 3.4.1.2 The OLEDB Data Provider 73 3.4.1.3 The SQL Server Data Provider 74 3.4.1.4 The Oracle Data Provider 74 3.4.2 The Connection Class 74 3.4.2.1 The Open() Method of the Connection Class 77 3.4.2.2 The Close() Method of the Connection Class 77 3.4.2.3 The Dispose() Method of the Connection Class 78 3.4.3 The Command and the Parameter Classes 78 3.4.3.1 The Properties of the Command Class 79 3.4.3.2 The Constructors and Properties of the Parameter Class 79 3.4.3.3 Parameter Mapping 80 3.4.3.4 The Methods of the ParameterCollection Class 82 3.4.3.5 The Constructor of the Command Class 83 3.4.3.6 The Methods of the Command Class 84 3.4.4 The DataAdapter Class 87 3.4.4.1 The Constructor of the DataAdapter Class 87 3.4.4.2 The Properties of the DataAdapter Class 87 3.4.4.3 The Methods of the DataAdapter Class 88 3.4.4.4 The Events of the DataAdapter Class 88 3.4.5 The DataReader Class 90 3.4.6 The DataSet Component 92 3.4.6.1 The DataSet Constructor 94 3.4.6.2 The DataSet Properties 94 3.4.6.3 The DataSet Methods 94 3.4.6.4 The DataSet Events 94 3.4.7 The DataTable Component 97 3.4.7.1 The DataTable Constructor 98 3.4.7.2 The DataTable Properties 98 3.4.7.3 The DataTable Methods 99 3.4.7.4 The DataTable Events 100 3.4.8 ADO.NET Entity Framework 102 3.4.8.1 Advantages of Using the Entity Framework 6 104 3.4.8.2 The ADO.NET 4.3 Entity Data Model 106 3.4.8.3 Using Entity Framework 6 Entity Data Model Wizard 110 3.5 Chapter Summary 118 Homework 120 Chapter 4 Introduction to Language Integrated Query (LINQ) 123 4.1 Overview of Language Integrated Query 123 4.1.1 Some Special Interfaces Used in LINQ 124 4.1.1.1 The IEnumerable and IEnumerable(Of T) Interfaces 124 4.1.1.2 The IQueryable and IQueryable(Of T) Interfaces 125 4.1.2 Standard Query Operators 126 4.1.3 Deferred Standard Query Operators 127 4.1.4 Non-Deferred Standard Query Operators 131 4.2 Introduction to LINQ Query 135 4.3 The Architecture and Components of LINQ 137 4.3.1 Overview of LINQ to Objects 138 4.3.2 Overview of LINQ to DataSet 139 4.3.3 Overview of LINQ to SQL 139 4.3.4 Overview of LINQ to Entities 140 4.3.5 Overview of LINQ to XML 140 4.4 LINQ to Objects 141 4.4.1 LINQ and ArrayList 142 4.4.2 LINQ and Strings 143 4.4.2.1 Query a String to Determine the Number of Numeric Digits 144 4.4.2.2 Sort Lines of Structured Text By any Field in the Line 145 4.4.3 LINQ and File Directories 147 4.4.3.1 Query the Contents of Files in a Folder 148 4.4.4 LINQ and Reflection 150 4.5 LINQ to DataSet 152 4.5.1 Operations to DataSet Objects 152 4.5.1.1 Query Expression Syntax 153 4.5.1.2 Method-Based Query Syntax 154 4.5.1.3 Query the Single Table 157 4.5.1.4 Query the Cross Tables 159 4.5.1.5 Query Typed DataSet 162 4.5.2 Operations to DataRow Objects Using the Extension Methods 165 4.5.3 Operations to DataTable Objects 169 4.6 LINQ to SQL 170 4.6.1 LINQ to SQL Entity Classes and DataContext Class 171 4.6.1.1 Add LINQ to Data Reference 171 4.6.1.2 Add LINQ To SQL Tools 171 4.6.2 LINQ to SQL Database Operations 175 4.6.2.1 Data Selection Query 175 4.6.2.2 Data Insertion Query 177 4.6.2.3 Data Updating Query 178 4.6.2.4 Data Deletion Query 179 4.6.3 LINQ to SQL Implementations 182 4.7 LINQ to Entities 182 4.7.1 The Object Services Component 183 4.7.2 The ObjectContext Component 183 4.7.3 The ObjectQuery Component 184 4.7.4 LINQ to Entities Flow of Execution 184 4.7.5 Implementation of LINQ to Entities 186 4.8 LINQ to XML 187 4.8.1 LINQ to XML Class Hierarchy 187 4.8.2 Manipulate XML Elements 188 4.8.2.1 Creating XML from Scratch 188 4.8.2.2 Insert XML 190 4.8.2.3 Update XML 191 4.8.2.4 Delete XML 192 4.8.3 Manipulate XML Attributes 192 4.8.3.1 Add XML Attributes 192 4.8.3.2 Get XML Attributes 193 4.8.3.3 Delete XML Attributes 193 4.8.4 Query XML with LINQ to XML 194 4.8.4.1 Standard Query Operators and XML 194 4.8.4.2 XML Query Extensions 195 4.8.4.3 Using Query Expressions with XML 196 4.8.4.4 Using XPath and XSLT with LINQ to XML 196 4.8.4.5 Mixing XML and Other Data Models 197 4.9 Visual Basic.NET Language Enhancement for LINQ 199 4.9.1 Lambda Expressions 199 4.9.2 Extension Methods 201 4.9.3 Implicitly Typed Local Variables 205 4.9.4 Query Expressions 206 4.10 Chapter Summary 208 Homework 209 Chapter 5 Data Selection Query with Visual Basic.NET 215 Part I Data Query with Visual Studio.NET Design Tools and Wizards 216 5.1 A Completed Sample Database Application Example 216 5.2 Visual Studio.NET Design Tools and Wizards 219 5.2.1 Data Components in the Toolbox Window 220 5.2.1.1 The DataSet 220 5.2.1.2 DataGridView 221 5.2.1.3 BindingSource 222 5.2.1.4 BindingNavigator 222 5.2.1.5 TableAdapter 223 5.2.1.6 TableAdapter Manager 223 5.2.2 Data Source Window 223 5.2.2.1 Add New Data Sources 224 5.2.2.2 Data Source Configuration Wizard 224 5.2.2.3 DataSet Designer 228 5.3 Query Data from SQL Server Database Using Design Tools and Wizards 231 5.3.1 Application User Interface 231 5.3.1.1 The LogIn Form 232 5.3.1.2 The Selection Form 232 5.3.1.3 The Faculty Form 232 5.3.1.4 The Course Form 234 5.3.1.5 The Student Form 234 5.4 Use Visual Studio Wizards and Design Tools to Query and Display Data 236 5.4.1 Query and Display Data using the DataGridView and Detail Controls 236 5.4.1.1 View the Entire Table 238 5.4.1.2 View Each Record or the Specified Columns with Detail View 241 5.4.2 Use DataSet Designer to Edit the Structure of the DataSet 243 5.4.3 Bind Data to the Associated Controls in LogIn Form 245 5.4.4 Develop Codes to Query Data Using the Fill() Method 249 5.4.5 Use Return a Single Value to Query Data for LogIn Form 251 5.4.6 Develop the Codes for the Selection Form 254 5.4.7 Query Data from the Faculty Table for the Faculty Form 256 5.4.8 Develop Codes to Query Data from the Faculty Table 258 5.4.8.1 Develop Codes to Query Data Using the TableAdapter Method 258 5.4.8.2 Develop Codes to Query Data Using the LINQ to DataSet Method 261 5.4.9 Query Data from the Course Table for the Course Form 262 5.4.9.1 Build the Course Queries Using the Query Builder 263 5.4.9.2 Bind Data Columns to the Associated Controls in the Course Form 265 5.4.9.3 Develop Codes to Query Data for the Course Form 267 Part II Data Query with Runtime Objects 271 5.5 Introduction to Runtime Objects 272 5.5.1 Procedure of Building a Data-Driven Application Using Runtime Object 274 5.6 Query Data from SQL Server Database Using Runtime Object 274 5.6.1 Access to SQL Server Database 274 5.6.2 Declare Global Variables and Runtime Objects 276 5.6.3 Query Data Using Runtime Objects for the LogIn Form 278 5.6.3.1 Connect to the Data Source with the Runtime Object 278 5.6.3.2 Coding for Method 1: Using the TableAdapter to Query Data 279 5.6.3.3 Coding for Method 2: Using the DataReader to Query Data 281 5.6.4 The Coding for the Selection Form 283 5.6.5 Query Data Using Runtime Objects for the Faculty Form 284 5.6.5.1 Using Three Query Methods to Retrieve Images from SQL Server Database 290 5.6.6 Query Data Using Runtime Objects for the Course Form 290 5.6.6.1 Retrieve Data from Multiple Tables Using Tables JOINS 293 5.6.7 Query Data Using Runtime Objects for the Student Form 301 5.6.7.1 Query Student Data Using Stored Procedures 302 5.6.7.2 Query Data Using Stored Procedures for Student Form 306 5.6.7.3 Query Data Using More Complicated Stored Procedures 315 5.7 Chapter Summary 320 Homework 321 Chapter 6 Data Inserting with Visual Basic.NET 327 Part I Insert Data with Visual Basic.NET Design Tools and Wizards 328 6.1 Insert Data Into a Database 328 6.1.1 Insert New Records into a Database Using the TableAdapter.Insert Method 329 6.1.2 Insert New Records into a Database Using the TableAdapter.Update Method 329 6.2 Insert Data into the SQL Server Database Using a Sample Project InsertWizard 330 6.2.1 Create InsertWizard Project Based on the SelectWizard Project 330 6.2.2 Application User Interfaces 331 6.2.3 Validate Data Before the Data Insertion 331 6.2.3.1 Visual Basic Collection and .NET Framework Collection Classes 331 6.2.3.2 Validate Data Using the Generic Collection 332 6.2.4 Initialization Coding Process for the Data Insertion 335 6.2.5 Build the Insert Query 336 6.2.5.1 Configure the TableAdapter and Build the Data Inserting Query 336 6.2.6 Develop Codes to Insert Data Using the TableAdapter.Insert Method 337 6.2.7 Develop Codes to Insert Data Using the TableAdapter.Update Method 341 6.2.8 Insert Data into the Database Using the Stored Procedures 345 6.2.8.1 Create the Stored Procedure Using the TableAdapter Query Configuration Wizard 346 6.2.8.2 Modify the Codes to Perform the Data Insertion Using the Stored Procedure 346 Part II Data Insertion with Runtime Objects 350 6.3 The General Run Time Objects Method 351 6.4 Insert Data into the SQL Server Database Using the Run Time Object Method 352 6.4.1 Insert Data into the Faculty Table for the SQL Server Database 353 6.4.1.1 Validate Data Before the Data Insertion 353 6.4.1.2 Insert Data into the Faculty Table 355 6.4.1.3 Validate Data After the Data Insertion 357 6.5 Insert Data into the Database Using Stored Procedures 360 6.5.1 Insert Data into the SQL Server Database Using Stored Procedures 360 6.5.1.1 Develop Stored Procedures in SQL Server Database 361 6.5.1.2 Develop Codes to Call Stored Procedures to Insert Data into the Course Table 363 6.6 Insert Data into the Database Using the LINQ To SQL Method 368 6.6.1 Insert Data Into the SQL Server Database Using the LINQ to SQL Queries 369 6.7 Chapter Summary 369 Homework 370 Chapter 7 Data Updating and Deleting with Visual Basic.NET 377 Part I Data Updating and Deleting with Visual Studio.NET Design Tools and Wizards 378 7.1 Update or Delete Data Against Databases 378 7.1.1 Updating and Deleting Data from Related Tables in a DataSet 379 7.1.2 Update or Delete Data Against Database Using TableAdapter DBDirect Methods - TableAdapter.Update and TableAdapter.Delete 379 7.1.3 Update or Delete Data Against Database Using TableAdapter.Update Method 380 7.2 Update and Delete Data For Microsoft SQL Server Database 381 7.2.1 Create a New Project Based on the InsertWizard Project 381 7.2.2 Application User Interfaces 382 7.2.3 Validate Data Before the Data Updating and Deleting 382 7.2.4 Build the Update and Delete Queries 382 7.2.4.1 Configure the TableAdapter and Build the Data Updating Query 383 7.2.4.2 Build the Data Deleting Query 384 7.2.5 Develop Codes to Update Data Using the TableAdapter DBDirect Method 385 7.2.5.1 Modifications of the Codes 385 7.2.5.2 Creations of the Codes 385 7.2.6 Develop Codes to Update Data Using the TableAdapter.Update Method 387 7.2.7 Develop Codes to Delete Data Using the TableAdapter DBDirect Method 388 7.2.8 Develop Codes to Delete Data Using the TableAdapter.Update Method 390 7.2.9 Validate the Data After the Data Updating and Deleting 391 Part II Data Updating and Deleting with Runtime Objects 395 7.3 The Run Time Objects Method 395 7.4 Update and Delete Data for SQL Server Database Using the Run Time Objects 396 7.4.1 Update Data Against the Faculty Table in the SQL Server Database 397 7.4.1.1 Develop Codes to Update the Faculty Data 397 7.4.1.2 Validate the Data Updating 399 7.4.2 Delete Data from the Faculty Table in the SQL Server Database 399 7.4.2.1 Develop Codes to Delete Data 399 7.4.2.2 Validate the Data Deleting 401 7.5 Update and Delete Data against SQL Server Database Using Stored Procedures 404 7.5.1 Modify an Existing Project to Create Our New Project 405 7.5.2 Create the Codes to Update and Delete Data from the Course Table 405 7.5.2.1 Develop Two Stored Procedures in the SQL Server Database 407 7.5.2.2 Call the Stored Procedures to Perform the Data Updating and Deleting 409 7.5.3 Update and Delete Data against Databases Using the LINQ to SQL Query 412 7.5.3.1 Update and Delete Data Using LINQ to SQL Query for Student Table 413 7.5.3.2 Create a New Object of the DataContext Class for Student Form 414 7.5.3.3 Develop the Codes for the Select Button Click Event Procedure 415 7.5.3.4 Develop the Codes for the Insert Button Click Event Procedure 416 7.5.3.5 Develop the Codes for the Update Button Click Event Procedure 419 7.5.3.6 Develop the Codes for the Delete Button Click Event Procedure 419 7.5.3.7 Run the Project to Test Data Updating and Deleting Actions for Student Table 421 7.6 Chapter Summary 423 Homework 423 Chapter 8 Accessing Data in ASP.NET 429 8.1 What is .NET Framework? 430 8.2 What is ASP.NET? 431 8.2.1 ASP.NET Web Application File Structure 433 8.2.2 ASP.NET Execution Model 433 8.2.3 What is Really Happened When a Web Application is Executed? 434 8.2.4 The Requirements to Test and Run the Web Project 435 8.3 Develop ASP.NET Web Application to Select Data from SQL Server Databases 435 8.3.1 Create the User Interface – LogIn Form 436 8.3.2 Develop the Codes to Access and Select Data from the Database 438 8.3.3 Validate the Data in the Client Side 442 8.3.4 Create the Second User Interface – Selection Page 443 8.3.5 Develop the Codes to Open the Other Page 444 8.3.6 Modify the Codes in the LogIn Page to Transfer to the Selection Page 446 8.3.7 Create the Third User Interface – Faculty Page 447 8.3.8 Develop the Codes to Select the Desired Faculty Information 448 8.3.8.1 Develop the Codes for the Page_Load Event Procedure 449 8.3.8.2 Develop the Codes for the Select Button Click Event Procedure 450 8.3.8.3 Develop the Codes for Other Procedures 452 8.3.9 Create the Fourth User Interface – Course Page 454 8.3.9.1 The AutoPostBack Property of the List Box Control 457 8.3.10 Develop the Codes to Select the Desired Course Information 457 8.3.10.1 Coding for the Course Page Loading and Ending Event Procedures 458 8.3.10.2 Coding for the Select Button’s Click Event Procedure 459 8.3.10.3 Coding for the SelectedIndexChanged Event Procedure of the CourseList Box 461 8.3.10.4 Coding for Other User Defined Subroutine Procedures 463 8.4 Develop ASP.NET Web Application to Insert Data Into SQL Server Databases 465 8.4.1 Develop the Codes to Perform the Data Insertion Function 466 8.4.2 Develop the Codes for the Insert Button Click Event Procedure 466 8.4.3 Validate the Data Insertion 473 8.5 Develop Web Applications to Update and Delete Data in SQL Server Databases 473 8.5.1 Modify the Codes for the Faculty Page 474 8.5.2 Develop the Codes for the Update Button Click Event Procedure 475 8.5.3 Develop the Codes for the Delete Button Click Event Procedure 479 8.5.3.1 Relationships Between Five Tables in Our Sample Database 480 8.5.3.2 Data Deleting Sequence 481 8.5.3.3 Use the Cascade Deleting Option to Simplify the Data Deleting 481 8.5.3.4 Create the Stored Procedure to Perform the Data Deleting 483 8.5.3.5 Develop the Codes to Call the Stored Procedure to Perform the Data Deleting 486 8.6 Develop ASP.NET Web Applications with LINQ to SQL Query 489 8.6.1 Create a New Object of the DataContext Class 491 8.6.2 Develop the Codes for the Data Selection Query 492 8.6.3 Develop the Codes for the Data Insertion Query 493 8.6.4 Develop the Codes for the Data Updating and Deleting Queries 496 8.7 Chapter Summary 500 Homework 500 Chapter 9 ASP.NET Web Services 505 9.1 What are Web Services and Their Components? 506 9.2 Procedures to Build a Web Service 508 9.2.1 The Structure of a Typical Web Service Project 508 9.2.2 The Real Considerations When Building a Web Service Project 509 9.2.3 Introduction to Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) 509 9.2.3.1 What is the WCF? 510 9.2.3.2 WCF Data Services 510 9.2.3.3 WCF Services 511 9.2.3.4 WCF Clients 511 9.2.3.5 WCF Hosting 512 9.2.3.6 WCF Visual Studio Templates 512 9.2.4 Procedures to Build an ASP.NET Web Service 513 9.3 Build ASP.NET Web Service Project to Access SQL Server Database 514 9.3.1 Files and Items Created in the New Web Service Project 515 9.3.2 A Feeling of the Hello World Web Service Project As it Runs 518 9.3.3 Modify the Default Namespace 520 9.3.4 Create a Base Class to Handle Error Checking for Our Web Service 522 9.3.5 Create a Customer Returned Class to Hold All Retrieved Data 522 9.3.6 Add Web Methods into Our Web Service Class 524 9.3.7 Develop the Codes for Web Methods to Perform the Web Services 524 9.3.7.1 Web Service Connection Strings 524 9.3.7.2 Modify the Existing HelloWorld Web Method 527 9.3.7.3 Develop the Codes to Perform the Database Queries 528 9.3.7.4 Develop the Codes for Subroutines Used in the Web Method 530 9.3.8 Develop the Stored Procedure to Perform the Data Query 533 9.3.8.1 Develop the Stored Procedure WebSelectFacultySP 533 9.3.8.2 Add Another Web Method to Call the Stored Procedure 534 9.3.9 Use DataSet as the Returning Object for the Web Method 536 9.3.10 Build Windows-based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Services 538 9.3.10.1 Create a Web Service Proxy Class 539 9.3.10.2 Develop the Graphic User Interface for the Windows-based Client Project 541 9.3.10.3 Develop the Code to Consume the Web Service 541 9.3.11 Build Web-based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Service 548 9.3.11.1 Create a New Web Site Project and Add an Existing Web Page 548 9.3.11.2 Add a Web Service Reference and Modify the Web Form Window 549 9.3.11.3 Modify the Designer and Codes for the Related Event Procedures 550 9.3.12 Deploy the Completed Web Service to Production Servers 555 9.3.12.1 Publish the Desired Web Service 557 9.4 Build ASP.NET Web Service Project to Insert Data Into SQL Server Database 559 9.4.1 Create a New Web Service Project WebServiceSQLInsert 559 9.4.2 Develop Four Web Service Methods 560 9.4.2.1 Develop Codes for the First Web Method SetSQLInsertSP 561 9.4.2.2 Develop Codes for User Defined Functions and Subroutine Procedures 563 9.4.2.3 Develop the Second Web Method GetSQLInsert 565 9.4.2.4 Develop the Third Web Method SQLInsertDataSet 568 9.4.2.5 Develop the Fourth Web Method GetSQLInsertCourse 572 9.4.3 Build Windows-based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Services 578 9.4.3.1 Create a Windows-Based Consume Project and a Web Service Proxy Class 578 9.4.3.2 Develop the Graphic User Interface for the Client Project 579 9.4.3.3 Develop the Code to Consume the Web Service 581 9.4.4 Build Web-based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Services 594 9.4.4.1 Create a New Web Site Project and Add an Existing Web Page 594 9.4.4.2 Add a Web Service Reference and Modify the Web Form Window 595 9.4.4.3 Modify the Codes for the Related Event Procedures 596 9.5 Build ASP.NET Web Service to Update and Delete Data for SQL Server Database 606 9.5.1 Modify the Default Namespace and Add Database Connection String 607 9.5.2 Create Our Customer-Built Base and Returned Classes 608 9.5.3 Create a Web Method to Call Stored Procedure to Update Student Records 609 9.5.4 Create a Web Method to Call Stored Procedure to Delete Student Records 611 9.5.5 Develop Two Stored Procedures WebUpdateStudentSP and WebDeleteStudentSP 613 9.5.5.1 Develop the Stored Procedure WebUpdateStudentSP 613 9.5.5.2 Develop the Stored Procedure WebDeleteStudentSP 616 9.6 Build Windows-Based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Services 618 9.6.1 Modify the Student Form Window 618 9.6.2 Add a New Web Reference to Our Client Project 619 9.6.3 Build the Codes to the Update Button Click Event Procedure 620 9.6.4 Build the Codes to the Delete Button Click Event Procedure 621 9.7 Build Web-Based Web Service Clients to Consume the Web Services 624 9.7.1 Create a New Web Site Application Project and Add an Existing Web Page 625 9.7.2 Add a Web Service Reference and Modify the Web Form Window 625 9.7.3 Modify the Codes Inside the Back Button Click Event Procedure 626 9.7.4 Add the Codes to the Update Button Click Event Procedure 626 9.7.5 Develop Codes for the Delete Button Click Event Procedure 628 9.8 Chapter Summary 631 Homework 632 Appendix A: Install and Configure SQL Server 2017 Express Database 637 Appendix B: Download and Install DevExpress .NET UI Controls 649 Appendix C: Download & Install FrontPage Server Extension for Windows 10 651 Appendix D: How to Use Sample Database 655 Index 657

Read more less

Book SynopsisSubstrate-Integrated Millimeter-Wave Antennas for Next-Generation Communication and Radar Systems The first and only comprehensive text on substrate-integrated mmW antenna technology, state-of-the-art antenna design, and emerging wireless applications Substrate-Integrated Millimeter-Wave Antennas for Next-Generation Communication and Radar Systems elaborates the most important topics related to revolutionary millimeter-wave (mmW) technology. Following a clear description of fundamental concepts including substrate-integrated waveguides and loss analysis, the text treats key design methods, prototyping techniques, and experimental setup and testing. The authors also highlight applications of mmW antennas in 5G wireless communication and next-generation radar systems. Readers are prepared to put techniques into practice through practical discussions of how to set up testing for impedance matching, radiation patterns, gain from 24GHz up to 325 GHz, anTable of ContentsEditor biographies – to follow Contributors Preface to follow Chapter 1 Introduction to Millimeter Wave Antennas 1.1 Millimeter Waves 1.2 Propagation of Millimeter Waves 1.3 Millimeter Wave Technology 1.3.1 Important Features 1.3.2 Major Modern Applications 1.4 Unique Challenges of Millimeter Wave Antennas 1.5 Briefing of State-of-the-Art Millimeter Wave Antennas 1.6 Implementation Considerations of Substrate Integrated Millimeter Wave Antennas 1.6.1 Fabrication Processes and Materials of the Antennas 1.6.2 Commonly Used Transmission Line Systems for Antennas 1.7 Note on Losses in Microstrip-lines and Substrate Integrated Waveguides 1.8 Update of Millimeter Wave Technology in 5G and Beyond 1.9 Summary References Chapter 2 Measurement Methods and Setups of Antennas at 60-325-GHz Bands 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Far-field Antenna Measurement Setup 2.1.2 Near-field Antenna Measurement Setup 2.2 Sate-of-the-art mmW Measurement Systems 2.2.1 Commercially Available mmW Measurement Systems 2.2.2 Customized mmW Measurement Systems 2.3 Considerations for Measurement Setup Configuration 2.3.1 Near-field versus Compact Range 2.3.2 RF System 2.3.3 Interface Between the RF Instrument and AUT 2.3.4 On-Wafer Antenna Measurement 2.4 mmW Measurement Setup Examples 2.4.1 60-GHz Antenna Measurement Setup 2.4.2 140-GHz Antenna Measurement Setup 2.4.3 270-GHz Antenna Measurement Setup 2.5 Summary References Chapter 3 Substrate Integrated mmW Antennas in LTCC 3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 Unique Design Challenges and Promising Solutions 3.1.2 SIW Slot Antennas and Arrays in LTCC 3.2 High-gain mmW SIW Slot Antenna Arrays in LTCC 3.2.1 SIW Three-Dimensional Corporate Feed 3.2.2 Substrate Integrated Cavity Antenna Array at 60 GHz 3.2.3 Simplified Designs and High-order-mode Antenna Array at 140 GHz 3.2.4 Fully Substrate Integrated Antennas at 270 GHz 3.3 Summary References Chapter 4 Broadband Metamaterial-Mushroom Antenna Array at 60-GHz Bands 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Broadband Low-Profile CRLH-Mushroom Antenna 4.2.1 Working Principle 4.2.2 Impedance Matching 4.3 Broadband LTCC Metamaterial-Mushroom Antenna Array at 60 GHz 4.3.1 SIW Fed CRLH-Mushroom Antenna Element 4.3.2 Self-Decoupling Functionality 4.3.3 Self-Decoupled Metamaterial-Mushroom Subarray 4.3.4 Metamaterial-Mushroom Antenna Array 4.4 Summary References Chapter 5 Narrow-Wall-Fed Substrate Integrated Cavity Antenna at 60 GHz 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Broadband Techniques for Substrate Integrated Antennas 5.2.1 Enhancement of Impedance Matching for SIW Antennas 5.2.2 Multi-Mode Substrate Integrated Cavity Antennas 5.2.3 Substrate Integrated Cavity Backed Slot Antenna 5.2.4 Patch Loaded Substrate Integrated Cavity Antenna 5.2.5 Travelling-wave Elements Loaded Substrate Integrated Cavity Antenna 5.3 SIW Narrow Wall Fed SIC Antennas at Ka- and V-bands 5.3.1 SIW Narrow Wall Fed SIC Antenna 5.3.2 SIW Narrow Wall Fed SIC Antenna Array at 35 GHz 5.3.3 60-GHz SIW Narrow Wall Fed SIC Antenna Array 5.4 Summary References CHAPTER 6 Cavity-Backed SIW Slot Antennas at 60 GHz 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Operating Principle of the Cavity-backed Antenna 6.2.1 Configuration 6.2.2 Analysis of the Backing-cavity 6.2.3 Design of the Backing-cavity 6.3 Cavity-backed SIW Slot Antenna 6.3.1 Feeding techniques 6.3.2 The SIW Backing-cavity 6.3.3 Radiating Slot 6.4 Types of SIW CBSAs 6.4.1 Wideband CBSAs 6.4.2 Dual-band CBSAs 6.4.3 Dual-polarized and Circularly Polarized CBSAs 6.4.4 Miniaturized CBSAs 6.5 CBSA Design Examples at 60 GHz 6.5.1 SIW CBSA with Different Slot WLR 6.5.2 Array Examples with Different WLRs of Slot 6.6 Summary References Chapter 7 Circularly Polarized SIW Slot LTCC Antennas at 60 GHz 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Key Techniques of mmW CP Antenna Array 7.2.1 Antenna Element Selection 7.2.2 AR Bandwidth Enhancement Methods 7.3 Wideband CP LTCC SIW Antenna Array at 60 GHz 7.3.1 Wideband AR Element 7.3.2 Isolation Consideration 7.3.3 Experiment Results and Discussion 7.4 Summary References Chapter 8 Gain Enhancement of LTCC Microstrip Patch Antenna by Suppressing Surface Waves 8.1 Introduction 8.1.1 Surface waves in microstrip patch antennas 8.1.2 Surface waves effects on microstrip patch antenna 8.2 State-of-The-Art Methods for Suppressing Surface Waves in Microstrip Patch Antennas 8.3 Microstrip Patch Antennas with Partial Substrate Removal 8.3.1 Technique of partial substrate removal 8.3.2 60-GHz LTCC antenna with partial substrate removal 8.4 Summary References Chapter 9 Substrate Integrated Antennas for Millimeter Wave Automotive Radars 9.1 Introduction 9.1.1 Automotive Radar Classification 9.1.2 Frequency Bands for Automotive Radars 9.1.3 Comparison of 24-GHz and 77-GHz Bands 9.1.4 Antenna System Considerations for Automotive Radar Sensors 9.1.5 Fabrication and Packaging Considerations 9.2 Sate-of-the-Art Antennas for 24-GHz and 77-GHz Automotive Radars 9.2.1 Selected state-of-the-Art Antennas for 24-GHz Automotive Radars 9.2.2 Selected state-of-the-Art Antennas for 77-GHz Automotive Radars 9.3 Single-layer SIW Slot Antenna Array for 24-Ghz Automotive Radars 9.3.1 Antenna Configuration 9.3.2 Slot Array Design 9.3.3 Feeding Network Design 9.3.4 Experiment Results 9.4 Transmit-array Antenna for 77-Ghz Automotive Radars 9.4.1 Unit Cell 9.4.2 Four-beam Transmit-array 9.4.3 Results 9.5 Summary References Chapter 10 Sidelobe Reduction of Substrate Integrated Antenna Arrays at Ka-Band 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Feeding Networks for Substrate Integrated Antenna Array 10.2.1 Series Feeding Network 10.2.2 Parallel/Corporate Feeding Network 10.2.3 Flat Lens/Reflector-Based Quasi-Optics Feeding Network 10.2.4 Power Dividers 10.3 SIW Antenna Arrays with Sidelobe Reduction at Ka-Band 10.3.1 Double-layer 8×8 SIW Slot Array 10.3.2 16×16 Monopulse SIW Slot Array 10.4 Summary References Chapter 11 Substrate Edge Antennas 11.1 Introduction 11.2 State-of-the-Art 11.2.1 End-fire SEAs 11.2.2 Leaky-wave SEAs 11.3 Tapered Strips for Wideband Impedance Matching 11.3.1 Tapered Triangular Strips 11.3.2 Tapered Rectangular Strips 11.4 Embedded Planar Lens for Gain Enhancement 11.4.1 Embedded Metallic Lens 11.4.2Embedded Gap Lens 11.5 Prism Lens for Broadband Fixed-Beam Leaky-wave SEAs 11.6 Summary References

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a significant update to the definitive book on aircraft system design This book is written for anyone who wants to understand how industry develops the customer requirement for aircraft into a fully integrated, tested, and qualified product that is safe to fly and fit for purpose. The new edition of Design and Development of Aircraft Systems fully expands its already comprehensive coverage to include both conventional and unmanned systems. It also updates all chapters to bring them in line with current design practice and technologies taught in courses at Cranfield, Bristol, and Loughborough universities in the UK. Design and Development of Aircraft Systems, 3rd Edition begins with an introduction to the subject. It then introduces readers to the aircraft systems (airframe, vehicle, avionic, mission, and ground systems). Following that comes a chapter on the design and development process. Other chapters look at design drivers, Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Series Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii Glossary of Terms xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 General 1 1.2 Systems Development 3 1.3 Skills 8 1.4 Human Aspects 9 1.4.1 Introduction 9 1.4.2 Design Considerations 10 1.4.3 Legislation 12 1.4.4 Summary of Legal Threats 12 1.4.5 Conclusions 13 1.5 Overview 14 Exercises 17 References 17 Further Reading 17 2 The Aircraft Systems 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Definitions 19 2.3 Everyday Examples of Systems 21 2.4 Aircraft Systems of Interest 24 2.4.1 Airframe Systems 28 2.4.2 Vehicle Systems 28 2.4.3 Interface Characteristics of Vehicle Systems 30 2.4.4 Avionics Systems 31 2.4.5 Interface Characteristics of Vehicle and Avionics Systems 31 2.4.5.1 Vehicle Systems 32 2.4.5.2 Avionics Systems 32 2.4.6 Mission Systems 32 2.4.7 Interface Characteristics of Mission Systems 33 2.5 Ground Systems 33 2.6 Generic System Definition 34 Exercises 37 References 37 Further Reading 37 3 The Design and Development Process 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Definitions 39 3.3 The Product Lifecycle 41 3.4 Concept Phase 46 3.4.1 Engineering Process 48 3.4.2 Engineering Skills 48 3.5 Definition Phase 50 3.5.1 Engineering Process 52 3.5.2 Engineering Skills 53 3.6 Design Phase 56 3.6.1 Engineering Process 56 3.6.2 Engineering Skills 57 3.7 Build Phase 58 3.7.1 Engineering Process 59 3.7.2 Engineering Skills 59 3.8 Test Phase 60 3.8.1 Engineering Process 60 3.8.2 Engineering Skills 60 3.9 Operate Phase 61 3.9.1 Engineering Process 62 3.9.2 Engineering Skills 63 3.10 Disposal or Retirement Phase 63 3.10.1 Engineering Process 65 3.10.2 Engineering Skills 65 3.11 Refurbishment Phase 65 3.11.1 Engineering Process 66 3.11.2 Engineering Skills 66 3.12 Whole Lifecycle Tasks 66 3.13 Summary 67 Exercises 69 References 70 Further Reading 70 4 Design Drivers 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Design Drivers in the Business Environment 75 4.2.1 Customer 76 4.2.2 Market and Competition 76 4.2.3 Capacity 77 4.2.4 Financial Issues 77 4.2.5 Defence Policy 78 4.2.6 Leisure and Business Interests 78 4.2.7 Politics 79 4.2.8 Technology 79 4.2.9 Global Economy 80 4.3 Design Drivers in the Project Environment 80 4.3.1 Standards and Regulations 80 4.3.2 Availability 81 4.3.3 Cost 81 4.3.4 Programme 82 4.3.5 Performance 82 4.3.6 Skills and Resources 82 4.3.7 Health, Safety, and Environmental Issues 83 4.3.8 Risk 84 4.4 Design Drivers in the Product Environment 84 4.4.1 Functional Performance 84 4.4.2 Human–Machine Interface 85 4.4.3 Crew and Passengers 86 4.4.4 Stores and Cargo 86 4.4.5 Structure 87 4.4.6 Safety 87 4.4.7 Quality 87 4.4.8 Environmental Conditions 87 4.5 Design Drivers in the Product Operating Environment 88 4.5.1 Heat 88 4.5.2 Noise 89 4.5.3 RF Radiation 89 4.5.4 Solar Energy 90 4.5.5 Altitude 91 4.5.6 Temperature 91 4.5.7 Contaminants, and Destructive and Hazardous Substances 92 4.5.8 Lightning 92 4.5.9 Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Contamination 92 4.5.10 Vibration 93 4.5.11 Shock 93 4.6 Interfaces with the Sub-system Environment 93 4.6.1 Physical Interfaces 94 4.6.2 Power Interfaces 94 4.6.3 Data Communication Interfaces 95 4.6.4 Input/Output Interfaces 95 4.6.5 Status/Discrete Data 95 4.7 Obsolescence 96 4.7.1 Introduction 96 4.7.2 The Threat of Obsolescence in the Product Lifecycle 97 4.7.2.1 Requirements Specification 98 4.7.2.2 People 99 4.7.2.3 Regulations 101 4.7.2.4 Design, Development, and Manufacture 101 4.7.2.5 The Supply Chain 103 4.7.3 Managing Obsolescence 103 4.8 Ageing Aircraft 106 4.8.1 Introduction 106 4.8.2 Some Examples 107 4.8.3 Systems Issues 108 4.8.4 Certification Issues 109 Exercises 109 References 110 Further Reading 110 5 System Architectures 113 5.1 Introduction 113 5.2 Definitions 114 5.3 System Architectures 115 5.3.1 Vehicle Systems 117 5.3.2 Avionic Systems 118 5.3.3 Mission Systems 118 5.3.4 Cabin Systems 119 5.3.5 Data Bus 119 5.4 Architecture Modelling and Trade-off 120 5.5 Example of a Developing Architecture 123 5.6 Evolution of Avionics Architectures 126 5.6.1 Distributed Analogue Architecture 127 5.6.2 Distributed Digital Architecture 128 5.6.3 Federated Digital Architecture 130 5.6.4 Integrated Modular Architecture 132 5.7 Example Architectures 135 5.7.1 Example 1: System Architecture 135 5.7.2 Example 2: Flight Control System 136 5.7.3 Example 3: Radar System 138 5.7.4 Example 4: Vehicle Systems Management 139 Exercises 149 References 149 Further Reading 149 6 System Integration 151 6.1 Introduction 151 6.2 Definitions 153 6.3 Examples of System Integration 153 6.3.1 Integration at the Component Level 153 6.3.2 Integration at the System Level 154 6.3.3 Integration at the Process Level 160 6.3.4 Integration at the Functional Level 163 6.3.5 Integration at the Information Level 166 6.3.6 Integration at the Prime Contractor Level 166 6.3.7 Integration Arising from Emergent Properties 167 6.3.8 Further Examples of Integrated Systems 169 6.3.8.1 The Airframe 169 6.3.8.2 Propulsion 171 6.3.8.3 Air Systems 171 6.4 System Integration Skills 172 6.5 Management of System Integration 175 6.5.1 Major Activities 175 6.5.2 Major Milestones 175 6.5.3 Decomposition and Definition Process 178 6.5.4 Integration and Verification Process 178 6.5.5 Component Engineering 178 6.6 Highly Integrated Systems 178 6.6.1 Integration of Primary Flight Control Systems 179 6.7 Discussion 182 Exercises 184 References 186 Further Reading 186 7 Verification of System Requirements 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Gathering Qualification Evidence in the Lifecycle 189 7.3 Test Methods 191 7.3.1 Inspection of Design 192 7.3.2 Calculation 192 7.3.3 Analogy 193 7.3.4 Modelling and Simulation 193 7.3.4.1 Modelling Techniques 197 7.3.5 Test Rigs 206 7.3.6 Environmental Testing 207 7.3.7 Integration Test Rigs 207 7.3.8 Aircraft Ground Testing 209 7.3.9 Flight Test 210 7.3.10 Trials 211 7.3.11 Operational Test 212 7.3.12 Demonstrations 212 7.4 An Example Using a Radar System 212 7.5 Summary 214 Exercises 215 References 215 Further Reading 216 8 Practical Considerations 217 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 Stakeholders 218 8.2.1 Identification of Stakeholders 218 8.2.2 Classification of Stakeholders 219 8.3 Communications 220 8.3.1 The Nature of Communication 222 8.3.2 Examples of Organisation Communication Media 223 8.3.2.1 Mechanisms for Generating Information 225 8.3.2.2 Unauthorised Access 225 8.3.2.3 Data Storage and Access 226 8.3.2.4 Data Discipline 227 8.3.3 The Cost of Poor Communication 227 8.3.4 A Lesson Learned 228 8.4 Giving and Receiving Criticism 230 8.4.1 The Need for Criticism in the Design Process 230 8.4.2 The Nature of Criticism 230 8.4.3 Behaviours Associated with Criticism 231 8.4.4 Conclusions 232 8.5 Supplier Relationships 232 8.6 Engineering Judgement 234 8.7 Complexity 234 8.8 Emergent Properties 235 8.9 Aircraft Wiring and Connectors 236 8.9.1 Aircraft Wiring 236 8.9.2 Aircraft Breaks 237 8.9.3 Wiring Bundle Definition 238 8.9.4 Wiring Routing 239 8.9.5 Wiring Sizing 239 8.9.6 Aircraft Electrical Signal Types 241 8.9.7 Electrical Segregation 242 8.9.8 The Nature of Aircraft Wiring and Connectors 242 8.9.9 Use of Twisted Pairs and Quads 244 8.10 Bonding and Grounding 246 Exercise 248 References 248 Further Reading 248 9 Configuration Control 249 9.1 Introduction 249 9.2 Configuration Control Process 249 9.3 A Simple Portrayal of a System 250 9.4 Varying System Configurations 252 9.4.1 System Configuration A 252 9.4.2 System Configuration B 253 9.4.3 System Configuration C 254 9.5 Forwards and Backwards Compatibility 255 9.5.1 Forwards Compatibility 255 9.5.2 Backwards Compatibility 256 9.6 Factors Affecting Compatibility 256 9.6.1 Hardware 257 9.6.2 Software 257 9.6.3 Wiring 258 9.7 System Evolution 258 9.8 Configuration Control 259 9.8.1 Airbus A380 Example 261 9.9 Interface Control 264 9.9.1 Interface Control Document 264 9.9.2 Aircraft-level Data Bus Data 266 9.9.3 System Internal Data Bus Data 266 9.9.4 Internal System Input/Output Data 267 9.9.5 Fuel Component Interfaces 267 9.10 Control of Day-to-Day Documents 267 Exercise 268 10 Aircraft System Examples 269 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 Design Considerations 269 10.3 Safety and Economic Considerations 271 10.4 Failure Severity Categorisation 272 10.5 Design Assurance Levels 272 10.6 Redundancy 273 10.6.1 Architecture Options 274 10.6.1.1 Simplex Architecture 274 10.6.1.2 Duplex Architecture 276 10.6.1.3 Dual/Dual Architecture 276 10.6.1.4 Triplex Architecture 276 10.6.1.5 Quadruplex Architecture 276 10.6.2 System Examples 277 10.6.2.1 Major Systems Event 277 10.6.2.2 Flight Critical Event 278 10.7 Integration of Aircraft Systems 280 10.7.1 Engine Control System 282 10.7.2 Flight Control System 283 10.7.3 Attitude Measurement System 284 10.7.4 Air Data System 284 10.7.5 Electrical Power System 285 10.7.6 Hydraulic Power System 286 10.8 Integration of Avionics Systems 287 References 290 11 Integration and Complexity: The Potential Impact on Flight Safety 291 11.1 Introduction 291 11.2 Integration 291 11.3 Complexity 294 11.4 Automation 298 11.5 Impact on Flight Safety Discussion 299 11.6 Single-pilot Operations 302 11.7 Postscript: Chaos Discussion 303 Exercises 307 References 307 Further Reading 308 12 Key Characteristics of Aircraft Systems 309 12.1 Introduction 309 12.2 Aircraft Systems 311 12.3 Avionics Systems 326 12.4 Mission Systems 336 12.5 Sizing and Scoping Systems 343 12.6 Analysis of the Fuel Penalties of Aircraft Systems 345 12.6.1 Introduction 345 12.6.2 Basic Formulation of Fuel Weight Penalties of Systems 346 12.6.3 Application of Fuel Weight Penalties Formulation for Multi-phase Flight 349 12.6.4 Analysis of Fuel Weight Penalties Formulation for Multi-phase Flight 350 12.6.5 Use of Fuel Weight Penalties to Compare Systems 350 12.6.6 Determining Input Data for Systems Weight Penalties Analysis 351 12.6.6.1 Lift/Drag Ratio 351 12.6.6.2 Specific Fuel Consumption 352 12.6.6.3 System Mass 352 12.6.6.4 System Drag Increase 352 12.6.6.5 Increase in sfc Due to Systems Power Off-takes 352 Nomenclature 354 References 354 13 Conclusions 357 13.1 What’s Next? 359 13.2 A Historical Footnote 361 References 362 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisDescribes applications of time-domain EM reciprocity and the Cagniard-deHoop technique to achieve solutions to fundamental antenna radiation and scattering problems This book offers an account of applications of the time-domain electromagnetic (TD EM) reciprocity theorem for solving selected problems of antenna theory. It focuses on the development of both TD numerical schemes and analytical methodologies suitable for analyzing TD EM wave fields associated with fundamental antenna topologies. Time-Domain Electromagnetic Reciprocity in Antenna Modeling begins by applying the reciprocity theorem to formulate a fundamentally new TD integral equation technique the Cagniard-deHoop method of moments (CdH-MoM) regarding the pulsed EM scattering and radiation from a thin-wire antenna. Subsequent chapters explore the use of TD EM reciprocity to evaluate the impact of a scatterer and a lumped load on the performance of wire antennas and propose a straightforward Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acronyms xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Synopsis 2 1.2 Prerequisites 5 1.2.1 One-Sided Laplace Transformation 6 1.2.2 Lorentz’s Reciprocity Theorem 8 2 Cagniard-Dehoop Method of Moments for Thin-Wire Antennas 15 2.1 Problem Description 15 2.2 Problem Formulation 16 2.3 Problem Solution 18 2.4 Antenna Excitation 20 2.4.1 Plane-Wave Excitation 20 2.4.2 Delta-Gap Excitation 21 Illustrative Example 22 3 Pulsed EM Mutual Coupling Between Parallel Wire Antennas 25 3.1 Problem Description 25 3.2 Problem Formulation 26 3.3 Problem Solution 27 4 Incorporating Wire-Antenna Losses 29 4.1 Modification of the Impedance Matrix 30 5 Connecting a Lumped Element to The Wire Antenna 31 5.1 Modification of the Impedance Matrix 32 6 Pulsed EM Radiation from a Straight Wire Antenna 35 6.1 Problem Description 35 6.2 Source-Type Representations for the TD Radiated EM Fields 36 6.3 Far-Field TD Radiation Characteristics 38 7 EM Reciprocity Based Calculation of Td Radiation Characteristics 41 7.1 Problem Description 41 7.2 Problem Solution 42 Illustrative Numerical Example 43 8 Influence of a Wire Scatterer on a Transmitting Wire Antenna 47 8.1 Problem Description 47 8.2 Problem Solution 48 Illustrative Numerical Example 49 9 Influence of a Lumped Load on EM Scattering of a Receiving Wire Antenna 53 9.1 Problem Description 53 9.2 Problem Solution 54 Illustrative Numerical Example 55 10 Influence of a Wire Scatterer on a Receiving Wire Antenna 59 10.1 Problem Description 59 10.2 Problem Solution 59 Illustrative Numerical Example 61 11 EM-Field Coupling to Transmission Lines 65 11.1 Introduction 65 11.2 Problem Description 68 11.3 EM-Field-To-Line Interaction 68 11.4 Relation to Agrawal Coupling Model 71 11.5 Alternative Coupling Models Based on EM Reciprocity 73 11.5.1 EM Plane-Wave Incidence 73 11.5.2 Known EM Source Distribution 74 12 EM Plane-Wave Induced Thévenin’s Voltage on Transmission Lines 77 12.1 Transmission Line Above the Perfect Ground 77 12.1.1 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x1 78 12.1.2 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x2 81 12.2 Narrow Trace on a Grounded Slab 83 12.2.1 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x1 85 12.2.2 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x2 88 Illustrative Numerical Example 89 13 VED-Induced Thévenin’s Voltage on Transmission Lines 93 13.1 Transmission Line Above the Perfect Ground 93 13.1.1 Excitation EM Fields 94 13.1.2 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x1 97 13.1.3 Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x2 98 13.2 Influence of Finite Ground Conductivity 98 13.2.1 Excitation EM Fields 98 13.2.2 Correction to Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x1 100 13.2.3 Correction to Thévenin’s Voltage at x = x2 101 Illustrative Numerical Example 101 14 Cagniard-Dehoop Method of Moments for Planar-Strip Antennas 103 14.1 Problem Description 105 14.2 Problem Formulation 106 14.3 Problem Solution 107 14.4 Antenna Excitation 109 14.4.1 Plane-Wave Excitation 110 14.4.2 Delta-Gap Excitation 111 14.5 Extension to a Wide-Strip Antenna 111 Illustrative Numerical Example 117 15 Incorporating Strip-Antenna Losses 121 15.1 Modification of the Impeditivity Matrix 122 15.1.1 Strip with Conductive Properties 123 15.1.2 Strip with Dielectric Properties 123 15.1.3 Strip with Conductive and Dielectric Properties 124 15.1.4 Strip with Drude-Type Dispersion 124 16 Connecting a Lumped Element to The Strip Antenna 125 16.1 Modification of the Impeditivity Matrix 126 17 Including a Pec Ground Plane 129 17.1 Problem Description 129 17.2 Problem Formulation 130 17.3 Problem Solution 131 17.4 Antenna Excitation 132 Illustrative Numerical Example 133 A Green’s Function Representation in an Unbounded, Homogeneous, and Isotropic Medium 137 B Time-Domain Response of an Infinite Cylindrical Antenna 141 B.1 Transform-Domain Solution 141 B.2 Time-Domain Solution 143 C Impedance Matrix 147 C.1 Generic Integral IA 147 C.2 Generic Integral IB 149 C.3 TD Impedance Matrix Elements 150 D Mutual-Impedance Matrix 151 D.1 Generic Integral JA 151 D.2 Generic Integral JB 153 D.3 TD Mutual-Impedance Matrix Elements 154 E Internal Impedance of a Solid Wire 157 F VED-Induced EM Coupling to Transmission Lines — Generic Integrals 159 F.1 Generic Integral I 159 F.2 Generic Integral J 163 F.3 Generic Integral K 165 G Impeditivity Matrix 169 G.1 Generic Integral J 169 G.1.1 Generic Integral JA 171 G.1.2 Generic Integral JB 175 H A Recursive Convolution Method and Its Implementation 177 H.1 Convolution-Integral Representation 177 H.2 Illustrative Example 179 H.3 Implementation of the Recursive Convolution Method 180 I Conductance and Capacitance of a Thin High-Contrast Layer 183 J Ground-Plane Impeditivity Matrix 187 J.1 Generic Integral I 187 J.1.1 Generic Integral IA 189 J.1.2 Generic Integral IB 193 K Implementation of CDH-Mom for Thin-Wire Antennas 195 K.1 Setting Space-time Input Parameters 195 K.2 Antenna Excitation 197 K.2.1 Plane-Wave Excitation 197 K.2.2 Delta-Gap Excitation 199 K.3 Impedance Matrix 200 K.4 Marching-on-in-Time Solution Procedure 202 K.5 Calculation of Far-Field TD Radiation Characteristics 203 L Implementation of VED-Induced Thévenin’s Voltages on a Transmission Line 205 L.1 Setting Space-Time Input Parameters 205 L.2 Setting Excitation Parameters 206 L.3 Calculating Thévenin’s Voltages 207 L.4 Incorporating Ground Losses 211 M Implementation of CDH-Mom for Narrow-Strip Antennas 215 M.1 Setting Space-Time Input Parameters 215 M.2 Delta-Gap Antenna Excitation 217 M.3 Impeditivity Matrix 217 M.4 Marching-on-in-Time Solution Procedure 200 References 223 Index 227

Read more less

Book SynopsisDC-DC Converter Topologies A comprehensive look at DC-DC converters and advanced power converter topologies for all skills levels As it can be rare for source voltage to meet the requirements of a Direct Current (DC) load, DC-DC converters are essential to access service. DC-DC power converters employ power semiconductor devices (like MOSFETs and IGBTs) as switches and passive elements such as capacitors, inductors, and transformers to alter the voltage provided by a DC source into the necessary DC voltage as is required by a DC load. This source can be a battery, solar panels, fuel cells, or a DC bus voltage fed by rectified AC utility voltage. As the many components of DC-DC converters can be differently arranged into circuit structures called topologies, there are as many possible circuit topologies as there are possible combinations of circuit elements. Focusing on DC-DC switch-mode power converters ranging from 50 W to 10kW, DC-DC Converter TopologiesTable of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvi 1 Basic Concepts 1 1.1 Linear Voltage Regulators 1 1.2 Switch-Mode Power Supply Fundamentals 3 1.2.1 Buck Converter 3 1.2.2 Boost Converter 5 1.2.3 Buck–Boost Converter 6 1.3 PWM Converters with Voltage Step-Up and Step-Down Capabilities 8 1.3.1 Cuk Converter 8 1.3.2 Single-Ended Primary Inductance Converter (SEPIC) 9 1.3.3 Zeta Converter 10 1.3.4 Comparison Between Converters with Voltage Step-Up and Step-Down Capabilities 10 1.4 Interleaved Converters 12 1.5 Semiconductor Devices 14 1.5.1 Silicon Diodes 14 1.5.2 Silicon MOSFETs 15 1.5.3 Silicon IGBTs 17 1.5.4 Gate Drive Circuits 18 1.5.5 Wide Bandgap Devices 19 1.6 Snubbers 21 1.7 Conclusion 23 References 23 2 Non-isolated Zero-voltage Switching PWM Converters 25 2.1 Basic ZVS Principles for MOSFETS 26 2.2 ZVS-PWM Quasi-Square-Wave DC–DC Converters 28 2.3 ZVS-PWM DC–DC Converters with Auxiliary Circuits 30 2.3.1 Nonresonant Auxiliary Circuits 31 2.3.2 Resonant Auxiliary Circuits 37 2.3.3 Dual Auxiliary Circuits 40 2.4 Miscellaneous Considerations 42 2.4.1 Application-Specific ZVS-PWM Converters 42 2.4.2 ZVS-PWM Techniques in Converters with Wide Bandgap Devices 43 2.5 Conclusion 44 References 45 3 Non-isolated Zero-current Switching PWM Converters 46 3.1 ZCS-PWM Converters with Series-Resonant Auxiliary Circuits 47 3.1.1 ZCS-PWM Converter with Fully Resonant Auxiliary Circuit 48 3.1.2 ZCS-PWM Converter with Modified Resonant Auxiliary Circuit 51 3.1.3 Converter with Hard-Switching Auxiliary Circuit 51 3.2 ZCS-PWM Boost Converters with Conventional PWM Converter Main Switch Current Stress 52 3.2.1 ZCS-PWM Converter with Series Boost Diode 52 3.2.2 ZCS-PWM Converter with Output Resonance 54 3.2.3 ZCT-PWM Converters with Parallel Auxiliary Circuit 55 3.3 ZVSZCS-PWM Boost Converters 57 3.4 Conclusion 60 References 61 4 Basic Isolated Converters 63 4.1 Transformer Models 64 4.2 Flyback Converter 64 4.3 Forward Converter 67 4.4 Variations on the Forward Converter 69 4.4.1 Forward Converter with RCD Snubber 69 4.4.2 Forward Converter with LCDD Snubber 70 4.4.3 Forward Converter with Regenerative Energy Snubber 71 4.5 Basic Two-Switch Isolated Converters 72 4.5.1 Two-Switch Forward Converter 72 4.5.2 Push–Pull Converter 74 4.5.3 Half-Bridge Converter 76 4.6 Full-Bridge Converter 77 4.7 Conclusion 80 Reference 81 5 Secondary-side Implementations in Isolated DC–DC Converters 82 5.1 Synchronous Rectifiers 82 5.2 Current Doublers 90 5.3 Multi-Output Converters 94 5.4 Conclusion 98 References 99 6 Soft-switching Forward and Flyback Converters 102 6.1 Forward Converters with Resonant Reset 103 6.2 Active Clamp Converter 104 6.2.1 Modes of Operation 106 6.2.2 Design Considerations 110 6.2.3 Active Clamp Flyback Converter 114 6.3 Alternatives to the Active Clamp Converter 115 6.3.1 Forward Converters 115 6.3.2 Flyback Converters 117 6.3.3 Converters with Regenerative Energy Snubber 119 6.4 Conclusion 120 References 121 7 The ZVS-PWM Full-bridge Converter 123 7.1 DC–DC PWM Full-Bridge Converter with Basic PWM Control 124 7.2 ZVS-PWM Full-Bridge Converter with Phase-Shift PWM 125 7.3 Issues Related to the Operation of ZVS-PWM PWM Full-Bridge Converter 131 7.3.1 ZVS Operation 131 7.3.2 Duty-Cycle Loss 134 7.3.3 Voltage Ringing 136 7.4 ZVS-PWM PWM Full-Bridge Converter Design Considerations 137 7.5 Light Load Operation and Hybrid PWM 140 7.6 ZVS PWM Full-Bridge Converters with Wide Bandgap Devices 140 7.7 Conclusion 141 References 142 8 Variations on the Conventional Zero-voltage-Switching DC–DC PWM Full-bridge Converter 144 8.1 Modified ZVS-PWM DC–DC Full-Bridge Converter with Saturable Reactors 145 8.1.1 Modified ZVS-PWM-FB Converter with Primary-Side Saturable Reactor 145 8.1.2 Modified ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Secondary-Side Saturable Reactors 146 8.2 Modified ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Passive Series Auxiliary Circuits 149 8.3 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Passive Parallel Auxiliary Circuits 151 8.4 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Passive Parallel Auxiliary Circuits with a Transformer 153 8.4.1 ZVS-PWM-FB Converter with a Passive Auxiliary Series Auxiliary Circuit with a Transformer 153 8.4.2 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Passive Parallel Auxiliary Circuits and Reduced Output Current Ripple 156 8.5 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Active Auxiliary Circuits 157 8.6 ZVS-PWM-FB Converter with a Single Active Auxiliary Circuit 161 8.7 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters Based on Dual Half-Bridge Converters 164 8.8 ZVS-PWM-FB Converters with Modified Secondary-Side Circuits for ZVS Operation 167 8.9 Conclusion 170 References 172 9 Zero-voltage-zero-current-switching DC–DC Full-bridge PWM Converters 174 9.1 Fundamental ZVZCS-PWM DC–DC Full-Bridge Converter 175 9.2 ZVZCS-PWM DC–DC Full-Bridge Converters with Secondary Auxiliary Circuit 183 9.3 Variations of ZVZCS Converters for Full ZVS or Full ZCS Operation 193 9.3.1 ZVS Converters 193 9.3.2 ZCS Converters 194 9.3.3 ZVS-PWM Converters Based on ZVZCS-PWM Converters with Triangular Primary Current Waveform 195 9.4 Conclusion 198 References 199 10 Isolated Current-fed DC–DC PWM Converters 201 10.1 Basic Current-Fed Push–Pull Converter 203 10.2 Basic Two-Inductor Current-Fed Converter 204 10.3 Modified Two-Inductor Current-Fed Converter with Auxiliary Transformer 207 10.4 Basic Current-Fed Full-Bridge Topology 210 10.5 Current-Fed DC–DC Full-Bridge Converters with Blocking Diodes 212 10.6 Current-Fed DC–DC Full-Bridge Converters without Blocking Diodes 215 10.6.1 ZVS-PWM Active-Clamp Full-Bridge Converter 215 10.6.2 ZCS-PWM Full-Bridge Converter with Parallel Auxiliary Circuit 217 10.7 Conclusion 219 References 220 11 Resonant Converters Part I – Fundamentals 222 11.1 Resonant Power Conversion Fundamentals 223 11.2 Fundamental Resonant DC–DC Converters 228 11.2.1 Resonant Converter Analysis Using First Harmonic Approximation Method 231 11.2.2 Series-Resonant Converter vs Parallel-Resonant Converter 234 11.2.3 Series-Parallel-Resonant Converter 236 11.3 LLC Resonant Converter 238 11.4 Other Resonant DC–DC Converters 241 11.5 Conclusion 245 References 246 12 Resonant Converters Part II – PWM Controlled, Quasi-resonant, and Ultrahigh-frequency Converters 248 12.1 Fixed Frequency Resonant Converters 249 12.1.1 Full-Bridge Resonant Converters Operated with Phase-Shift PWM 249 12.1.2 Resonant Converters Operated with Asymmetrical PWM 252 12.1.3 Adding Variable Resonant Components 257 12.2 Quasi-Resonant Converters 258 12.2.1 Resonant Pulse Converters 264 12.2.2 Fixed-Frequency Quasi-Resonant Converters 265 12.3 Ultrahigh Frequency Converters 266 12.3.1 Multi-Resonant Converters 267 12.3.2 Ultrahigh Frequency Converters Based on Radio-Frequency Amplifier Circuits 268 12.3.3 Ultrahigh Frequency Converters with Air-Core Inductors 269 12.4 Conclusion 270 References 270 13 Three-level DC–DC Converters 273 13.1 Fundamental Three-Level DC–DC PWM Converters 274 13.1.1 Neutral-Point-Clamped Three-Level DC–DC Converter 274 13.1.2 Flying Capacitor Three-Level DC–DC Converter 280 13.1.3 Three-Level DC–DC Converter with Series Blocking Capacitor 286 13.1.4 Comparison of Fundamental Three-Level DC–DC Converter Topologies 291 13.2 Modified Three-Level DC–DC Converters 292 13.2.1 ZVS Three-Level Converters 292 13.2.2 ZVZCS Three-Level Converters 298 13.3 Stacked Converters 302 13.4 Three-Level DC–DC Converters in Applications with Low and Conventional DC Bus Voltage 306 13.5 Conclusion 307 References 308 14 High Gain Converters 311 14.1 Voltage Multiplier Circuits 312 14.1.1 Output Voltage Multiplier Circuits 312 14.1.2 Internal Voltage Multiplier Circuits 316 14.2 Switched Capacitor Converters 318 14.3 Voltage-Lift and Switched Inductor Converters 321 14.4 Cascaded and Quadratic Converters 326 14.5 Converters with Magnetic Coupling 328 14.5.1 Tapped Inductor Converters 328 14.5.2 Coupled Inductor Converters 329 14.5.3 Transformer-Coupled Converters 331 14.6 Multi-Level and Interleaved Converters 331 14.6.1 Multi-Level Converters 332 14.6.2 Interleaved Converters 335 14.7 Hybrid Converters and Converter Selection 336 14.8 Conclusion 340 References 340 15 Three-phase DC–DC Converters 343 15.1 Fundamental Voltage-Fed Three-Phase DC–DC PWM Converter 344 15.1.1 Basic Operating Principles with Symmetrical PWM 344 15.1.2 Operation with Asymmetrical PWM 346 15.1.3 Modified Output Section with Three Output Diodes 347 15.2 Resonant Converters 349 15.2.1 Parallel Resonant Converter Based on the Fundamental Converter 349 15.2.2 Three-Phase Series-Parallel Resonant Converters with Variable and Fixed Switching Frequency Operation 350 15.3 Three-Phase Current-Fed DC–DC PWM Converters 351 15.3.1 Three-Phase ZVS Active Clamp Converter 351 15.3.2 Three-Phase ZCS Converter 353 15.4 Higher-Power Three-Phase DC–DC Converters 355 15.4.1 High-Power Converter with Three Single-Phase PWM Full-Bridges 355 15.4.2 High-Power Converter with Three Single-Phase Resonant Full-Bridges 356 15.5 Three-Switch Three-Phase DC–DC PWM Converters 356 15.5.1 Three-Phase Push-Pull Converter 357 15.5.2 ZVS Active Clamp Converter 359 15.5.3 ZCS Converter with Secondary-Side Resonance 361 15.5.4 Converter with Mini-Flyback Snubber 362 15.6 Miscellaneous Three-Phase Converter Examples 363 15.6.1 Three-Phase DC–DC Multi-Level Converter 363 15.6.2 Three-Phase DC–DC High-Gain Converter 364 15.7 Three-Phase Transformer Implementations 365 15.8 Conclusion 367 References 367 16 Bidirectional and Dual Active Bridge Converters 369 16.1 Basic Non-Isolated Bidirectional Converters 370 16.2 ZVS Operation of the Fundamental Buck-Boost Bidirectional Converter 372 16.2.1 Bidirectional Quasi-Square Wave Converter 372 16.2.2 Four-Switch Buck-Boost Converter 373 16.2.3 Active Auxiliary Circuits 375 16.3 Bidirectional Converter Topologies with Transformer Isolation 377 16.4 Dual Active Bridge Converters 381 16.4.1 Dual Active Bridge Half-Bridge Converter 381 16.4.2 Dual Active Bridge PWM Full-Bridge Converters 383 16.5 Conclusion 387 References 388 17 Miscellaneous DC–DC Converters 391 17.1 Z-Source Converters 392 17.2 Low Voltage Gain Converters for Voltage Regulator Modules 396 17.3 T-Type Converters 401 17.4 Multi-Port Converters 405 17.4.1 Non-Isolated Multi-Input Converters 406 17.4.2 Isolated Multi-Port Converters 408 17.5 Conclusion 412 References 413 Appendix 415 Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisBy outlining how reliability engineering practices fit within a product development program, the reader will have a better understanding of how roles and goals align with the program and how this applies to their specific role.Reliability Culture: How Leaders Build Organizations that Create Reliable Products, will help readers develop a deep understanding of reliability, including what it really means for organizations, how to implement it in daily operations, and, most importantly, how to build a culture that is centered around reliability and can generate impressive profits. When senior leaders work toward reliability, product details often get lost in translation. This book will enable organizations to overcome this problem by showing leaders how their actions truly affect product development. They will be introduced to new methods that will immediately enable them to have carefully crafted product specifications translated into matching, highly reliable productsTable of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword by Dr. Andre Kleyner xi Acknowledgements xiii Introduction xv 1 The Product Development Challenge 1 Key Players 1 Follow the Carrot or Get Out of the Race 3 It’s Not That I’m Lazy, It’s That I Just Don’t Care 5 Product-specification Profiles 8 Product Drivers 9 Bounding Factors 10 Reliability Discipline 11 References 15 2 Balancing Business Goals and Reliability 17 Return on Investment 17 Program Accounting 18 Rule of 10s 20 Design for Reliability 21 Reliability Engineer’s Responsibility to Connect to the Business Case 23 Role of the Reliability Professional 26 Summary 28 References 29 3 Directed Product Development Culture 31 The Past, Present, and Future of Reliability Engineering 32 Influences 32 The Invention of “Inventing” 33 Quality and Inventing Are Behaviors 34 As Always, WWII Changed Everything 35 The Postwar Influence Diminishes 36 The Emergence of Japan 37 Reliability Is No Longer a Luxury 38 Understand the Intent 39 Levels of Awareness 40 Summary 41 References 42 4 Awakening 43 Stage 1 43 Stage 2 43 Stage 3 44 Stage 4 44 The Ownership Chart 44 Comparing Charts 45 Benefits of the Ownership Chart 45 Communicating Clearly 50 Behind the Words at Work 51 When You Want to Improve 53 My Personal Case 53 Getting the Message Across 54 The Importance of Time 54 When We Can’t Communicate at the Organizational Level 55 When Scheduling Trumps Testing 57 Summary 58 5 Goals and Intentions 61 Testing Intent 61 Testing to Improve 61 Quick Question 61 Ownership 62 Fear-driven Testing 62 Transferring Ownership 63 Leadership and Transference 64 Objectives and Transference 65 What Transferred Ownership Looks Like 67 The Benefits of Successful Transference 67 A Racing Bike Analogy 68 Guided by All the Goals All the Time 69 The Roadmap Conundrum 69 Why We Embrace Tunnel Vision 69 When No One Has a Plan 69 Summary 70 References 70 6 New Roles 71 Role of Change Agents 71 Reliability Czar 72 The Czar is a Link 73 Direct Input 74 Distilling Information 74 Who is the Czar? 74 How the Czar Works with the Team and Leadership 76 Tips for the Czar 77 Role of Facilitators 78 Facilitation Technique 78 Creating a Narrative 80 Role of Reliability Professionals 80 Stop Asking for Resources 81 Connect Reliability to the Market 81 Summary 83 7 Program Assessment 85 Measurements 85 What to Measure 86 Using Reliability Testing as Program Guidance 86 The Primary Wear-out Failure Mode 88 The Random Fail Rate During Use Life 90 Reliability Maturity Assessments 90 Steps for an Assessment 91 The Team 92 The Topics 93 The Scoring 94 Analyze: The Reliability Maturity Matrix 94 Review with the Team and Summarize 95 Recommend Actions 98 Assess Particular Areas in More Detail 98 Golden Nuggets 98 Summary 99 References 99 8 Reliability Culture Tools 101 Advancing Culture 101 Manipulative Managing 101 Manipulative Management in Action 102 An Alternative to Manipulation 102 Transfer Why 103 Reliability Bounding 103 Fire and Forget 103 Reliability Feedback 104 Strategy Bounding 104 Strategy Bounding Toolkit 104 Midprogram Feedback 105 The Bounding Number 105 Bounding ROI 106 Invest and Return Tables 107 Deciding by Bounding 110 Anchoring 110 Closed Loop Control 112 Open Loop Control 112 Intent Anchor 113 Delivery Anchor 114 The Value of Anchoring 115 Focus Rotation 115 The Focus Rotation Steps 115 Working in Freedom and with Ownership 116 The Gore Example 117 Why Don’t All Companies Do This? 118 Summary 118 9 Guiding the Program in Motion 119 Guidance Bounding 119 Guidance Bounding ROI 120 The Plan 120 The Issue 120 Technology Cascade 120 Timing is Everything 121 Our Choice 121 Using Bounding 121 The Results 122 Program Risk Effects Analysis 122 What Now? 123 Just Let It Go 123 Fully Access Risk 124 Program Freezes Don’t Work 124 The Chill Phase 125 PREA Tables and Calculations 126 Summary 130 10 Risk Analysis Guided Project Management 131 Failure Mode Effects Analysis Methodology 131 Design Failure Mode Effects Analysis 132 Have an Experienced Facilitator Who Is Only Facilitating 132 The Facilitator Should Not Be the Scribe or “Spreadsheet Master” 132 Don’t Let Conversations Go So Deep that 90% of the Room Is Just Listening Without Being Able to Contribute 133 Make a Scoring System that Is Meaningful, Not Standardized 133 The Scoring Is Comparative, Not Absolute 133 Reliability Design Risk Summary 134 The Objective of RDRS 134 Three Ranking Factors 135 Scoring and Evaluation 135 The Benefits of RDRS 136 Process Failure Mode Effects Analysis 136 Use Failure Mode Effects Analysis 136 Failure Reporting and Corrective Action System 137 Root Cause Analysis 138 Reaching a Wrong Conclusion 138 Reaching the Right Conclusion 138 The Stages of RCA 139 Brainstorming 140 Fundamentals of Brainstorming 140 Preparing for a Session 141 Select Participants 141 Draft a Background Memo 141 Create a List of Lead Questions 141 Three Simple Brainstorming Warm-ups 141 Setting Session Rules 142 Variations on Classic Brainstorming 142 Summary 143 References 144 11 The Reliability Program 145 Reliability Program Plan 145 Common Reliability Program Plan Pitfalls 146 The Plan Doesn’t Account for a Broad Audience 146 Not Including Return on Investment (ROI) 146 Too Much 147 Too Little 147 Major Elements of a Reliability Program Plan 149 Purpose 149 Scope 150 Acronyms and Definitions 150 Product Description 151 Design for Reliability (DfR) 151 Reliability Goals 152 Use Case, Environment, Uptime 153 Recommended Tools by Program Phase 154 Design Risk Analysis 155 Failure Mode Effects Analysis (FMEA) 155 Reliability Allocation Model 157 Testing 159 Summary 166 12 Sustained Culture 167 Lasting Change 167 The Seven-stage Process 167 Summary 168 Index 171

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive and in-depth overview of the fundamental principles of virtual and augmented reality technologies and their key applications Virtual and Augmented Reality presents a treatment of the hot topics of VR and AR technologies, including the advances in 3D motion tracking and semantic scene understanding with artificial intelligence based on deep neural networks, to provide advanced coverage of the fundamental principles of these two subjects, as well as serve as a reference text for both academia and industry practitioners. The book includes necessary derivations, starting from the fundamentals, and builds up step-by-step to more advanced concepts, such as 3D graphics and computer vision techniques, all the way to overall systems architectures and applications. The book also covers historical perspectives, highlighting the seminal developments along the way, as well as look ahead to the future applications beyond the current state-of-the-art commercial deployments to depict the

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplore this indispensable guide covering the fundamentals of IOT and wearable devices from a leading voice in the field Fundamentals of IoT and Wearable Technology Design delivers a comprehensive exploration of the foundations of the Internet of Things (IoT) and wearable technology. Throughout the textbook, the focus is on IoT and wearable technology and their applications, including mobile health, environment, home automation, and smart living. Readers will learn about the most recent developments in the design and prototyping of these devices. This interdisciplinary work combines technical concepts from electrical, mechanical, biomedical, computer, and industrial engineering, all of which are used in the design and manufacture of IoT and wearable devices. Fundamentals of IoT and Wearable Technology Design thoroughly investigates the foundational characteristics, architectural aspects, and practical considerations, while offering readers detailed and systematic design and prototypTable of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii Acknowledgment xxi 1 Introduction and Historical Background 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 IoT and Wearables Market Size 2 1.1.2 The World of IoT and Wearables 2 1.1.2.1 What Is an IoT Device? 3 1.1.2.2 Characteristics of IoT Systems 3 1.1.2.3 What Exactly Is a Wearable Device? 4 1.1.2.4 Characteristics of Wearable Devices 7 1.1.2.5 IoT vs. M2M 7 1.1.2.6 IoT vs. Wearables 8 1.1.3 IoT: Historical Background 10 1.1.4 Wearable Technology: Historical Background 12 1.1.4.1 The Wearables We Know Today 15 1.1.5 Challenges 19 1.1.5.1 Security 19 1.1.5.2 Privacy 20 1.1.5.3 Standards and Regulations 21 1.1.5.4 Energy and Power Issues 21 1.1.5.5 Connectivity 22 1.2 Conclusion 22 Problems 22 Interview Questions 23 Further Reading 24 2 Applications 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 IoT and Wearable Technology Enabled Applications 27 2.2.1 Health care 27 2.2.2 Fitness and Well-being 29 2.2.3 Sports 30 2.2.4 Entertainment and Gaming 31 2.2.5 Pets 32 2.2.6 Military and Public Safety 33 2.2.7 Travel and Tourism 34 2.2.8 Aerospace 34 2.2.9 Education 35 2.2.10 Fashion 36 2.2.11 Business, Retail, and Logistics 36 2.2.12 Industry 37 2.2.12.1 The Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT) 37 2.2.13 Home Automation and Smart Living 38 2.2.14 Smart Grids 39 2.2.15 Environment and Agriculture 40 2.2.16 Novel and Unusual Applications 41 2.3 Smart Cities 42 2.4 Internet of Vehicles (IoV) 44 2.5 Conclusion 44 Problems 45 Interview Questions 46 Further Reading 46 3 Architectures 53 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 IoT and Wearable Technology Architectures 54 3.2.1 Introduction 54 3.2.1.1 The Motivations Behind New Architectures 54 3.2.1.2 Edge Computing 56 3.2.1.3 Cloud, Fog, and Mist 57 3.2.2 IoT Architectures 59 3.2.2.1 The OSI Model 60 3.2.2.2 Why Does the OSI Model Matter? 60 3.2.2.3 Data Flow Across the OSI Model 62 3.2.2.4 Common IoT Architectures 62 3.2.2.5 Layer 1: Perception and Actuation (Sensors and Actuators) 67 3.2.2.6 Layer 2: Data Conditioning and Linking (Aggregation, Digitization, and Forwarding) 67 3.2.2.7 Layer 3: Network Transport (Preprocessing, Preliminary Analytics, and Routing) 68 3.2.2.8 Layer 4: Application (Analytics, Control, and Archiving) 69 3.2.3 Wearable Device Architecture 69 3.3 Conclusion 70 Problems 71 Technical Interview Questions 72 Further Reading 72 4 Hardware 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 Hardware Components Inside IoT and Wearable Devices 77 4.2.1 Sensors 78 4.2.1.1 Sensor Properties 79 4.2.1.2 MEMS Sensors 80 4.2.1.3 Commonly Used Sensors in IoT and Wearable Devices 81 4.2.1.4 Wireless Sensors 83 4.2.1.5 Multisensor Modules 84 4.2.1.6 Signal Conditioning for Sensors 85 4.2.2 Actuators 85 4.2.3 Microcontrollers, Microprocessors, SoC, and Development Boards 86 4.2.3.1 Selecting the Right Processing Unit for Your IoT or Wearable Device 89 4.2.4 Wireless Connectivity Unit 90 4.2.5 Battery Technology 91 4.2.5.1 Power Management Circuits 94 4.2.6 Displays and Other User Interface Elements 95 4.2.7 Microphones and Speakers 95 4.3 Conclusion 95 Problems 96 Technical Interview Questions 97 Further Reading 97 5 Communication Protocols and Technologies 101 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Types of Networks 101 5.3 Network Topologies 103 5.3.1 Mesh 103 5.3.2 Star 104 5.3.3 Bus 104 5.3.4 Ring 104 5.3.5 Point to Point 104 5.4 Protocols 105 5.4.1 Application Layer Protocols 105 5.4.1.1 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 106 5.4.1.2 Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) 106 5.4.1.3 Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP) 106 5.4.1.4 Data Distribution Service (DDS) 106 5.4.1.5 AMQP (Advanced Message Queuing Protocol) 107 5.4.2 Transport Layer Protocols 107 5.4.2.1 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) 107 5.4.2.2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 107 5.4.3 Network Layer Protocols 107 5.4.3.1 IPv4 and IPv6 107 5.4.3.2 6LoWPAN 107 5.4.3.3 RPL 108 5.4.3.4 Thread 108 5.4.3.5 LoRaWAN 108 5.4.4 Protocols and Technologies in Physical and Data Link Layers 108 5.4.4.1 Short Range 109 5.4.4.2 Medium Range 110 5.4.4.3 Long Range 110 5.5 Conclusion 112 Problems 112 Technical Interview Questions 113 Further Reading 114 6 Product Development and Design Considerations 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Product Development Process 119 6.2.1 Ideation and Research 120 6.2.2 Requirements/Specifications 120 6.2.3 Engineering Analysis 120 6.2.3.1 Hardware Design 120 6.2.3.2 Software Development 121 6.2.3.3 Mechanical Design 121 6.2.3.4 PCB Design 122 6.2.4 Prototyping 122 6.2.5 Testing and Validation 123 6.2.5.1 Review and Design Verification 123 6.2.5.2 Unit Testing 123 6.2.5.3 Integration Testing 123 6.2.5.4 Certification and Documentation 124 6.2.5.5 Production Review 124 6.2.6 Production 124 6.3 IoT and Wearable Product Requirements 124 6.3.1 Form Factor 125 6.3.2 Power Requirements 126 6.3.2.1 Energy Budget 126 6.3.3 Wireless Connectivity Requirements 127 6.3.3.1 RF Design and Antenna Matching 127 6.3.3.2 Link Budget 128 6.3.4 Cost Requirements 131 6.4 Design Considerations 131 6.4.1 Operational Factors 131 6.4.2 Durability and Longevity 131 6.4.3 Reliability 132 6.4.4 Usability and User Interface 132 6.4.5 Aesthetics 132 6.4.6 Compatibility 132 6.4.7 Comfort and Ergonomic Factors 133 6.4.8 Safety Factors 133 6.4.9 Washing Factors (Wash-ability) 133 6.4.10 Maintenance Factors 134 6.4.11 Packaging and Material Factors 134 6.4.12 Security Factors 134 6.4.13 Technology Obsolescence 135 6.5 Conclusion 135 Problems 135 Interview Questions 136 Further Reading 137 7 Cloud and Edge: Architectures, Topologies, and Platforms 139 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Cloud 140 7.2.1 Why Cloud? 140 7.2.2 Types of Cloud 140 7.2.2.1 Private Cloud 140 7.2.2.2 Public Cloud 141 7.2.2.3 Hybrid Cloud 141 7.2.2.4 Community Cloud 141 7.2.3 Cloud Services 141 7.2.3.1 Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) 141 7.2.3.2 Software as a Service (SaaS) 142 7.2.3.3 Platform as a Service (PaaS) 142 7.2.3.4 Functions as a Service (FaaS) 142 7.2.4 OpenStack Architecture 142 7.2.4.1 Components of OpenStack 142 7.3 Edge and Fog 144 7.3.1 The OpenFog Reference Architecture 145 7.3.2 Fog Topologies 147 7.4 Platforms 148 7.4.1 Criteria for Choosing a Platform 150 7.5 Data Analytics and Machine Learning 151 7.6 Conclusion 151 Problems 152 Technical Interview Questions 152 References 153 Further Reading 154 8 Security 157 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Security Goals 158 8.3 Threats and Attacks 159 8.3.1 Threat Modeling 160 8.3.2 Common Attacks 161 8.4 Security Consideration 162 8.4.1 Blockchain 164 8.5 Conclusion 166 Problems 166 Technical Interview Questions 167 Further Reading 168 9 Concerns, Risks, and Regulations 171 9.1 Introduction 171 9.2 Privacy Concerns 171 9.3 Psychological and Social Concerns 173 9.3.1 Psychological Concerns 174 9.3.2 Social Concerns 176 9.4 Safety Concerns 177 9.5 Health Concerns 177 9.5.1 Electromagnetic Radiation and Specific Absorption Rate 177 9.5.2 Diseases and Effects 181 9.5.2.1 Cancer 181 9.5.2.2 Fertility 182 9.5.2.3 Vision and Sleep Disorders 182 9.5.2.4 Pain and Discomfort 182 9.5.2.5 Other Risks 183 9.5.3 Recommendations 183 9.6 Regulations 184 Further Reading 186 10 Detailed Product Design and Development: From Idea to Finished Product 189Scott Tattersall, Mustafa Kamoona, and Haider Raad 10.1 Introduction 189 10.2 Product I (IoT): Vineyard Monitor 189 10.2.1 Product Requirements and Design Considerations 190 10.2.2 Communication Network/Technology Selection 190 10.2.3 Hardware Selection and Breadboarding 191 10.2.3.1 Breadboarding Example 192 10.2.4 Prototyping 196 10.2.4.1 Fritzing 196 10.2.5 Power Consumption 197 10.2.6 Software, Cloud, Platforms, API, etc. 198 10.2.6.1 Sigfox Callback 198 10.2.6.2 RESTful Web Services 199 10.2.7 Microcontroller Coding 201 10.2.7.1 Sigfox Messages 203 10.2.7.2 Bit Packing 205 10.2.7.3 IFTTT Integration 207 10.2.8 From Breadboard to PCB 207 10.2.8.1 Hand Soldering the Surface Mount Components (SMCs) 209 10.2.9 Testing and Iteration 212 10.2.10 PCB to Finished Product 216 10.3 Product II (Wearable): Fall Detection Device 220 10.3.1 Product Requirements and Design Considerations 220 10.3.2 Design Block Diagram 220 10.3.3 Flowchart 222 10.3.4 Unified Modeling Language (UML) 223 10.3.5 Hardware Selection 223 10.3.6 Hardware Implementation and Connectivity 225 10.3.6.1 Hardware Modules and Interfaces Overview 229 10.3.7 Software Implementation 229 10.3.7.1 Fall Detection Algorithm 234 10.3.8 Smartphone iOS App 238 10.3.9 Cloud Solution 243 10.3.9.1 Cloud versus Edge Computing 244 10.3.10 Security 245 10.3.11 Power Consumption 245 10.3.12 Delivery 247 10.4 Conclusion 247 References 247 Further Reading 249 Index 251 Solution Manual 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a review of image denoising algorithms with practical MATLAB implementation guidance Digital Image Denoising in MATLAB provides a comprehensive treatment of digital image denoising, containing a variety of techniques with applications in high-quality photo enhancement as well as multi-dimensional signal processing problems such as array signal processing, radar signal estimation and detection, and more. Offering systematic guidance on image denoising in theories and in practice through MATLAB, this hands-on guide includes practical examples, chapter summaries, analytical and programming problems, computer simulations, and source codes for all algorithms discussed in the book. The book explains denoising algorithms including linear and nonlinear filtering, Wiener filtering, spatially adaptive and multi-channel processing, transform and wavelet domains processing, singular value decomposition, and various low variance optimization and low rank processing techniques. Throughout

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe classic text that covers practical image processing methods and theory for image texture analysis, updated second edition The revised second edition of Image Processing: Dealing with Textures updates the classic work on texture analysis theory and methods without abandoning the foundational essentials of this landmark work. Like the first, the new edition offers an analysis of texture in digital images that are essential to a diverse range of applications such as: robotics, defense, medicine and the geo-sciences. Designed to easily locate information on specific problems, the text is structured around a series of helpful questions and answers. Updated to include the most recent developments in the field, many chapters have been completely revised including: Fractals and Multifractals, Image Statistics, Texture Repair, Local Phase Features, Dual Tree Complex Wavelet Transform, Ridgelets and Curvelets and Deep Texture Features. The book takes a Table of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition vii Preface to the First Edition viii Acknowledgements ix About the Companion Website x 1 Introduction 1 2 Binary Textures 11 2.1 Shape Grammars 13 2.2 Boolean Models 21 2.3 Mathematical Morphology 51 3 Stationary Grey Texture Images 79 3.1 Image Binarisation 81 3.2 Grey Scale Mathematical Morphology 88 3.3 Fractals and Multifractals 104 3.4 Image Statistics 174 3.5 Texture Features from the Fourier Transform 227 3.6 Markov Random Fields 263 3.7 Gibbs Distributions 301 3.8 Texture Repair 348 4 Non-stationary Grey Texture Images 371 4.1 The Uncertainty Principle and its Implications in Signal and Image Processing 371 4.2 Gabor Functions 399 4.3 Prolate Spheroidal Sequence Functions 450 4.4 Local Phase Features 503 4.5 Wavelets 518 4.6 The Dual Tree Complex Wavelet Transform 594 4.7 Ridgelets and Curvelets 621 4.8 Where Image Processing and Pattern Recognition Meet 673 4.9 Laws’ Masks and the “What Looks Like Where” Space 697 4.10 Local Binary Patterns 727 4.11 The Wigner Distribution 735 4.12 Convolutional Neural Networks for Textures Feature Extraction 754 Bibliographical Notes 793 References 795 Index 801

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to two-phase heat transfer theory, practice, and applications Designed primarily as a practical resource for design and development engineers, Two-Phase Heat Transfer contains the theories and methods of two-phase heat transfer that are solution oriented. Written in a clear and concise manner, the book includes information on physical phenomena, experimental data, theoretical solutions, and empirical correlations. A very wide range of real-world applications and formulas/correlations for them are presented. The two-phase heat transfer systems covered in the book include boiling, condensation, gas-liquid mixtures, and gas-solid mixtures. The author?a noted expert in this field?also reviews the numerous applications of two-phase heat transfer such as heat exchangers in refrigeration and air conditioning, conventional and nuclear power generation, solar power plants, aeronautics, chemical processes, petroleum industry, and more. Special attention is giveTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Scope and Objectives of the Book 1 1.2 Basic Definitions 1 1.3 Various Models 2 1.3.1 Homogeneous Model 2 1.3.2 Separated Flow Models 2 1.3.3 Flow Pattern-Based Models 3 1.4 Classification of Channels 3 1.4.1 Based on Physical Dimensions 3 1.4.2 Based on Condensation Studies 3 1.4.3 Based on Boiling Flow Studies 4 1.4.4 Based on Two-Component Flow 4 1.4.5 Discussion 5 1.4.6 Recommendation 5 1.5 Flow Patterns in Channels 5 1.5.1 Horizontal Channels 5 1.5.1.1 Description of Flow Patterns 5 1.5.1.2 Flow Pattern Maps 6 1.5.2 Vertical Channels 7 1.5.3 Inclined Channels 7 1.5.4 Annuli 8 1.5.5 Minichannels 8 1.5.6 Horizontal Tube Bundles with Crossflow 9 1.5.7 Vertical Tube Bundles 10 1.5.8 Effect of Low Gravity 10 1.5.9 Recommendations 12 1.6 Heat Transfer in Single-Phase Flow 12 1.6.1 Flow Inside Channels 12 1.6.2 Vertical Tube/Rod Bundles with Axial Flow 13 1.6.3 Various Geometries 14 1.6.4 Liquid Metals 14 1.7 Calculation of Pressure Drop 14 1.7.1 Single-Phase Pressure Drop in Pipes 14 1.7.2 Two-Phase Pressure Drop in Pipes 15 1.7.3 Annuli and Vertical Tube Bundles 17 1.7.4 Horizontal Tube Bundles 17 1.7.5 Recommendations 17 1.8 Calculation of Void Fraction 17 1.8.1 Flow Inside Pipes 17 1.8.2 Flow in Tube Bundles 18 1.8.3 Recommendations 18 1.9 CFD Simulation 18 1.10 General Information 19 Nomenclature 19 References 20 2 Heat Transfer During Condensation 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Condensation on Plates 25 2.2.1 Nusselt Equations 25 2.2.2 Modifications to the Nusselt Equations 26 2.2.3 Condensation with Turbulent Film 27 2.2.4 Condensation on Underside of a Plate 27 2.2.5 Recommendations 28 2.3 Condensation Inside Plain Channels 28 2.3.1 Laminar Condensation in Vertical Tubes 28 2.3.2 The Onset of Turbulence 28 2.3.3 Prediction of Heat Transfer in Turbulent Flow 29 2.3.3.1 Analytical Models 29 2.3.3.2 CFD Models 30 2.3.3.3 Empirical Correlations 30 2.3.3.4 Correlations Applicable to Both Macro and Minichannels 34 2.3.4 Recommendation 41 2.4 Condensation Outside Tubes 41 2.4.1 Single Tube 41 2.4.1.1 Stagnant Vapor 41 2.4.1.2 Moving Vapor 42 2.4.2 Bundles of Horizontal Tubes 42 2.4.2.1 Vapor Entry from Top 42 2.4.2.2 Vapor Entry from Side 44 2.4.3 Recommendations 44 2.5 Condensation with Enhanced Tubes 44 2.5.1 Condensation on Outside Surface 44 2.5.1.1 Single Tubes 44 2.5.1.2 Tube Bundles 46 2.5.2 Condensation Inside Enhanced Tubes 47 2.5.3 Recommendations 49 2.6 Condensation of Superheated Vapors 49 2.6.1 Stagnant Vapor on External Surfaces 49 2.6.2 Forced Flow on External Surfaces 49 2.6.3 Flow inside Tubes 50 2.6.4 Plate-Type Heat Exchangers 50 2.6.5 Recommendations 51 2.7 Miscellaneous Condensation Problems 51 2.7.1 Condensation on Stationary Cone 51 2.7.2 Condensation on a Rotating Disk 51 2.7.3 Condensation on Rotating Vertical Cone 52 2.7.4 Condensation on Rotating Tubes 52 2.7.5 Plate-Type Condensers 53 2.7.5.1 Recommendation 54 2.7.6 Effect of Oil in Refrigerants 54 2.7.6.1 Recommendation 55 2.7.7 Effect of Gravity 55 2.7.7.1 Some Formulas for Zero Gravity 55 2.7.7.2 Experimental Studies 55 2.7.7.3 Conclusion 55 2.7.8 Effect of Non-condensable Gases 56 2.7.8.1 Prediction Methods 56 2.7.8.2 Recommendation 57 2.7.9 Flooding in Upflow 57 2.7.10 Condensation in Thermosiphons 58 2.7.11 Condensation in Helical Coils 58 2.8 Condensation of Vapor Mixtures 59 2.8.1 Physical Phenomena 59 2.8.2 Prediction Methods 60 2.8.3 Recommendation 61 2.9 Liquid Metals 61 2.9.1 Stagnant Vapors 61 2.9.2 Interfacial Resistance 62 2.9.3 Moving Vapors 62 2.9.4 Recommendation 62 2.10 Dropwise Condensation 63 2.10.1 Prediction of Mode of Condensation 63 2.10.2 Theories of Dropwise Condensation 63 2.10.3 Methods to Get Dropwise Condensations 63 2.10.4 Some Experimental Studies 64 2.10.5 Prediction of Heat Transfer 64 2.10.6 Recommendations 66 Nomenclature 66 References 67 3 Pool Boiling 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Nucleate Boiling 77 3.2.1 Mechanisms of Nucleate Boiling 77 3.2.1.1 Bubble Agitation 77 3.2.1.2 Vapor–Liquid Exchange 77 3.2.1.3 Evaporative Mechanism 78 3.2.2 Bubble Nucleation 78 3.2.2.1 Inception of Boiling 78 3.2.2.2 Bubble Nucleation Cycle 79 3.2.2.3 Active Nucleation Site Density 81 3.2.2.4 Recommendations 81 3.2.3 Correlations for Heat Transfer 81 3.2.3.1 Conclusion and Recommendation 83 3.2.4 Multicomponent Mixtures 83 3.2.4.1 Physical Phenomena 83 3.2.4.2 Prediction of Heat Transfer 84 3.2.4.3 Recommendation 86 3.2.5 Liquid Metals 86 3.2.5.1 Physical Phenomena 86 3.2.5.2 Prediction of Heat Transfer 87 3.2.5.3 Recommendations 88 3.3 Critical Heat Flux 90 3.3.1 Models of Mechanisms 90 3.3.1.1 Bubble Interference Model 90 3.3.1.2 Hydrodynamic Instability Model 90 3.3.1.3 Macrolayer Dryout Model 91 3.3.1.4 Dry Spot Model 91 3.3.1.5 Interfacial Lift-off Model 92 3.3.2 Correlations for Inclined Surfaces 92 3.3.3 Various Correlations 93 3.3.4 Effect of Subcooling 93 3.3.5 Various Other Factors Affecting CHF 94 3.3.6 Evaluation of CHF Prediction Methods 94 3.3.7 Recommendations 94 3.3.8 Multicomponent Mixtures 95 3.3.8.1 Physical Phenomena and Prediction Methods 95 3.3.8.2 Recommendation 95 3.3.9 Liquid Metals 95 3.3.9.1 Physical Phenomena 97 3.3.9.2 Prediction of CHF 98 3.3.9.3 Recommendations 102 3.4 Transition Boiling 102 3.5 Minimum Film Boiling Temperature 104 3.5.1 Prediction Methods 104 3.5.1.1 Analytical Models 104 3.5.1.2 Empirical Correlations 105 3.5.2 Recommendations 106 3.6 Film Boiling 106 3.6.1 Methods for Predicting Heat Transfer 106 3.6.1.1 Vertical Plates 106 3.6.1.2 Horizontal Cylinders 107 3.6.1.3 Horizontal Plates 108 3.6.1.4 Inclined Plates 108 3.6.1.5 Spheres 109 3.6.2 Liquid Metals 109 3.6.3 Recommendations 110 3.7 Various Topics 110 3.7.1 Effect of Gravity 110 3.7.1.1 Scaling Method of Raj et al. 110 3.7.1.2 Scaling for Hydrogen 112 3.7.1.3 Some Other Studies 112 3.7.1.4 Recommendations 113 3.7.2 Effect of Oil in Refrigerants 113 3.7.2.1 Mechanisms 114 3.7.2.2 Correlations 114 3.7.2.3 Recommendation 115 3.7.3 Thermosiphons 115 3.7.4 Effect of Some Organic Additives 115 Nomenclature 115 References 116 4 Forced Convection Subcooled Boiling 123 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 Inception of Boiling in Channels 123 4.2.1 Analytical Models and Correlations 123 4.2.2 Minichannels 125 4.2.3 Effect of Dissolved Gases 126 4.2.4 Recommendations 126 4.3 Prediction of Subcooled Boiling Regimes in Channels 126 4.3.1 Recommendation 127 4.4 Prediction of Void Fraction in Channels 127 4.4.1 Recommendations 129 4.5 Heat Transfer in Channels 129 4.5.1 Visual Observations and Mechanisms 129 4.5.2 Prediction of Heat Transfer 130 4.5.2.1 Some Dimensional Correlations 130 4.5.2.2 The Shah Correlation 130 4.5.2.3 Various Correlations 132 4.5.2.4 Recommendations 135 4.6 Single Cylinder with Crossflow 135 4.6.1 Experimental Studies 135 4.6.2 Prediction of Heat Transfer 135 4.6.2.1 Shah Correlation 135 4.6.2.2 Other Correlations 137 4.6.3 Recommendation 138 4.7 Various Geometries 138 4.7.1 Tube Bundles with Axial Flow 138 4.7.2 Tube Bundles with Crossflow 138 4.7.3 Flow Parallel to a Flat Plate 138 4.7.4 Helical Coils 138 4.7.5 Bends 139 4.7.6 Rotating Tube 139 4.7.7 Jets Impinging on Hot Surfaces 141 4.7.7.1 Experimental Studies and Correlations 142 4.7.7.2 Recommendations 145 4.7.8 Spray Cooling 145 Nomenclature 146 References 146 5 Saturated Boiling with Forced Flow 151 5.1 Introduction 151 5.2 Boiling in Channels 151 5.2.1 Effect of Various Parameters 151 5.2.2 Prediction of Heat Transfer 152 5.2.2.1 Correlations for Macro Channels 152 5.2.2.2 Correlations for Minichannels 158 5.2.2.3 Correlations for Both Minichannels and Macrochannels 159 5.2.2.4 Recommendations 162 5.3 Plate-Type Heat Exchangers 162 5.3.1 Herringbone Plate Type 162 5.3.1.1 Longo et al. Correlation 163 5.3.1.2 Almalfi et al. Correlation 163 5.3.1.3 Ayub et al. Correlation 164 5.3.1.4 Recommendation 164 5.3.2 Plane Plate Heat Exchangers 164 5.3.3 Serrated Fin Plate Heat Exchangers 164 5.3.4 Plate Fin Heat Exchangers 165 5.4 Boiling in Various Geometries 166 5.4.1 Helical Coils 166 5.4.1.1 Correlations for Heat Transfer 166 5.4.1.2 Evaluation of Correlations 167 5.4.1.3 Discussion 167 5.4.1.4 Recommendation 167 5.4.2 Rotating Disk 168 5.4.3 Cylinder Rotating in a Liquid Pool 169 5.4.3.1 Recommendation 169 5.4.4 Bends 170 5.4.5 Spiral Wound Heat Exchangers (SWHE) 170 5.4.6 Falling Thin Film on Vertical Surfaces 171 5.4.6.1 Various Studies and Correlations 171 5.4.6.2 Recommendation 171 5.4.7 Vertical Tube/Rod Bundles with Axial Flow 172 5.4.8 Spiral Plate Heat Exchangers 172 5.5 Horizontal Tube Bundles with Upward Crossflow 172 5.5.1 Physical Phenomena 172 5.5.2 Prediction Methods for Heat Transfer 173 5.5.2.1 Shah Correlation 175 5.5.3 Conclusion and Recommendation 176 5.6 Horizontal Tube Bundles with Falling Film Evaporation 177 5.6.1 Flow Patterns/Modes 177 5.6.2 Heat Transfer 178 5.6.3 Conclusion and Recommendation 180 5.7 Boiling of Multicomponent Mixtures 180 5.7.1 Boiling in Tubes 180 5.7.2 Boiling in Various Geometries 182 5.7.3 Conclusions and Recommendations 182 5.8 Liquid Metals 182 5.8.1 Inception of Boiling 182 5.8.2 Heat Transfer 184 5.8.2.1 Sodium 184 5.8.2.2 Potassium 184 5.8.2.3 Mercury 186 5.8.2.4 Cesium and Rubidium 186 5.8.2.5 Mixtures of Liquid Metals 187 5.8.3 Conclusions and Recommendations 187 5.9 Effect of Gravity 187 5.9.1 Experimental Studies 188 5.9.2 Conclusions and Recommendation 189 5.9.3 Effect of Oil in Refrigerants 189 5.9.3.1 Heat Transfer with Immiscible Oils 189 5.9.3.2 Heat Transfer with Miscible Oils 190 5.9.3.3 Conclusions and Recommendations 190 Nomenclature 191 References 192 6 Critical Heat Flux in Flow Boiling 201 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 CHF in Tubes 201 6.2.1 Types of Boiling Crisis and Mechanisms 201 6.2.2 Prediction Methods 201 6.2.2.1 Analytical Models 201 6.2.2.2 Lookup Tables of CHF 202 6.2.2.3 Dimensional Correlations for Water 203 6.2.2.4 General Correlations 203 6.2.2.5 Fluid-to-Fluid Modeling 213 6.2.2.6 Non-uniform Heat Flux 214 6.2.3 Recommendations 216 6.3 CHF in Annuli 216 6.3.1 Vertical Annuli with Upflow 216 6.3.1.1 Dimensional Correlations for Water 216 6.3.1.2 General Correlations 217 6.3.1.3 Recommendations 220 6.3.2 Horizontal Annuli 221 6.3.3 Eccentric Annuli 221 6.4 CHF in Various Geometries 222 6.4.1 Single Cylinder with Crossflow 222 6.4.2 Horizontal Tube Bundles 224 6.4.2.1 Recommendation 226 6.4.3 Vertical Tube/Rod Bundles 227 6.4.3.1 Mixed Flow Analyses 227 6.4.3.2 Subchannel Analysis 228 6.4.3.3 Phenomenological Analyses 228 6.4.4 Falling Films on Vertical Surfaces 229 6.4.5 Flow Parallel to a Flat Plate 230 6.4.6 Helical Coils 230 6.4.6.1 Recommendation 232 6.4.7 Spiral Wound Heat Exchangers (SWHE) 232 6.4.8 Rotating Liquid Film 232 6.4.9 Bends 233 6.4.10 Jets Impinging on Hot Surfaces 234 6.4.10.1 Correlations for CHF in Free Stream Jets 234 6.4.10.2 Effect of Contact Angle 235 6.4.10.3 Multiple Jets 236 6.4.10.4 Effect of Heater Thickness 236 6.4.10.5 Confined Jets 236 6.4.10.6 Submerged Jets 236 6.4.10.7 Recommendations 236 6.4.11 Spray Cooling 236 6.4.12 Effect of Gravity 237 6.4.12.1 Terrestrial Studies 237 6.4.12.2 Experimental Studies at Low Gravities 238 6.4.12.3 CHF Prediction Methods 239 6.4.12.4 Recommendation 239 Nomenclature 239 References 240 7 Post-CHF Heat Transfer in Flow Boiling 247 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Film Boiling in Vertical Tubes 247 7.2.1 Physical Phenomena 247 7.2.2 Prediction of Dispersed Flow Film Boiling in Upflow 248 7.2.2.1 Empirical Correlations 248 7.2.2.2 Mechanistic Analyses 249 7.2.2.3 Phenomenological Correlations 249 7.2.2.4 Lookup Tables 254 7.2.2.5 Recommendations 256 7.2.3 Prediction of Inverted Annular Film Boiling in Upflow 256 7.2.3.1 Recommendations 257 7.2.4 Film Boiling in Downflow 257 7.3 Film Boiling in Horizontal Tubes 257 7.3.1 Prediction Methods 258 7.3.2 Recommendations 259 7.4 Film Boiling in Various Geometries 259 7.4.1 Annuli 259 7.4.2 Vertical Tube Bundles 260 7.4.3 Single Horizontal Cylinder 261 7.4.3.1 Recommendation 262 7.4.4 Spheres 262 7.4.5 Jets Impinging on Hot Surfaces 264 7.4.6 Bends 265 7.4.7 Helical Coils 265 7.4.8 Chilldown of Cryogenic Pipelines 266 7.4.9 Flow Parallel to a Plate 267 7.4.10 Spray Cooling 267 7.5 Minimum Film Boiling Temperature and Heat Flux 268 7.5.1 Flow in Channels 268 7.5.2 Jets Impinging on Hot Surfaces 268 7.5.3 Chilldown of Cryogenic Lines 269 7.5.4 Spheres 269 7.5.5 Spray Cooling 270 7.6 Transition Boiling 270 7.6.1 Flow in Channels 270 7.6.2 Jets on Hot Surfaces 271 7.6.3 Spheres 272 7.6.4 Spray Cooling 272 Nomenclature 273 References 274 8 Two-Component Gas–Liquid Heat Transfer 279 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Pre-mixed Mixtures in Channels 279 8.2.1 Flow Pattern-Based Prediction Methods 279 8.2.1.1 Bubbly Flow 279 8.2.1.2 Slug Flow 281 8.2.1.3 Annular Flow 282 8.2.1.4 Post-dryout Dispersed Flow 283 8.2.2 General Correlations 283 8.2.2.1 Horizontal Channels 283 8.2.2.2 Vertical Channels 286 8.2.2.3 Horizontal and Vertical Channels 288 8.2.2.4 Inclined Channels 289 8.2.3 Recommendations 289 8.3 Gas Flow through Channel Walls 290 8.3.1 Experimental Studies 290 8.3.2 Heat Transfer Prediction 292 8.3.3 Conclusions 292 8.4 Cooling by Air–Water Mist 292 8.4.1 Single Cylinders in Crossflow 292 8.4.2 Flow over Tube Banks 294 8.4.3 Flow Parallel to Plates 294 8.4.4 Wedges 295 8.4.5 Jets 295 8.4.6 Sphere 297 8.5 Evaporation from Water Pools 297 8.5.1 Introduction 297 8.5.2 Empirical Correlations 297 8.5.3 Analytical Models 298 8.5.3.1 Shah Model 298 8.5.3.2 Other Models 300 8.5.4 CFD Models 301 8.5.5 Occupied Swimming Pools 301 8.5.6 Conclusions and Recommendations 301 8.6 Various Topics 301 8.6.1 Jets Impinging on Hot Surfaces 301 8.6.2 Vertical Tube Bundle 302 8.6.3 Effect of Gravity 302 8.7 Liquid Metal–Gas in Channels 303 8.7.1 Mercury 303 8.7.2 Various Liquid Metals 304 8.7.3 Discussion 305 Nomenclature 305 References 306 9 Gas-Fluidized Beds 311 9.1 Introduction 311 9.2 Regimes of Fluidization 311 9.2.1 Regime Transition Velocities 312 9.2.1.1 Minimum Fluidization Velocity 312 9.2.1.2 Various Regime Transition Velocities 312 9.2.2 Void Fraction and Bed Expansion 313 9.3 Properties of Solid Particles 313 9.3.1 Density 313 9.3.2 Particle Diameter 313 9.3.3 Particle Shape Factor 314 9.3.4 Classification of Particles 314 9.4 Parameters Affecting Heat Transfer to Surfaces 315 9.4.1 Gas Velocity 315 9.4.2 Particle Size and Shape 315 9.4.3 Pressure and Temperature 316 9.4.4 Heat Transfer Surface Diameter 317 9.4.5 Properties of Gas and Solid 317 9.4.6 Gas Distribution 317 9.4.7 Length and Location of Tube 317 9.4.8 Bed Diameter and Height 318 9.4.9 Tube Inclination 318 9.5 Theories of Heat Transfer 318 9.5.1 Film Theory 318 9.5.2 Penetration Theory 318 9.5.2.1 Particle Theory 319 9.5.2.2 Packet Theory 319 9.6 Prediction Methods for Single Tubes and Spheres 319 9.6.1 Analytical Models 319 9.6.1.1 Particle Models 319 9.6.1.2 Packet Models 320 9.6.2 Empirical Correlations 321 9.6.2.1 Maximum Heat Transfer 321 9.6.2.2 Correlations for the Entire Range 324 9.6.3 Recommendations 325 9.7 Tube Bundles 326 9.7.1 Horizontal Tube Bundles 326 9.7.2 Vertical Tube Bundles 328 9.7.3 Recommendations 328 9.8 Radiation Heat Transfer 329 9.8.1 Radiation Heat Transfer Coefficient and Effective Emissivity 329 9.8.2 Temperature for Significant Radiation Contribution 329 9.8.3 Conclusions and Recommendations 330 9.9 Heat Transfer to Bed Walls 330 9.9.1 Prediction Methods 330 9.9.2 Conclusions and Recommendations 331 9.10 Heat Transfer in Freeboard Region 331 9.10.1 Experimental Studies and Prediction Methods 332 9.10.2 Recommendation 332 9.11 Heat Transfer Between Gas and Particles 332 9.12 Gas–Solid Flow in Pipes 333 9.12.1 Regimes of Gas–Solid Flow 333 9.12.2 Experimental Studies of Heat Transfer 334 9.12.3 Prediction of Heat Transfer 334 9.12.3.1 Various Methods 334 9.12.3.2 Shah Correlation 336 9.12.4 Recommendation 337 9.13 Solar Collectors with Particle Suspensions 337 Nomenclature 338 References 340 Appendix 347 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents strategies with reachability graph analysis for optimizing resource allocation systems Supervisory Control and Scheduling of Resource Allocation Systems offers an important guide to Petri net (PN) models and methods for supervisory control and system scheduling of resource allocation systems (RASs). Resource allocation systems are common in automated manufacturing systems, project management systems, cloud data centers, and software engineering systems. The authorstwo experts on the topicpresent a definition, techniques, models, and state-of-the art applications of supervisory control and scheduling problems. The book introduces the basic concepts and research background on resource allocation systems and Petri nets. The authors then focus on the deadlock-free supervisor synthesis for RASs using Petri nets. The book also investigates the heuristic scheduling of RASs based on timed Petri nets. Conclusions and open problems are provided in the lastTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xvii Glossary xix Acronyms xxiii About the Authors xxv Part I Resource Allocation Systems and Petri Nets 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Resource Allocation Systems 3 1.2 Supervisory Control and Scheduling with Petri Nets 7 1.3 Summary 9 1.4 Bibliographical Notes 9 2 Preliminaries 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Petri Nets 12 2.2.1 Basic Concepts 12 2.2.2 Modeling Power of Petri Nets 16 2.2.2.1 Sequential Execution 16 2.2.2.2 Concurrency (Parallelism) 17 2.2.2.3 Synchronization 17 2.2.2.4 Conflict (choice) 17 2.2.2.5 Merging 17 2.2.2.6 Mutual Exclusion 18 2.2.3 Behavioral Properties of Petri Nets 18 2.2.3.1 Boundedness and Safeness 18 2.2.3.2 Liveness and Deadlock 19 2.2.3.3 Reversibility 19 2.2.3.4 Conservativeness 19 2.2.4 Subclasses of Petri Nets 20 2.2.4.1 Ordinary Nets and Generalized Nets 20 2.2.4.2 Pure Petri Nets 20 2.2.4.3 State Machines 21 2.2.4.4 Marked Graphs 22 2.2.4.5 Free-choice Nets 22 2.2.4.6 Extended Free-choice Nets 22 2.2.4.7 Asymmetric Choice Nets 22 2.2.5 Petri Nets for Resource Allocation Systems 22 2.2.5.1 PC2R 23 2.2.5.2 S*PR 24 2.2.5.3 S5PR 25 2.2.5.4 S4PR, S4R, S3 PGR2 and WS3 PSR 25 2.2.5.5 S3PR 26 2.2.5.6 ES3PR and S3PMR 26 2.2.5.7 LS3PR 27 2.2.5.8 ELS3PR 27 2.2.5.9 GLS3PR 28 2.2.6 Structural Analysis 28 2.2.7 Reachability Graph Analysis 30 2.2.7.1 Supervisory Control 30 2.2.7.2 System Scheduling 31 2.2.8 Petri Net Analysis Tools 32 2.3 Informed Heuristic Search 35 2.3.1 Basic Concepts of Heuristic A* Search 35 2.3.2 Properties of the A* Search 36 2.3.2.1 Completeness 36 2.3.2.2 Admissible Heuristics 36 2.3.2.3 Monotone (Consistent) Heuristics 36 2.3.2.4 More Informed Heuristics 36 2.4 Bibliographical Notes 37 Part II Supervisory Control 39 3 Behaviorally Maximal and Structurally Minimal Supervisor 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Petri Nets for Supervisory Synthesis 43 3.3 Optimal and Minimal Supervisory Synthesis 45 3.3.1 Reachability Graph Analysis 45 3.3.2 Supervisor Computation with Place Invariants 47 3.3.3 Optimal Supervisor Synthesis and Vector Covering Method 47 3.3.4 Optimal Supervisor with Fewest Monitors 49 3.3.5 Deadlock Prevention Policy 50 3.4 An Illustrative Example 52 3.5 Concluding Remarks 54 3.6 Bibliographical Notes 55 4 Supervisor Design with Fewer Places 57 4.1 Introduction 57 4.2 Critical and Free Activity Places 59 4.3 Properties of DP-Nets 62 4.4 Supervisor Design with Critical Activity Places 66 4.5 An Illustrative Example 70 4.6 Concluding Remarks 72 4.7 Bibliographical Notes 73 5 Redundant Constraint Elimination 75 5.1 Introduction 75 5.2 Minimal-Number-of-Monitors Problem 77 5.3 Elimination of Redundant Constraints 78 5.3.1 Redundant Reachability Constraints 78 5.3.2 Linear Program Method 79 5.3.3 Non-Linear Program Method 82 5.3.4 Supervisor Synthesis with Redundancy Elimination 84 5.4 Illustrative Examples 85 5.5 Concluding Remarks 91 5.6 Bibliographical Notes 91 6 Fast Iterative Supervisor Design 93 6.1 Introduction 93 6.2 Optimal Supervisor of a DP-net 94 6.3 Fast Synthesis of Optimal and Simple Supervisors 95 6.3.1 Multiobjective Supervisory Control 96 6.3.2 Design of an Optimal Control Place 97 6.3.3 Identification of Redundant Constraints 99 6.3.4 Iterative Deadlock Prevention 102 6.4 Illustrative Examples 107 6.5 Concluding Remarks 115 6.6 Bibliographical Notes 115 7 Supervisor Synthesis with Uncontrollable and Unobservable Transitions 117 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Supervisor Synthesis with Uncontrollability and Unobservability 119 7.2.1 DP-Nets with Uncontrollable and/or Unobservable Transitions 119 7.2.2 Admissible Markings and First-Met Inadmissible Markings 120 7.2.3 Design of an Admissible Monitor 123 7.2.4 Admissible and Structure-Minimal Supervisor Synthesis 125 7.3 Deadlock Prevention Policy 127 7.4 Illustrative Experiments 132 7.5 Concluding Remarks 136 7.6 Bibliographical Notes 136 Part III Heuristic Scheduling 137 8 Informed Heuristic Search in Reachability Graph 139 8.1 Introduction 139 8.2 System Scheduling with Place-Timed Petri Nets 140 8.2.1 Place-Timed Petri Nets 140 8.2.2 Conversion from an Untimed Petri Net 141 8.2.3 Synthesis of a Place-Timed Petri Net 143 8.2.3.1 Top-down Method 144 8.2.3.2 Bottom-up Method 145 8.3 State Evolution of Place-Timed Nets 145 8.4 A* Search on a Reachability Graph 152 8.5 A* Search with State Check 153 8.6 An Illustrative Example 155 8.7 Concluding Remarks 156 8.8 Bibliographical Notes 156 9 Controllable Heuristic Search 157 9.1 Introduction 157 9.2 Alternative Routes with Different Lengths 159 9.3 An Admissible Heuristic for SC-nets 160 9.4 A Controllable Heuristic Search 163 9.5 Randomly Generated Examples 166 9.6 Another Controllable Heuristic Search 168 9.6.1 A* Search and Depth-First Search 168 9.6.2 Controllable Hybrid Heuristic Search 171 9.7 Illustrative Results 176 9.8 Concluding Remarks 178 9.9 Bibliographical Notes 179 10 Hybrid Heuristic Search 181 10.1 Introduction 181 10.2 A*-BT Combinations 182 10.3 Illustrative Examples 187 10.4 Concluding Remarks 190 10.5 Bibliographical Notes 191 11 A* Search with More Informed Heuristics Functions 193 11.1 Introduction 193 11.2 More Informed Heuristics in A* Search 194 11.3 Combination of Admissible and Inadmissible Heuristics 195 11.4 Illustrative Examples 197 11.5 Concluding Remarks 203 11.6 Bibliographical Notes 204 12 Symbolic Heuristic Search 205 12.1 Introduction 205 12.2 Boolean Algebra and Binary Decision Diagram 206 12.3 Symbolic Evolution of Place-Timed Petri Nets 207 12.4 Symbolic Heuristic Search 213 12.5 Illustrative Examples 218 12.6 Concluding Remarks 224 12.7 Bibliographical Notes 226 13 Open Problems 227 13.1 Structural Analysis of Generalized Nets 227 13.2 Robust Supervisor Synthesis with Unreliable Resources 227 13.3 Alleviation of the State Explosion Problem 228 13.4 Optimization of Symbolic Variable Ordering 229 13.5 Multiobjective Scheduling 230 13.6 Anytime Heuristic Scheduling 230 13.7 Parallel Heuristic Search 231 13.8 Bidirectional Heuristic Search 232 13.9 Computing and Scheduling with GPUs 232 References 235 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents novel and efficient tools, techniques and approaches for reliability evaluation, reliability analysis, and design of reliable communication networks using graph theoretic concepts. In recent years, human beings have become largely dependent on communication networks, such as computer communication networks, telecommunication networks, mobile switching networks etc., for their day-to-day activities. In today''s world, humans and critical machines depend on these communication networks to work properly. Failure of these communication networks can result in situations where people may find themselves isolated, helpless and exposed to hazards. It is a fact that every component or system can fail and its failure probability increases with size and complexity. The main objective of this book is to devize approaches for reliability modeling and evaluation of such complex networks. Such evaluation helps to understand which network can give us better rTable of ContentsSeries Editor Preface ix Preface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Network Reliability Measures 2 1.3 The Probabilistic Graph Model 4 1.4 Approaches for Network Reliability Evaluation 6 1.5 Motivation and Summary 7 2 Interconnection Networks 11 2.1 Interconnection Networks Classification 11 2.2 Multistage Interconnection Networks (MINs) 14 2.3 Research Issues in MIN Design 15 2.4 Some Existing MINs Implementations 19 2.5 Review of Topological Fault Tolerance 20 2.5.1 Redundant and Disjoint Paths 22 2.5.2 Backtracking 26 2.5.3 Dynamic Rerouting 27 2.6 MIN Topological Review on Disjoint Paths 27 2.6.1 Single-Disjoint Path Multistage Interconnection Networks 27 2.6.2 Two-Disjoint Paths Multistage Interconnection Networks 36 2.6.3 Three-Disjoint Paths Multistage Interconnection Networks 47 2.6.4 Four-Disjoint Paths Multistage Interconnection Networks 51 2.7 Hardware Cost Analysis 55 2.8 Observations 60 2.9 Summary 61 3 MIN Reliability Evaluation Techniques 63 3.1 Reliability Performance Criterion 63 3.1.1 Two Terminal or Terminal Pair Reliability (TPR) 64 3.1.2 Network or All Terminal Reliability (ATR) 64 3.1.3 Broadcast Reliability 65 3.2 Approaches for Reliability Evaluation 66 3.2.1 Continuous Time Markov Chains (CTMC) 67 3.2.2 Matrix Enumeration 67 3.2.3 Conditional Probability (CP) Method 67 3.2.4 Graph Models 69 3.2.5 Decomposition Method 70 3.2.6 Reliability Block Diagram (RBD) 71 3.2.7 Reliability Bounds 73 3.2.7.1 Lower Bound Reliability 75 3.2.7.2 Upper Bound Reliability 76 3.2.8 Monte Carlo Simulation 77 3.2.9 Path-Based or Cut-Based Approaches 78 3.3 Observations 81 4 Terminal Reliability Analysis of MIN Layouts 85 4.1 Chaturvedi and Misra Approach 87 4.1.1 Path Set Enumeration 88 4.1.2 Reliability Evaluation using MVI Techniques 96 4.1.3 Reliability Evaluation Techniques Comparison 99 4.1.3.1 Terminal Reliability of SEN, SEN+ and SEN+2 100 4.1.3.2 Broadcast Reliability of SEN, SEN +, and SEN+2 101 4.1.3.3 Comparison 102 4.2 Reliability Analysis of Multistage Interconnection Networks 104 4.3 Summary 113 5 Comprehensive MIN Reliability Paradigms Evaluation 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Reliability Evaluation Approach 119 5.2.1 Path Set Enumeration 120 5.2.1.1 Assumptions 120 5.2.1.2 Applied Approach 121 5.2.1.3 Path Tracing Algorithm (PTA) 122 5.2.1.4 Path Retrieval Algorithm (PRA) 123 5.3 Reliability Evaluation Using MVI Techniques 140 5.4 Summary 156 6 Dynamic Tolerant and Reliable Four Disjoint MIN Layouts 157 6.1 Topological Design Considerations 160 6.1.1 Topology 161 6.1.2 Switch Selection for Proposed 4DMIN 162 6.2 Proposed 4-Disjoint Multistage Interconnection Network (4DMIN) Layout 164 6.2.1 Switching Pattern 164 6.2.2 Redundant and Disjoint Paths 165 6.2.3 Routing and Dynamic Rerouting 166 6.2.4 Algorithm: Decision Making by Switches at Each Stage 168 6.2.5 Case Example 170 6.2.6 Disjoint and Dynamic Rerouting Approach in 4DMIN 172 6.2.7 Hardware Cost Analysis 172 6.3 Reliability Analysis and Comparison of MINs 174 6.4 Reliable Interconnection Network (RIN) Layout 181 6.4.1 Topology Design 185 6.4.2 Switching Pattern 187 6.4.3 Routing and Dynamic Rerouting 189 6.5 Reliability Analysis and Comparison of MINs 197 6.6 Summary 201 References 203 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectrical Safety Engineering of Renewable Energy Systems A reference to designing and developing electrical systems connected to renewable energies Electrical Safety Engineering of Renewable Energy Systems is an authoritative text that offers an in-depth exploration to the safety challenges of renewable systems. The authorsnoted experts on the topiccover a wide-range of renewable systems including photovoltaic, wind, and cogeneration and propose a safety-by-design approach. The book clearly illustrates safe behavior in complex real-world renewable energy systems using practical approaches. The book contains a review of the foundational electrical engineering topics and highlights how safety engineering links to the renewable energies. Designed as an accessible resource, the text discusses the most relevant and current topics supported by rigorous analytical, theoretical and numerical analyses. The authors also provide guidelines for readers interested in practical applications. This iTable of Contents Preface ix Acknowledgments xi 1 Fundamental Concepts of Electrical Safety Engineering 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Electric Shock 2 1.2.1 Ventricular Fibrillation 3 1.2.2 The Heart-current Factor 5 1.3 The Electrical Impedance of the Human Body 6 1.3.1 The Internal Resistance of the Human Body 7 1.4 Thermal Shock 10 1.5 Heated Surfaces of Electrical Equipment and Contact Burn Injuries 12 1.6 Ground-Potential and Ground-Resistance 14 1.6.1 Area of Influence of a Ground-electrode 18 1.7 Hemispherical Electrodes in Parallel 18 1.8 Hemispherical Electrodes in Series 19 1.9 Person’s Body Resistance-to-ground and Touch Voltages 20 1.10 Identification of Extraneous-Conductive-Parts 24 1.11 Measuring Touch Voltages 26 2 Safety-by-Design Approach in AC/DC Systems 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Class I PV Equipment 33 2.3 Class II PV Equipment 35 2.4 Ground Faults and Ground Fault Protection 35 2.5 Functionally Grounded PV Systems 37 2.6 Non-Ground-Referenced PV Systems 40 2.7 Ground-Referenced PV Systems 42 2.8 Fire Hazard in Ground-Referenced PV Systems 44 2.9 Faults at Loads Downstream the PV Inverter in Ground-Referenced PV Systems 47 2.10 Non-Electrically Separated PV System 48 2.11 PV Systems Wiring Methods and Safety 50 2.12 d.c. Currents and Safety 52 2.13 Electrical Safety of PV Systems 55 2.14 Rapid-Shutdown of PV Arrays on Buildings 57 2.15 Hazard and Risk 58 3 Grounding and Bonding 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Basic Concepts of Grounding Systems: The Ground Rod 67 3.3 The Maxwell Method 77 3.4 Multiple Rods: Mutual Resistance 83 3.5 Ground Rings and Ground Grid 87 3.6 Complex Arrangements: Rings and Ground Grids Combined with Rods and Horizontal Electrodes 100 4 Lightning Protection Systems 107 4.1 Review of Natural Lightning Physics, Modeling and Protection 108 4.2 Lightning Protection of PV Systems 121 4.2.1 Ground-Mounted PV Systems 124 4.2.2 Rooftop Mounted PV Systems 126 4.2.3 Protection against Overvoltage 128 4.2.4 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) 130 4.3 Lighting Protection of Wind Turbines 136 4.3.1 Lightning Protection System (LPS) 139 4.3.2 Step and Touch Voltages 143 4.3.3 Lightning Exposure Assessment 144 4.3.4 Assessment of the Average Annual Number of Dangerous Events NL Due to Flashes Directly to and near Service Cables 147 4.3.5 Lightning Protection Zones 149 4.4 High-Frequency Grounding Systems 151 4.4.1 Arrangement of Ground Electrodes 155 4.4.2 Effective Length of a Ground Electrode 157 4.4.3 Frequency-dependent Soil and Ionization 158 5 Renewable Energy System Protection and Coordination 169 5.1 Introduction 169 5.2 Power Collection Systems 170 5.3 Cable Connections 182 5.4 Offshore Wind Farm 188 5.5 Distributed Energy Resources: Battery Energy Storage Systems and Electric Vehicles 192 6 Soil Resistivity Measurements and Ground Resistance 205 6.1 Soil Resistivity Measurements 205 6.2 Wenner Method 208 6.3 Schlumberger Method 214 6.4 Multi-layer Soils 214 6.4.1 Ground Grid in Multi-layer Soil 217 6.4.2 Ground Rod in Multi-layer Soil 219 6.5 Fall-of-Potential Method for Ground Resistance Measurement 220 6.6 Slope Method for Grounding Resistance Measurement 223 6.7 Star-delta Method for Grounding Resistance Measurement 224 6.8 Four Potential Method for Grounding Resistance Measurement 225 6.9 Potentiometer Method for Grounding Resistance Measurement 226 Appendix 1: Performance of Grounding Systems in Transient Conditions 231 1 Grounding System Analysis 232 2 Mathematical Model 233 3 Computation of Impedances 235 4 Green’s Function 237 4.1 Static Formulation 237 4.1.1 One-Layer Ground 242 4.1.2 Two-Layer Ground 243 4.2 Dynamic Formulation 245 4.2.1 Equivalent Transmission Line Approach 249 5 Numerical Integration Aspects 252 5.1 Singular Term 252 5.2 Sommerfeld Integrals 254 Appendix 2: Cable Failures in Renewable Energy Systems 265 1 Cable Failures in Renewable Energy Systems: Introduction 266 2 Possible Solutions 267 2.1 Optimal Solutions 268 2.2 Termite Attacks Prevention 269 3 Non-destructive Methods for Cable Testing and Fault-locating 269 3.1 Insulation Resistance (IR) Test 271 3.1.1 IR Measurement of the Cable Insulation (XLPE) 271 3.1.2 IR Measurement of the Polyethylene (PE) Cable Jacket 272 3.2 High-Potential Test 272 3.3 LCR Test 273 3.3.1 Insulation Resistance (IR) 273 3.3.2 Dielectric Absorption Ratio (DAR) 273 3.3.3 Polarization Index (PI) 274 3.3.4 Quality Factor (Q) 274 3.3.5 Dissipation Factor (DF) 274 3.3.6 Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) Test 275 3.3.7 Arc Reflection (ARC) Test 276 3.3.8 Bridge Methods 276 3.4 Cable Fault Analysis 279 3.4.1 Prelocation 279 3.4.2 Pinpointing 280 4 Sheath and Jacket Repairs 280 5 Termite Baiting Stations and Monitoring 281 6 Termite-proof Cables 283 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover an innovative and fresh approach to teaching classical electromagnetics at a foundational level Introduction to Electromagnetic Waves with Maxwell''s Equations delivers an accessible and practical approach to teaching the well-known topics all electromagnetics instructors must include in their syllabus. Based on the author''s decades of experience teaching the subject, the book is carefully tuned to be relevant to an audience of engineering students who have already been exposed to the basic curricula of linear algebra and multivariate calculus. Forming the backbone of the book, Maxwell''s equations are developed step-by-step in consecutive chapters, while related electromagnetic phenomena are discussed simultaneously. The author presents accompanying mathematical tools alongside the material provided in the book to assist students with retention and comprehension. The book contains over 100 solved problems and examples with stepwise solutions ofTable of ContentsPreface 15 Mathematical Notation 23 List of Symbols 27 Special Functions 31 Frequently Used Identities 33 Tools to Understand Maxwell’s Equations 37 0 Preliminary 39 0.1 Scalar and Vector Fields 40 0.2 Cartesian Coordinate Systems 42 0.3 Basic Vector Operations 42 0.4 Orthogonal Coordinate Systems 43 0.4.1 Properties of a Cartesian Coordinate System 43 0.4.2 Cylindrical Coordinate System 44 0.4.3 Spherical Coordinate System 45 0.5 Electrostatics, Magnetostatics, and Electromagnetics 47 0.6 Time in Electromagnetics 49 0.7 Final Remarks 51 1 Gauss’ Law 53 1.1 Integral Form of Gauss’ Law 54 1.1.1 Differential Surface With Direction 55 1.1.2 Dot Product 56 1.1.3 Flux of Vector Fields 62 1.1.4 Meaning of Gauss’ Law and Its Application 66 1.1.5 Examples 67 1.2 Using the Integral Form of Gauss’ Law 69 1.2.1 Examples 71 1.3 Differential Form of Gauss’ Law 73 1.3.1 Electric Charge Density 73 1.3.2 Divergence of Vector Fields 75 1.3.3 Divergence Theorem and the Differential Form of Gauss’ Law 81 1.3.4 Examples 83 1.4 Using the Differential Form of Gauss’ Law 85 1.4.1 Examples 88 1.5 Boundary Conditions for Normal Electric Fields 89 1.6 Static Cases and Coulomb’s Law 92 1.6.1 Superposition Principle 93 1.6.2 Coulomb’s Law and Electric Force 99 1.6.3 Examples 101 1.7 Gauss’ Law and Dielectrics 106 1.7.1 Electric Dipole 112 1.7.2 Polarization 113 1.7.3 Equivalent Polarization Charges 115 1.7.4 Examples 120 1.8 Final Remarks 123 1.9 Exercises 124 1.10 Questions 127 2 Ampere’s Law 133 2.1 Integral Form of Ampere’s Law 134 2.1.1 Differential Length With Direction 135 2.1.2 Circulation of Vector Fields 137 2.1.3 Meaning of Ampere’s Law and Its Application 140 2.1.4 Examples 143 2.2 Using the Integral Form of Ampere’s Law 145 2.2.1 Examples 147 2.3 Differential Form of Ampere’s Law 151 2.3.1 Electric Current Density 152 2.3.2 Cross Product 154 2.3.3 Curl of Vector Fields 157 2.3.4 Stoke’s Theorem and the Differential Form of Ampere’s Law 164 2.3.5 Examples 165 2.4 Using the Differential Form of Ampere’s Law 169 2.4.1 Examples 172 2.5 Boundary Conditions for Tangential Magnetic Fields 173 2.6 Gauss’ Law and Ampere’s Law 176 2.7 Static Cases, Biot-Savart Law, and Ampere’s Force Law 179 2.7.1 Superposition Principle 180 2.7.2 Ampere’s Force Law and Magnetic Force 190 2.7.3 Examples 194 2.8 Ampere’s Law and Magnetic Materials 200 2.8.1 Magnetic Dipole 206 2.8.2 Magnetization 208 2.8.3 Equivalent Magnetization Currents 210 2.8.4 Examples 217 2.9 Final Remarks 218 2.10 Exercises 219 2.11 Questions 221 3 Faraday’s Law 225 3.1 Integral Form of Faraday’s Law 226 3.1.1 Meaning of Faraday’s Law and Its Application 227 3.1.2 Lorentz Force Law 229 3.2 Using the Integral Form of Faraday’s Law 231 3.2.1 Examples 236 3.3 Differential Form of Faraday’s Law 240 3.4 Boundary Conditions for Tangential Electric Fields 242 3.5 Combining Faraday’s Law with Gauss’ and Ampere’s Laws 244 3.6 Static Cases and Electric Scalar Potential 246 3.6.1 Gradient of Scalar Fields 248 3.6.2 Examples 252 3.6.3 Gradient Theorem 253 3.6.4 Gradient in Gauss’ Law, Ampere’s Law, and Faraday’s Law 254 3.6.5 Electric Potential Energy 257 3.6.5.1 Electric Potential Energy of Discrete Charge Distributions 261 3.6.5.2 Stored Electric Potential Energy by an Electric Dipole 263 3.6.5.3 Stored Electric Potential Energy in Charge Distributions 265 3.6.5.4 Electric Potential Energy and Electric Force 269 3.6.6 Examples 272 3.6.7 Poisson’s Equation and Laplace’s Equation 276 3.6.8 Examples 283 3.6.9 Finding Electric Scalar Potential From Electric Field Intensity 283 3.6.10 Examples 286 3.6.11 Electrostatic Boundary Value Problems 288 3.6.12 Examples 291 3.7 Final Remarks 294 3.8 Exercises 294 3.9 Questions 296 4 Gauss’ Law for Magnetic Fields 299 4.1 Integral and Differential Forms of Gauss’ law for Magnetic Fields 300 4.1.1 Meaning of Gauss’ law for Magnetic Fields 302 4.1.2 Examples 304 4.2 Boundary Conditions for Normal Magnetic Fields 306 4.2.1 Examples 307 4.3 Static Cases and Magnetic Vector Potential 308 4.3.1 Magnetic Vector Potential and Coulomb’s Gauge 309 4.3.2 Examples 318 4.3.3 Magnetic Potential Energy 321 4.3.3.1 Magnetic Potential Energy of Discrete Current Distributions 323 4.3.3.2 Stored Magnetic Potential Energy by a Magnetic Dipole 324 4.3.3.3 Stored Magnetic Potential Energy in Current Distributions 326 4.3.3.4 Magnetic Potential Energy and Magnetic Force 329 4.3.4 Examples 332 4.4 Combining All Maxwell’s Equations 334 4.4.1 Wave Equations 336 4.4.2 Wave Equations for Potentials 343 4.4.3 Time-Harmonic Sources and Helmholtz Equations 349 4.4.4 Examples 354 4.5 Final Remarks 359 4.6 Exercises 360 4.7 Questions 363 5 Basic Solutions of Maxwell’s Equations 365 5.1 Summary of Maxwell’s Equations, Wave Equations, and Helmholtz Equations 366 5.1.1 Examples 375 5.2 Electromagnetic Propagation and Radiation 377 5.2.1 Hertzian Dipole 382 5.2.2 Examples 385 5.3 Plane Waves 389 5.3.1 Examples 400 5.3.2 Polarization of Plane Waves 401 5.3.3 Examples 407 5.3.4 Power of Plane Waves 409 5.3.5 Reflection and Refraction of Plane Waves 412 5.3.6 General Case for Reflection and Refraction 416 5.3.6.1 Perpendicular Polarization 418 5.3.6.2 Parallel Polarization 421 5.3.7 Examples 423 5.3.8 Total Internal Reflection 427 5.3.9 Total Transmission 430 5.3.10 Examples 434 5.3.11 Reflection and Transmission for Two Parallel Interfaces 437 5.4 Final Remarks 440 5.5 Exercises 440 5.6 Questions 443 6 Analyses of Conducting Objects 447 6.1 Ohm’s Law 449 6.2 Joule’s Law 452 6.3 Relaxation Time 453 6.4 Boundary Conditions for Conducting Media 456 6.5 Analyses of Perfectly Conducting Objects 457 6.5.1 Electric Scalar Potential for PECs 458 6.5.2 Boundary Conditions for PECs 458 6.5.3 Basic Responses of PECs 460 6.5.4 Concerns in Geometric Representations of PECs 462 6.5.5 Electrostatics for PECs 464 6.5.6 Method of Images 466 6.5.7 Examples 470 6.6 Maxwell’s Equations in Conducting Media 474 6.6.1 Complex Permittivity 476 6.6.2 Power and Energy in Conducting Media 478 6.6.3 Plane Waves in Conducting Media 479 6.6.4 Power of Plane Waves in Conducting Media 483 6.6.5 Reflection from PECs 484 6.6.6 Examples 494 6.7 Capacitance 503 6.7.1 Capacitance and Electric Potential Energy 504 6.7.2 Parallel-Plate Capacitors 505 6.7.3 Spherical Capacitors 513 6.7.4 Cylindrical Capacitors 518 6.7.5 Examples 520 6.8 Resistance 528 6.8.1 Examples 535 6.9 Inductance 544 6.9.1 Examples 553 6.10 Final Remarks 559 6.11 Exercises 560 6.12 Questions 565 7 Transmission of Electromagnetic Waves 569 7.1 Antennas and Wireless Transmission 570 7.1.1 Basic Properties of Antennas 571 7.1.2 Antenna Design Parameters 582 7.1.3 Antenna Types 585 7.1.3.1 Antenna Arrays 588 7.1.4 Friis Transmission Equation 600 7.1.5 Examples 603 7.2 Waveguides 613 7.2.1 Transverse and Axial Fields 614 7.2.2 Rectangular Waveguides 617 7.2.2.1 Transverse Magnetic Modes 618 7.2.2.2 Transverse Electric Modes 620 7.2.2.3 Non-Existing Modes 623 7.2.2.4 Important Properties of Modes 624 7.2.3 Parallel-Plate Waveguides 628 7.2.4 Examples 630 7.3 Transmission Line Theory 635 7.3.1 Telegrapher’s Equations 637 7.3.1.1 Transmission Line With a Load 641 7.3.1.2 Special Cases 643 7.3.1.3 Common Cases 646 7.3.2 Voltage and Current Patterns 647 7.3.3 Examples 651 7.4 Concluding Remarks 658 7.5 Exercises 658 7.6 Questions 663 8 Concluding Chapter 669 8.1 Electromagnetic Spectrum 670 8.1.1 Radio Waves (3 Hz to 300 GHz) 671 8.1.2 Microwaves (300 MHz to 300 GHz) 672 8.1.3 Infrared Radiation (300 GHz to 400 THz) 673 8.1.4 Visible Range (400 THz to 800 THz) 674 8.1.5 Ultraviolet Radiation (800 THz to 30 PHz) 675 8.1.6 X-Rays (30 PHz to 30 EHz) 676 8.1.7 Gamma Rays (Above 30 EHz) 678 8.2 Brief History of Electromagnetism (Electricity, Magnetism, and a Little Optics) 679 8.3 Electromagnetism in Action 685 8.3.1 Snapshots From Nature 686 8.3.1.1 Blue Sky, Bright Sun, Red Sunset 686 8.3.1.2 Rainbow in Pocket 687 8.3.1.3 Green Leaf, Red Apple, Blue Sea 688 8.3.1.4 Electromagnetic Waves From Space 689 8.3.1.5 Magnetic Earth 690 8.3.2 Snapshots From Technology 691 8.3.2.1 Telegraph to Cellular Phones 691 8.3.2.2 Home: Where Electromagnetism Happens 693 8.3.2.3 Looking Inside Body 694 8.3.2.4 Seeing World with Sensors and Radars 696 8.3.2.5 Atoms Under Microscope 699 8.4 How to Solve Maxwell’s Equations 700 8.4.1 Full-Wave Methods 705 8.4.1.1 Differential-Equation Solvers 706 8.4.1.1.1 Finite-Difference Time-Domain Method (FDTD): 706 8.4.1.1.2 Finite Element Method (FEM): 707 8.4.1.2 Integral-Equation Solvers 708 8.4.1.2.1 Method of Moments (MoM): 709 8.4.1.2.2 Acceleration Algorithms: 709 8.4.1.2.3 FMM and MLFMA: 711 8.4.2 Asymptotic Techniques 711 8.4.2.0.1 Quasistatic Approximations: 712 8.4.2.0.2 Geometrical Optics: 713 8.4.2.0.3 Uniform Geometrical Theory of Diffraction: 713 8.4.2.0.4 Physical Optics: 714 Bibliography 717 Index 725

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectrical Processes in Organic Thin Film Devices A one-stop examination of fundamental electrical behaviour in organic electronic device architectures In Electrical Processes in Organic Thin Film Devices: From Bulk Materials to Nanoscale Architectures, distinguished researcher Michael C. Petty delivers an in-depth treatment of the electrical behaviour of organic electronic devices focused on first principles. The author describes the fundamental electrical behaviour of various device architectures and offers an introduction to the physical processes that play a role in the electrical conductivity of organic materials. Beginning with band theory, the text moves on to address the effects of thin film device architectures and nanostructures. The book discusses the applications to devices currently in the marketplace, like displays, as well as those under development (transistors, solar cells, and memories). Electrical Processes in Organic Thin Film DTable of ContentsChapter 1 – Electronic and Vibrational States in Organic Solids 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Band Theory for Inorganic Single Crystals 1.2.1 Schrödinger Wave Equation 1.2.2 Density of Electron States 1.2.3 Occupation of Energy States 1.2.4 Conductors, Semiconductors and Insulators 1.2.5 Electrons and Holes 1.2.6 Doping 1.3 Lattice Vibrations 1.4 Amorphous Inorganic Semiconductors 1.5 Organic Semiconductors 1.5.1 Electronic Orbitals and Bands in Important Organic Compounds 1.5.2 Molecular Crystals 1.5.3 Polymers 1.5.4 Charge-transfer Complexes 1.5.5 Graphene 1.5.6 Fullerenes and Carbon Nanotubes 1.5.7 Doping of Organic Semiconductors Problems References Further Reading Chapter 2 – Electrical Conductivity: Fundamental Principles 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Classical Model 2.3 Boltzmann Transport Equation 2.4 Ohm’s Law 2.5 Charge Carrier Mobility 2.6 Equilibrium Carrier Statistics 2.6.1 Intrinsic Conduction 2.6.2 Carrier Generation and Recombination 2.6.3 Extrinsic Conduction 2.6.4 Fermi Level Position 2.6.5 Meyer-Neldel Rule 2.7 Excess Carriers 2.7.1 Quasi-Fermi Level 2.7.2 Diffusion and Drift 2.7.3 Gradients in the Quasi-Fermi Levels 2.7.4 Carrier Lifetime 2.8 Superconductivity Problems References Further Reading Chapter 3 – Defects and Nanoscale Phenomena 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Material Purity 3.3 Point and Line Defects 3.4 Traps and Recombination Centres 3.4.1 Direct Recombination 3.4.2 Recombination via Traps 3.5 Grain Boundaries and Surfaces 3.5.1 Interface States 3.6 Polymer Defects 3.6.1 Solitons 3.6.2 Polarons and Bipolarons 3.7 Disordered Semiconductors 3.8 Electron Transport in Low Dimensional Systems 3.8.1 Two-dimensional Transport 3.8.2 One-dimensional Transport 3.8.3 Zero-dimensional Transport 3.9 Nanosystems 3.9.1 Scaling Laws 3.9.2 Interatomic Forces Problems References Further Reading Chapter 4 – Electrical Contacts: Ohmic and Rectifying Behaviour 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Practical Considerations 4.3 Neutral, Ohmic and Blocking Contacts 4.4 Schottky Barrier 4.4.1 Barrier Formation 4.4.2 Image Force 4.4.3 Current versus Voltage Behaviour 4.4.4 Effect of an Interfacial Layer 4.4.5 Organic Schottky Diodes 4.5 Molecular Devices 4.5.1 Metal/Molecule Contacts 4.5.2 Break Junctions 4.5.3 Molecular Rectifying Diodes 4.5.4 Molecular Resonant Tunnelling Devices Problems References Further Reading Chapter 5 – Metal/Insulator/Semiconductor Devices: The Field Effect 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Ideal MIS device 5.3 Departures from Ideality 5.3.1 Insulator Charge and Work Function Differences 5.3.2 Interface Traps 5.4 Organic MIS Devices 5.4.1 Inorganic Semiconductor/Organic Insulator Structures 5.4.2 Organic Semiconductor Structures Problems References Further Reading Chapter 6 – DC Conductivity 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Electronic versus Ionic Conductivity 6.3 Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling 6.4 Variable Range Hopping 6.5 Fluctuation-induced Tunnelling 6.6 Space Charge Injection 6.6.1 Effect of Traps 6.6.2 Two-carrier Injection 6.7 Schottky, Fowler-Nordheim and Poole-Frenkel Effects 6.8 Electrical Breakdown 6.8.1 Intrinsic Breakdown 6.8.2 Electromechanical Breakdown 6.8.3 Thermal Runaway 6.8.4 Contact Instability 6.8.5 Other Effects 6.9 Electromigration 6.10 Measurement of Trapping Parameters 6.10.1 Thermally Stimulated Conductivity 6.10.2 Capacitance Spectroscopy Problems References Further Reading Chapter 7 – Polarization and AC Conductivity 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Polarization 7.2.1 Dipole Creation 7.2.2 Permanent Polarization 7.2.3 Piezoelectricity, Pyroelectricity and Ferroelectricity 7.3 Conductivity at High Frequencies 7.3.1 Displacement Current 7.3.2 Frequency-dependent Permittivity 7.3.3 AC Conductivity 7.4 Impedance Spectroscopy 7.5 AC Electrical Measurements 7.5.1 Lock-in Amplifier 7.5.2 Scanning Microscopy 7.6 Electrical Noise Problems References Further Reading Chapter 8 – Organic Field Effect Transistors 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Physics of Operation 8.3 Transistor Fabrication 8.4 Practical Device Behaviour 8.4.1 Contact Resistance 8.4.2 Material Morphology and Traps 8.4.3 Short Channel Effects 8.4.4 Organic Semiconductors 8.4.5 Gate Dielectric 8.5 Organic Integrated Circuits 8.6 Nanotube and Graphene FETs 8.7 Single-electron Transistors 8.8 Transistor-based Chemical Sensors 8.8.1 Ion-sensitive FETs 8.8.2 Charge-flow Transistor Problems References Further Reading Chapter 9 – Electronic Memory 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Memory Types 9.3 Resistive Memory 9.4 Organic Flash Memory 9.5 Ferroelectric RAMs 9.6 Spintronics 9.7 Molecular Memories Problems References Further Reading Chapter 10 – Light-emitting Devices 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Light Emission Processes 10.3 Operating Principles 10.4 Colour Measurement 10.5 Photometric Units 10.6 OLED Efficiency 10.7 Device Architectures 10.7.1 Top- and Bottom-emitting OLEDs 10.7.2 Electrodes 10.7.3 Hole- and Electron-transport Layers 10.7.4 Triplet Management 10.7.5 Blended-layer and Molecularly-engineered Devices 10.8 Increasing the Light Output 10.8.1 Efficiency Losses 10.8.2 Microlenses and Shaped Substrates 10.8.3 Microcavities 10.8.4 Device Degradation 10.9 Full-colour Displays 10.10 Organic Semiconductor Lasers 10.11 OLED Lighting 10.12 Light-emitting Electrochemical Cells 10.13 Light-emitting Transistors Problems References Further Reading Chapter 11 – Photoconductive and Photovoltaic Devices 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Photoconductivity 11.2.1 Optical Absorption 11.2.2 Carrier Lifetime 11.2.3 Photosenstivity 11.3 Xerography 11.4 Photovoltaic Principles 11.4.1 Electrical Characteristics 11.4.2 Efficiency 11.5 Organic Solar Cells 11.5.1 Carrier Collection 11.5.2 Bulk Heterojunction Solar Cells 11.5.3 Electrodes and Device Architectures 11.5.4 Tandem Cells 11.5.5 Upconversion 11.5.6 Device Degradation 11.6 Dye-sensitized Solar Cells 11.7 Hybrid Solar Cells 11.7.1 Polymer-Metal Oxide Devices 11.7.2 Inorganic Semiconductor-Polymer Hole-transporter Cells 11.7.3 Perovskite Solar Cells 11.8 Luminescent Solar Concentrator 11.9 Organic Photodiodes and Phototransistors Problems References Further Reading Chapter 12 – Emerging Devices and Systems 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Molecular Logic Circuits 12.3 Inspiration from the Natural World 12.3.1 Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins 12.3.2 Nucleotides, DNA and RNA 12.3.3 ATP, ADP 12.3.4 The Biological Membrane and Ion Transport 12.3.5 Electron Transport 12.3.6 Neurons 12.4 Computing Strategies 12.4.1 Von Neumann Computer 12.4.2 Biological Information Processing 12.4.3 Artificial Neural Networks 12.4.4 Organic Neuromorphic Devices 12.4.5 DNA and Microtubule Electronics 12.4.6 Quantum Computing 12.4.7 Evolvable Electronics 12.5 Fault Tolerance and Self Repair 12.6 Bacteriorhodopsin – A Light-driven Proton Pump 12.7 Photosynthesis and Artificial Molecular Architectures 12.8 Bio-chemical Sensors 12.8.1 Biocatalytic Sensors 12.8.2 Bioaffinity Sensors 12.9 Electronic Olfaction and Gustation Problems References Further Reading

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive survey of boundary conditions as applied in antenna and microwave engineering, material physics, optics, and general electromagnetics research. Boundary conditions are essential for determining electromagnetic problems. Working with engineering problems, they provide analytic assistance in mathematical handling of electromagnetic structures, and offer synthetic help for designing new electromagnetic structures.Boundary Conditions in Electromagneticsdescribes the most-general boundary conditions restricted by linearity and locality, and analyzes basic plane-wave reflection and matching problems associated to a planar boundary in a simple-isotropic medium. This comprehensive text first introduces known special cases of particular familiar forms of boundary conditions perfect electromagnetic conductor, impedance, and DB boundaries and then examines various general forms of boundary conditions. Subsequent chapters discuss sesquilinear boundary conditions and practicTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Basic Equations 1 1.2 Duality Transformation 3 1.3 Plane Waves 5 1.4 TE/TM Decomposition 8 1.5 Problems 10 2 Perfect Electromagnetic Conductor Boundary 11 2.1 PEMC Conditions 11 2.2 Eigenproblem of Dyadic Jt 12 2.3 Reflection from PEMC Boundary 14 2.4 Polarization Rotation 17 2.5 Point Source and PEMC Plane 18 2.6 Waveguide with PEMC Walls 20 2.7 Parallel-Plate PEMC Resonator 22 2.8 Modeling Small PEMC Particles 24 2.9 Problems 29 3 Impedance Boundary 33 3.1 Basic Conditions 33 3.2 Subclasses of Impedance Boundaries 36 3.3 Reflection from Impedance Boundary 38 3.4 Matched Waves 40 3.5 Simple-Isotropic Impedance Boundary 41 3.6 General Isotropic Boundary 48 3.7 Perfectly Anisotropic Boundary 52 3.8 Generalized Soft-and-Hard (GSH) Boundary 55 3.9 Duality Transformation of Impedance Boundaries 62 3.10 Realization of Impedance Boundaries 64 3.11 Problems 67 4 DB Boundary 71 4.1 Boundary Conditions Involving Normal Field Components 71 4.2 Reflection from DB Boundary 72 4.3 Realization of DB Boundary 75 4.4 Spherical DB Resonator 81 4.5 Circular DB Waveguide 84 4.6 D’B’ Boundary 92 4.7 Mixed-Impedance (DB/D’B’) Boundary 96 4.8 Problems 98 5 General Boundary Conditions 101 5.1 Electromagnetic Sheet as Boundary Surface 101 5.2 General Boundary Conditions (GBC) 102 5.3 Decomposition of Plane Waves 104 5.4 Reflection from GBC Boundary 106 5.5 Matched Waves 108 5.6 Eigenwaves 110 5.7 Duality Transformation 112 5.8 Soft-and-Hard/DB (SHDB) Boundary 113 5.9 Generalized Soft-and-Hard/DB (GSHDB) Boundary 122 5.10 GBC Boundaries with PEC/PMC Equivalence 127 5.11 Some Special GBC Boundaries 128 5.12 Summary of GBC Conditions 133 5.13 Reciprocity of GBC Boundaries 134 5.14 Realization of the GBC Boundary 139 5.15 Problems 140 6 Sesquilinear Boundary Conditions 143 6.1 Isotropic and Anisotropic SQL Boundaries 144 6.2 Reflection from Isotropic SQL Boundary 145 6.3 Eigenfields 149 6.4 Power Balance 151 6.5 Image theory 153 6.6 Problems 155 7 Scattering by Objects Defined by Boundary Conditions 157 7.1 Cross Sections and Efficiencies 157 7.2 PEC, PMC, and PEMC Objects 159 7.3 DB and D’B’-Boundary Objects 165 7.4 Impedance-Boundary Objects 169 7.5 Problems 176 A Electromagnetic Formulas 179 B Dyadics 183 C Four-Dimensional Formalism 189 D Solutions to Problems 197 References 247 Index 256

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the concepts and applications of queuing theory and traffic theory Network Traffic Engineering: Models and Applications provides an advanced level queuing theory guide for students with a strong mathematical background who are interested in analytic modeling and performance assessment of communication networks. The text begins with the basics of queueing theory before moving on to more advanced levels. The topics covered in the book are derived from the most cutting-edge research, project development, teaching activity, and discussions on the subject. They include applications of queuing and traffic theory in: LTE networks Wi-Fi networks Ad-hoc networks Automated vehicles Congestion control on the Internet The distinguished author seeks to show how insight into practical and real-world problems can be gained by means of quantitative modeling. Perfect for graduate studeTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acronyms xix Part I Models for Service Systems 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Network Traffic Engineering: What, Why, How 3 1.2 The Art of Modeling 8 1.3 An Example: Delay Equalization 13 1.3.1 Model Setting 14 1.3.2 Analysis by Equations 15 1.3.3 Analysis by Simulation 19 1.3.4 Takeaways 21 1.4 Outline of the Book 21 1.4.1 Plan 21 1.4.2 Use 25 1.4.3 Notation 27 1.5 Further Readings 29 Problems 30 2 Service Systems and Queues 33 2.1 Service System Structure 33 2.2 Arrival and Service Processes 35 2.3 The Queue as a Service System Model 38 2.4 Queues in Equilibrium 40 2.4.1 Queues and Stationary Processes 40 2.4.2 Little’s Law 45 2.5 Palm’s Distributions for a Queue 49 2.6 The Traffic Process 53 2.7 Performance Metrics 56 2.7.1 Throughput 56 2.7.2 Utilization 59 2.7.3 Loss 59 2.7.4 Delay 61 2.7.5 Age of Information 62 Summary and Takeaways 63 Problems 65 3 Stochastic Models for Network Traffic 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 The Poisson Process 72 3.2.1 Light versus Heavy Tails 78 3.2.2 Inhomogeneous Poisson Process 79 3.2.3 Poisson Process in Multidimensional Spaces 84 3.2.3.1 Displacement 89 3.2.3.2 Mapping 89 3.2.3.3 Thinning 90 3.2.3.4 Distances 91 3.2.3.5 Sums and Products on Point Processes 92 3.2.3.6 Hard Core Processes 94 3.2.4 Testing for Poisson 96 3.3 The Markovian Arrival Process 100 3.4 Renewal Processes 103 3.4.1 Residual Inter-Event Time and Renewal Paradox 108 3.4.2 Superposition of Renewal Processes 110 3.4.3 Alternating Renewal Processes 111 3.4.4 Renewal Reward Processes 113 3.5 Birth-Death Processes 115 3.6 Branching Processes 121 Summary and Takeaways 125 Problems 126 Part II Queues 131 4 Single-Server Queues 133 4.1 Introduction and Notation 133 4.2 The Embedded Markov Chain Analysis of the M∕G∕1 Queue 134 4.2.1 Queue Length 136 4.2.2 Waiting Time 141 4.2.3 Busy Period and Idle Time 145 4.2.4 Remaining Service Time 148 4.2.5 Output Process 149 4.2.6 Evaluation of the Probabilities {ak}k∈ℤ 151 4.3 The M∕G∕1∕K Queue 152 4.3.1 Exact Solution 153 4.3.2 Asymptotic Approximation for Large K 157 4.4 Numerical Evaluation of the Queue Length PDF 166 4.5 A Special Case: the M∕M∕1 Queue 168 4.6 Optimization of a Single-Server Queue 170 4.6.1 Maximization of Net Profit 171 4.6.2 Minimization of Age of Information 174 4.6.2.1 General Expression of the Average Age of Information 175 4.6.2.2 Minimization of the Age of Information for an M∕M∕1 Model 177 4.7 The G∕M∕1 Queue 178 4.8 Matrix-Geometric Queues 185 4.8.1 Quasi Birth-Death (QBD) Processes 186 4.8.2 M∕G∕1 and G∕M∕1 Structured Processes 188 4.9 A General Result on Single-Server Queues 192 Summary and Takeaways 194 Problems 195 5 Multi-Server Queues 199 5.1 Introduction 199 5.2 The Erlang Loss System 201 5.2.1 Insensitivity Property of the Erlang Loss System 211 5.2.2 A Finite Population Model 213 5.2.3 Non-Poisson Input Traffic 214 5.2.3.1 Wilkinson’s Method 217 5.2.3.2 Fredericks’ Method 218 5.2.4 Multi-Class Erlang Loss System 221 5.3 Application of the Erlang Loss Model to Cellular Radio Access Network 224 5.3.1 Cell Dimensioning under Quality of Service Constraints 225 5.3.2 Number of Handoffs in a Connection Lifetime 230 5.3.3 Blocking in a Cell with User Mobility 232 5.3.4 Trade-off between Location Updating and Paging 234 5.3.5 Dimensioning of a Cell with Two Service Classes 236 5.4 The M∕M∕m Queue 238 5.4.1 Finite Queue Size Model 243 5.4.2 Resource Sharing versus Isolation 244 5.5 Infinite Server Queues 247 5.5.1 Analysis of Message Propagation in a Linear Network 252 Summary and Takeaways 257 Problems 258 6 Priorities and Scheduling 265 6.1 Introduction 265 6.2 Conservation Law 268 6.3 M∕G∕1 Priority Queueing 272 6.3.1 Non-FCFS Queueing Disciplines 273 6.3.2 Head-of-Line (HOL) Priorities 276 6.3.3 Preempt-Resume Priorities 283 6.3.4 Shortest Job First 284 6.3.5 Shortest Remaining Processing Time 286 6.3.6 The 𝜇C Rule 288 6.4 Processor Sharing 289 6.4.1 The M∕G∕1 Processor Sharing Model 290 6.4.2 Generalized Processor Sharing 293 6.4.3 Weighted Fair Queueing 298 6.4.4 Credit-Based Scheduling 302 6.4.5 Deficit Round Robin Scheduling 306 6.4.6 Least Attained Service Scheduling 308 6.5 Miscellaneous Scheduling 312 6.5.1 Scheduling on a Radio Link 312 6.5.1.1 Proportional Fairness 312 6.5.1.2 Multi-rate Orthogonal Multiplexing 313 6.5.2 Job Dispatching 318 6.6 Optimal Scheduling 324 6.6.1 Anticipative Systems 325 6.6.2 Server-Sharing, Nonanticipative Systems 325 6.6.3 Non-Server-Sharing, Nonanticipative Systems 326 Summary and Takeaways 327 Problems 327 7 Queueing Networks 331 7.1 Structure of a Queueing Network and Notation 331 7.2 Open Queueing Networks 332 7.2.1 Optimization of Network Capacities 345 7.2.2 Optimal Routing 347 7.2.3 Braess Paradox 350 7.3 Closed Queueing Networks 355 7.3.1 Arrivals See Time Averages (ASTA) 358 7.3.2 Buzen’s Algorithm for the Computation of the Normalization Constant 359 7.3.3 Mean Value Analysis 360 7.4 Loss Networks 369 7.4.1 Erlang Fixed-Point Approximation 373 7.4.2 Alternate Routing 378 7.5 Stability of Queueing Networks 381 7.5.1 Definition of Stability 385 7.5.2 Turning a Stochastic Discrete Queueing Network into a Deterministic Fluid Network 387 7.6 Further Readings 390 Appendix 391 Summary and Takeaways 394 Problems 394 8 Bounds and Approximations 399 8.1 Introduction 399 8.2 Bounds for the G∕G∕1 Queue 401 8.2.1 Mean Value Analysis 404 8.2.2 Output Process 406 8.2.3 Upper and Lower Bounds of the Mean Waiting Time 407 8.2.4 Upper Bound of the Waiting Time Probability Distribution 409 8.3 Bounds for the G∕G∕m Queue 412 8.4 Approximate Analysis of Isolated G∕G Queues 416 8.4.1 Approximations from Bounds 416 8.4.2 Approximation of the Arrival or Service Process 417 8.4.3 Reflected Brownian Motion Approximation 418 8.4.4 Heavy-traffic Approximation 423 8.5 Approximate Analysis of a Network of G∕G∕1 Queues 426 8.5.1 Superposition of Flows 427 8.5.2 Flow Through a Queue 428 8.5.3 Bernoulli Splitting of a Flow 428 8.5.4 Putting Pieces Together: The Decomposition Method 429 8.5.5 Bottleneck Approximation for Closed Queueing Networks 442 8.6 Fluid Models 443 8.6.1 Deterministic Fluid Model 444 8.6.2 From Fluid to Diffusion Model 452 8.6.3 Stochastic Fluid Model 456 8.6.4 Steady-State Analysis 459 8.6.4.1 Infinite Buffer Size (K = ∞) 462 8.6.4.2 Loss Probability 463 8.6.5 First Passage Times 466 8.6.6 Application of the Stochastic Fluid Model to a Multiplexer with ON-OFF Traffic Sources 468 Summary and Takeaways 471 Problems 472 Part III Networked Systems and Protocols 477 9 Multiple Access 479 9.1 Introduction 479 9.2 Slotted ALOHA 482 9.2.1 Analysis of the Naïve Slotted ALOHA 483 9.2.2 Finite Population Slotted ALOHA 487 9.2.3 Stabilized Slotted ALOHA 494 9.3 Pure ALOHA with Variable Packet Times 499 9.4 Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) 504 9.4.1 Features of the CSMA Protocol 505 9.4.1.1 Clear Channel Assessment 505 9.4.1.2 Persistence Policy 506 9.4.1.3 Retransmission Policy 507 9.4.2 Finite Population Model of CSMA 509 9.4.3 Multi-Packet Reception CSMA 513 9.4.3.1 Multi-Packet Reception 1-Persistent CSMA with Poisson Traffic 515 9.4.3.2 Multi-Packet Reception Nonpersistent CSMA with Poisson Traffic 519 9.4.4 Stability of CSMA 523 9.4.5 Delay Analysis of Stabilized CSMA 531 9.5 Analysis of the WiFi MAC Protocol 534 9.5.1 Outline of the IEEE 802.11 DCF Protocol 534 9.5.2 Model of CSMA/CA 538 9.5.2.1 The Back-off Process 540 9.5.2.2 Virtual Slot Time 543 9.5.2.3 Saturation Throughput 545 9.5.2.4 Service Times of IEEE 802.11 DCF 549 9.5.2.5 Correlation between Service Times 554 9.5.3 Optimization of Back-off Parameters 556 9.5.3.1 Maximization of Throughput 556 9.5.3.2 Minimization of Service Time Jitter 561 9.5.4 Fairness of CSMA/CA 565 9.6 Further Readings 570 Appendix 572 Summary and Takeaways 573 Problems 575 10 Congestion Control 579 10.1 Introduction 579 10.2 Congestion Control Architecture in the Internet 583 10.3 Evolution of Congestion Control in the Internet 587 10.3.1 TCP Reno 588 10.3.1.1 TCP Congestion Control Operations 589 10.3.1.2 NewReno 593 10.3.1.3 TCP Congestion Control with SACK 594 10.3.1.4 Congestion Window Validation 595 10.3.2 TCP CUBIC 596 10.3.3 TCP Vegas 598 10.3.4 Data Center TCP (DCTCP) 601 10.3.4.1 Marking at the Switch 602 10.3.4.2 ECN-Echo at the Receiver 603 10.3.4.3 Controller at the Sender 603 10.3.5 Bottleneck Bandwidth and RTT (BBR) 604 10.3.5.1 Delivery Rate Estimate 607 10.3.5.2 StartUp and Drain 608 10.3.5.3 ProbeBW 609 10.3.5.4 ProbeRTT 610 10.3.5.5 Pseudo-code of BBR Algorithm 610 10.4 Traffic Engineering with TCP 611 10.5 Fluid Model of a Single TCP Connection Congestion Control 614 10.5.1 Classic TCP with Fixed Capacity Bottleneck Link 615 10.5.2 Classic TCP with Variable Capacity Bottleneck Link 617 10.5.2.1 Discretization of the Evolution Equations 625 10.5.2.2 Accuracy of the Fluid Approximation of TCP 627 10.5.3 Application to Wireless Links 630 10.5.3.1 Random Capacity 630 10.5.3.2 TCP over Cellular Link 632 10.6 Fluid Model of Multiple TCP Connections Congestion Control 635 10.6.1 Negligible Buffering at the Bottleneck 635 10.6.2 Classic TCP with Drop Tail Buffer at the Bottleneck 637 10.6.3 Classic TCP with AQM at the Bottleneck 638 10.6.4 Data Center TCP with FIFO Buffer at the Bottleneck 639 10.7 Fairness and Congestion Control 642 10.8 Network Utility Maximization (NUM) 645 10.9 Challenges to TCP 652 10.9.1 Fat-Long Pipes 653 10.9.2 Wireless Channels 655 10.9.3 Bufferbloat 656 10.9.4 Interaction with Applications 658 Appendix 659 Summary and Takeaways 664 Problems 665 11 Quality-of-Service Guarantees 669 11.1 Introduction 669 11.2 Deterministic Service Guarantees 670 11.2.1 Arrival Curves 673 11.2.2 Service Curves 677 11.2.3 Performance Bounds 681 11.2.4 Regulators 683 11.2.5 Network Calculus 688 11.2.5.1 Single Node Analysis 689 11.2.5.2 End-to-End Analysis 692 11.3 Stochastic Service Guarantees 703 11.3.1 Multiplexing with Marginal Buffer Size 703 11.3.2 Multiplexing with Non-Negligible Buffer Size 711 11.3.3 Effective Bandwidth 714 11.3.3.1 Definition of the Effective Bandwidth 714 11.3.3.2 Properties of the Effective Bandwidth 715 11.3.3.3 Effective Bandwidth of a Markov Source 716 11.3.4 Network Analysis and Dimensioning 721 11.4 Further Readings 727 Appendix 728 Summary and Takeaways 732 Problems 733 A Refresher of Probability, Random Variables, and Stochastic Processes 735 A.1 Probability 735 A.2 Random Variables 737 A.3 Transforms of Probability Distribution Functions 739 A.4 Inequalities and Limit Theorems 744 A.4.1 Markov Inequality 744 A.4.2 Chebychev Inequality 745 A.4.3 Jensen Inequality 746 A.4.4 Chernov Bound 746 A.4.5 Union Bound 747 A.4.6 Central Limit Theorem (CLT) 747 A.5 Stochastic Processes 748 A.6 Markov Chains 749 A.6.1 Classification of States 750 A.6.2 Recurrence 751 A.6.3 Visits to a State 754 A.6.4 Asymptotic Behavior and Steady State 756 A.6.5 Absorbing Markov Chains 762 A.6.6 Continuous-Time Markov Processes 763 A.6.7 Sojourn Times in Process States 765 A.6.8 Reversibility 766 A.6.9 Uniformization 768 A.7 Wiener Process (Brownian Motion) 769 A.7.1 Wiener Process with an Absorbing Barrier 771 A.7.2 Wiener Process with a Reflecting Barrier 772 References 775 Index 789

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to approaches to decoding, synthesizing and modeling pulse width modulation (PWM) converters Origin of Power Converters explores the original converter and provides a systematic examination of the development and modeling of power converters based on decoding and synthesizing approaches. The authorsnoted experts on the topicpresent an introduction to the origins of the converter and detail the fundamentals related to power the converter's evolution. They cover a range of converter synthesis approaches, synthesis of multi-stage/multi-level converters, extension of hard-switching converters to soft-switching ones, and determination of switch-voltage stresses in the converters. In later chapters, this comprehensive resource reviews conventional two-port network theory and the state-space averaged (SSA) modeling approach, from which systematic modeling approaches are based on the graft switch technique. In addition, the book reviews the Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Authors xviii Part I Decoding and Synthesizing 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Power Processing Systems 4 1.2 Non-PWM Converters Versus PWM Converters 7 1.2.1 Non-PWM Converters 7 1.2.2 PWM Power Converters 9 1.3 Well-Known PWM Converters 10 1.4 Approaches to Converter Development 17 1.5 Evolution 25 1.6 About the Text 26 1.6.1 Part I: Decoding and Synthesizing 26 1.6.2 Part II: Modeling and Applications 28 Further Reading 28 2 Discovery of Original Converter 31 2.1 Creation of Original Converter 31 2.1.1 Source–Load Approach 32 2.1.2 Proton–Neutron–Meson Analogy 32 2.1.3 Resonance Approach 33 2.2 Fundamental PWM Converters 34 2.2.1 Voltage Transfer Ratios 35 2.2.2 CCM Operation 36 2.2.3 DCM Operation 38 2.2.4 Inverse Operation 39 2.3 Duality 40 Further Reading 41 3 Fundamentals 43 3.1 DC Voltage and Current Offsetting 43 3.1.1 DC Voltage Offsetting 44 3.1.2 DC Current Offsetting 47 3.2 Capacitor and Inductor Splitting 49 3.3 DC-Voltage Blocking and Pulsating-Voltage Filtering 51 3.4 Magnetic Coupling 55 3.5 DC Transformer 58 3.6 Switch Grafting 62 3.7 Diode Grafting 67 3.8 Layer Scheme 72 Further Reading 74 4 Decoding Process 77 4.1 Transfer Ratios (Codes) 77 4.2 Transfer Code Configurations 82 4.2.1 Cascade Configuration 82 4.2.2 Feedback Configuration 82 4.2.3 Feedforward Configuration 83 4.2.4 Parallel Configuration 85 4.3 Decoding Approaches 86 4.3.1 Factorization 86 4.3.2 Long Division 88 4.3.3 Cross Multiplication 89 4.4 Decoding of Transfer Codes with Multivariables 91 4.5 Decoding with Component-Interconnected Expression 93 Further Reading 94 5 Synthesizing Process with Graft Scheme 95 5.1 Cell Approaches 95 5.1.1 P-Cell and N-Cell 96 5.1.2 Tee Canonical Cell and Pi Canonical Cell 97 5.1.3 Switched-Capacitor Cell and Switched-Inductor Cell 98 5.1.4 Inductor–Capacitor Component Cells 100 5.2 Converter Grafting Scheme 101 5.2.1 Synchronous Switch Operation 101 5.2.2 Grafting Active Switches 103 5.2.3 Grafting Passive Switches 108 5.3 Illustration of Grafting Converters 110 5.3.1 Grafting the Well-Known PWM Converters 110 5.3.1.1 Graft Boost on Buck 111 5.3.1.2 Graft Buck on Boost 112 5.3.1.3 Graft Buck on Buck–Boost 114 5.3.1.4 Graft Boost on Boost–Buck 116 5.3.1.5 Buck in Parallel with Buck–Boost 119 5.3.1.6 Grafting Buck on Buck to Achieve High Step-Down Voltage Conversion 119 5.3.1.7 Grafting Boost on Boost to Achieve High Step-up Voltage Conversion 120 5.3.1.8 Grafting Boost (CCM) on Buck (DCM) 121 5.3.1.9 Cascode Complementary Zeta with Buck 123 5.3.2 Grafting Various Types of Converters 124 5.3.2.1 Grafting Half-Bridge Resonant Inverter on Dither Boost Converter 124 5.3.2.2 Grafting Half-Bridge Resonant Inverter on Bidirectional Flyback Converter 124 5.3.2.3 Grafting Class-E Converter on Boost Converter 125 5.3.3 Integrating Converters with Active and Passive Grafted Switches 127 5.3.3.1 Grafting Buck on Boost with Grafted Diode 128 5.3.3.2 Grafting Half-Bridge Inverter on Interleaved Boost Converters in DCM 128 5.3.3.3 Grafting N-Converters with TGS 130 5.3.3.4 Grafting N-Converters with ΠGS 130 Further Reading 132 6 Synthesizing Process with Layer Scheme 133 6.1 Converter Layering Scheme 133 6.2 Illustration of Layering Converters 135 6.2.1 Buck Family 135 6.2.2 Boost Family 138 6.2.3 Other Converter Examples 142 6.3 Discussion 146 6.3.1 Deduction from Ćuk to Buck–Boost 146 6.3.2 Deduction from Sepic to Buck–Boost 148 6.3.3 Deduction from Zeta to Buck–Boost 149 6.3.4 Deduction from Sepic to Zeta 150 Further Reading 151 7 Converter Derivation with the Fundamentals 153 7.1 Derivation of Buck Converter 153 7.1.1 Synthesizing with Buck–Boost Converter 154 7.1.2 Synthesizing with Ćuk Converter 154 7.2 Derivation of z-Source Converters 154 7.2.1 Voltage-Fed z-Source Converters 155 7.2.1.1 Synthesizing with Sepic Converter 157 7.2.1.2 Synthesizing with Zeta Converter 160 7.2.2 Current-Fed z-Source Converters 161 7.2.2.1 Synthesizing with SEPIC Converter 162 7.2.2.2 Synthesizing with Zeta Converter 162 7.2.3 Quasi-z-Source Converter 162 7.2.3.1 Synthesizing with Sepic Converter 164 7.2.3.2 Synthesizing with Zeta Converter 165 7.3 Derivation of Converters with Switched Inductor or Switched Capacitor 166 7.3.1 Switched-Inductor Converters 167 7.3.1.1 High Step-Down Converter with Transfer Code D/(2 − D) 167 7.3.1.2 High Step-Down Converter with Transfer Code D/(2(1 − D)) 173 7.3.2 Switched-Capacitor Converters 178 7.3.2.1 High Step-Up Converter with Transfer Code (1 + D)/(1 − D) 178 7.3.2.2 High Step-Up Converter with Transfer Code 2D/(1 − D) 181 7.3.2.3 High Step-Up Converter with Transfer Code D/(1 − 2D) 184 7.4 Syntheses of Desired Transfer Codes 185 7.4.1 Synthesis of Transfer Code: D2/(D2 − 3D + 2) 186 7.4.1.1 Synthesizing with Buck–Boost Converter 187 7.4.1.2 Synthesizing with Zeta Converter 188 7.4.1.3 Synthesizing with Ćuk Converter 189 7.4.2 Synthesizing Converters with the Fundamentals 191 7.4.2.1 DC Voltage and DC Current Offsetting 191 7.4.2.2 Inductor and Capacitor Splitting 192 7.4.2.3 DC Voltage Blocking and Filtering 192 7.4.2.4 Magnetic Coupling 193 7.4.2.5 DC Transformer 194 7.4.2.6 Switch and Diode Grafting 195 7.4.2.7 Layer Technique 195 Further Reading 198 8 Synthesis of Multistage and Multilevel Converters 199 8.1 Review of the Original Converter and Its Variations of Transfer Code 199 8.2 Syntheses of Single-Phase Converters 201 8.3 Syntheses of Three-Phase Converters 203 8.4 Syntheses of Multilevel Converters 207 8.5 L–C Networks 210 Further Reading 212 9 Synthesis of Soft-Switching PWM Converters 215 9.1 Soft-Switching Cells 215 9.1.1 Passive Lossless Soft-Switching Cells 216 9.1.1.1 Near-Zero-Current Switching Mechanism 216 9.1.1.2 Near-Zero-Voltage Switching Mechanism 218 9.1.2 Active Lossless Soft-Switching Cells 220 9.1.2.1 Zero-Voltage Switching Mechanism 222 9.1.2.2 Zero-Current Switching Mechanism 226 9.2 Synthesis of Soft-Switching PWM Converters with Graft Scheme 230 9.2.1 Generation of Passive Soft-Switching PWM Converters 230 9.2.2 Generation of Active Soft-Switching PWM Converters 234 9.3 Synthesis of Soft-Switching PWM Converters with Layer Scheme 240 9.3.1 Generation of Passive Soft-Switching PWM Converters 240 9.3.2 Generation of Active Soft-Switching PWM Converters 245 9.4 Discussion 247 Further Reading 251 10 Determination of Switch-Voltage Stresses 255 10.1 Switch-Voltage Stress of the Original Converter 255 10.2 Switch-Voltage Stresses of the Fundamental Converters 257 10.2.1 The Six Well-Known PWM Converters 257 10.2.1.1 Boost Converter 257 10.2.1.2 Buck–Boost Converter 258 10.2.1.3 Ćuk, Sepic, and Zeta Converters 259 10.2.2 z-Source Converters 260 10.2.2.1 Voltage-Fed z-Source Converter 260 10.2.2.2 Current-Fed z-Source Converter 261 10.2.2.3 Quasi-z-Source Converter 262 10.3 Switch-Voltage Stresses of Non-Fundamental Converters 263 10.3.1 High Step-Down Switched-Inductor Converter 263 10.3.2 High Step-Down/Step-Up Switched-Inductor Converter 264 10.3.3 Compound Step-Down/Step-Up Switched-Capacitor Converter 265 10.3.4 High Step-Down Converter with Transfer Ratio of D2 267 10.3.5 High Step-Up Converter with Transfer Ratio of 1/(1 − D)2 268 Further Reading 270 11 Discussion and Conclusion 271 11.1 Will Identical Transfer Code Yield the Same Converter Topology? 271 11.2 Topological Duality Versus Circuital Duality 274 11.3 Graft and Layer Schemes for Synthesizing New Fundamental Converters 277 11.3.1 Synthesis of Buck–Boost Converter 278 11.3.2 Synthesis of Boost–Buck (Ćuk) Converter 279 11.3.3 Synthesis of Buck–Boost–Buck (Zeta) Converter 280 11.3.4 Synthesis of Boost–Buck–Boost (Sepic) Converter 282 11.3.5 Synthesis of Buck-Family Converters with Layer Scheme 284 11.3.6 Synthesis of Boost-Family Converters with Layer Scheme 286 11.4 Analogy of Power Converters to DNA 289 11.4.1 Replication 291 11.4.2 Mutation 291 11.5 Conclusions 295 Further Reading 296 Part II Modeling and Application 299 12 Modeling of PWM DC/DC Converters 301 12.1 Generic Modeling of the Original Converter 302 12.2 Series-Shunt and Shunt-Series Pairs 303 12.3 Two-Port Network 308 12.4 Small-Signal Modeling of the Converters Based on Layer Scheme 315 12.5 Quasi-Resonant Converters 323 Further Reading 326 13 Modeling of PWM DC/DC Converters Using the Graft Scheme 329 13.1 Cascade Family 330 13.2 Small-Signal Models of Buck-Boost and Ćuk Converters Operated in CCM 332 13.2.1 Buck-Boost Converter 336 13.2.2 Boost-Buck Converter 338 13.3 Small-Signal Models of Zeta and Sepic Operated in CCM 340 13.3.1 Zeta Converter 344 13.3.2 Sepic Converter 346 Further Reading 349 14 Modeling of Isolated Single-Stage Converters with High Power Factor and Fast Regulation 351 14.1 Generation of Single-Stage Converters with High Power Factor and Fast Regulation 352 14.2 Small-Signal Models of General Converter Forms Operated in CCM/DCM 355 14.3 An Illustration Example 361 Further Reading 365 15 Analysis and Design of an Isolated Single-Stage Converter Achieving Power Factor Correction and Fast Regulation 367 15.1 Derivation of the Single-Stage Converter 368 15.1.1 Selection of Individual Semi-Stages 369 15.1.2 Derivation of the Discussed Isolated Single-Stage Converter 369 15.2 Analysis of the Isolated Single-Stage Converter Operated in DCM + DCM 369 15.2.1 Buck-Boost Power Factor Corrector 370 15.2.2 Flyback Regulator 372 15.3 Design of a Peak Current Mode Controller for the ISSC 373 15.4 Practical Consideration and Design Procedure 377 15.4.1 Component Stress 377 15.4.2 Snubber Circuit 378 15.4.3 Design Procedure 379 15.5 Hardware Measurements 380 15.6 Design of an H∞ Robust Controller for the ISSC 382 15.6.1 H∞ Control 382 15.6.2 An Illustration Example of Robust Control and Hardware Measurements 386 Further Reading 392 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystem Safety for the 21st Century Explore an authoritative and complete exploration of basic and advanced concepts in system safety engineering The Second Edition of System Safety for the 21st Century delivers an authoritative primer on the identification, evaluation, analysis, and control of hazards to people, components, sub-systems, systems, processes, and facilities. The book offers readers a complete discussion on techniques within system safety, the discipline on process safety, as well as a comprehensive treatment on professionalism within the safety industry. This new edition applies the concepts of system safety to medical disciplines and medical devices, offering readers the potential to have a significantly positive impact on the standing of American medical safety in the world. The latest edition also includes: A brand-new chapter on the risk management with current international and U.S. government standards Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii About The Companion Website xix Part I Introduction to System Safety 1 1. The History of System Safety 3 The 1960s—Mil-Std-882, DoD, and Nasa 4 The 1970s—The Management Oversight and Risk Tree 4 The 1980s—Facility System Safety 5 The 1990s—Risk-Based Process System Safety 6 The 2000s—Quest for Intrinsic Safety 6 The 2010s—Risk Management Integration 7 The 2020s—Improvements and International Approach to Risk Maturing 7 Review Questions 8 Bibliography 8 2. Fundamentals of System Safety 9 Basic Definitions 9 Fundamental Safety Concepts 9 System Safety Fundamentals 13 System Safety Tenets 18 Review Questions 19 Bibliography 19 3. Current Approaches to System Safety 21 Department of Defense 21 Nasa 26 Facility System Safety 28 The Chemical Industry 31 Department of Energy 32 Review Questions 34 Bibliography 35 4. Problem Areas 37 Standardization 38 Risk Assessment Codes 39 Data 40 Communications 40 Life Cycle 41 Education and Training 41 Human Factors 41 Software 42 Review Questions 42 Bibliography 42 5. The Future of System Safety 43 More First-Time Safe Systems 43 Cost-Effective Management Tools 43 The Face of System Safety 44 Proactive or Reactive? 47 Review Questions 47 Bibliography 47 Part II System Safety Program Planning and Management 49 6. Establishing the Groundwork 51 Generic Model 51 Product Safety 51 Dual Programs 52 Planning and Development Methodology 52 Review Questions 53 7. Tasks 55 Hazard Identification 56 Hazard Analysis and Control 58 System Safety Support Tasks 60 Review Questions 61 8. System Safety Products 63 System Safety Program Plan 63 Preliminary Hazard List 64 Preliminary Hazard Analysis 66 Hazard Tracking Log 67 Subsystem Hazard Analysis 68 System Hazard Analysis 71 Operating Hazard Analysis 72 Change Analysis Report 73 Accident Analysis Report 74 Review Questions 75 9. Program Implementation 77 Steps 77 Review Questions 88 Table of Contents vii 10. Risk Management 89 Introduction 89 Types of Risk 89 Risk Management 90 Review Questions 96 Bibliography 96 Part Iii Analytical Aids 101 11. Analytical Trees 103 Purposes 104 Tree Construction 105 Fault Trees Versus Fault Tree Analysis 110 Review Questions 115 Bibliography 115 12. Risk Assessment and Risk Acceptance 117 Risk Management Concepts 117 Risk Assessment Shortcomings 123 Total Risk Exposure Codes 124 Review Questions 126 Bibliography 126 13. Human Factors 127 Human Reliability 127 Human Error Rates 129 Improving Human Reliability 130 Human Factors for Engineering Design 132 Review Questions 135 Bibliography 135 Part IV System Safety Analysis Techniques 137 14. Energy Trace and Barrier Analysis 139 Purpose of ETBA 139 Input Requirements 139 General Approach 140 Instructions 140 Review Questions 142 Bibliography 142 15. Failure Mode and Effects Analysis 143 Purpose of FMEA 144 Input Requirements 144 General Approach 144 Instructions 144 Appendix: Sample FMEA 147 Summary 147 Project Description 147 Methodology 149 Review Questions 152 Bibliography 152 16. Fault Tree Analysis 155 Purpose of FTA 155 Input Requirements 156 General Approach 156 Instructions 157 Appendix: Sample FTA 165 Summary 165 Project Description 166 Methodology 167 Review Questions 171 Bibliography 171 17. Project Evaluation Tree 173 Purpose of PET 174 Input Requirements 174 General Approach 174 Instructions 175 Appendix: PET User’s Guide 179 Review Questions 188 Bibliography 188 18. Change Analysis 189 Purpose 189 Input Requirements 190 General Approach 190 Instructions 190 Review Questions 193 Bibliography 193 19. Management Oversight and Risk Tree 195 Purpose of Mort and Mini-Mort 197 Input Requirements 198 General Approach 198 Instructions 205 Review Questions 221 Bibliography 221 20. Event and Causal Factors Charts 223 Purpose 223 Input Requirements 223 General Approach 224 Instructions 224 Review Questions 228 Bibliography 228 21. Other Analytical Techniques 229 Software Hazard Analysis 229 Common Cause Failure Analysis 229 Sneak Circuit Analysis 230 Extreme Value Projection 231 Time-Loss Analysis 235 Additional Techniques 237 Review Questions 238 Bibliography 238 Part V Process Safety 241 22. Process Safety Management 243 Introduction 243 Background 243 Future 248 Summary 249 Review Questions 249 Bibliography 249 Appendix: List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics and Reactives 250 23. EPA’s Equivalent Process Safety Requirements—Risk Management Program (RMP) 255 Background 255 Overall Risk Management Program 255 Summary 259 Review Questions 260 Bibliography 260 Appendix: Substances Listed Under 40 CFR 68 261 24. Process Safety Implementation 263 Introduction 263 PSM Implementation 263 RMP Implementation 270 Implementation Lessons 271 Summary 272 Review Questions 272 Bibliography 273 25. Process Safety Reviews 275 Introduction 275 Mechanics of an Individual Audit 277 Lessons 279 Summary 281 Review Questions 281 Bibliography 281 Part VI System Safety Applied To The Medical Field 283 26. Medical Devices and Equipment 285 Introduction 285 Purpose 285 System Safety Review 285 System Safety Application to Medical Devices 286 System Safety Interface with Medical Devices 288 Considerations for Improvement 289 Conclusions 291 Review Questions 292 Bibliography 292 Appendix 293 27. Infection Control 295 Introduction 295 The Problem 296 What’s Being Done 296 System Safety Considerations 298 Further Improvements 298 System Safety Application 301 Cronavirus 303 Review Questions 304 Bibliography 305 28. Hospitals 307 Introduction 307 Challenges Faced 308 System Safety Application 312 Case Study Hypothetical System Safety Application to a Hospital 315 Anticipating the Future 318 Review Questions 319 Bibliography 319 29. Future Considerations 321 Introduction 321 Definitions 321 Health Care Future Discussion Areas 322 Research and Development 326 System Safety Application to Medical Care in the Future 327 Other Thoughts 329 Conclusions 330 Review Questions 331 Bibliography 331 Part VII Professionalism and Professional Development 333 30. Professionalism and Professional Development 335 Introduction 335 What is Professionalism? 335 Professional Development 337 Accreditation of Certifications 337 Why Become Certified? 339 Summary 341 Review Questions 342 Bibliography 342 Appendices 343 Appendix I: The Scope and Functions of the Professional Safety Position 343 Appendix II: International System Safety Society Fundamental Principles and Canons 347 Appendix III: Professional System Safety and Related Societies and Organizations 351 Glossary 357 Acronyms 365 Bibliography 369 Further Reading 373 About The Author 375 Book Contributor 377 Book Back Cover 379 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisTrade ReviewReview of the fifth edition by Thomas B. Sheridan, Ford Professor Emeritus of Engineering and Applied Psychology, MassachusettsInstitute of TechnologyThe fifth edition of the Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics is the most authoritative and comprehensive reference work in the field.Review of the fourth edition and comment on the fifth edition by Donald A. Norman, Director and Co-Founder, University of California, San Diego Design Lab.I’m often asked for reading suggestions, especially for references to the literature on Human Factors and Ergonomics. In the past few months, I have been reading chapters of one book that has it all: Gavriel Salvendy’s massive tome, the Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics. The articles are all excellent. They all reflect up-to-date reviews of the areas they cover. They are wonderful self-study material, wonderful references, and would make excellent material in multiple courses. Consider it as essential piece of professional equipment. If you don’t know human factors, this is a great way to find the parts relevant to your work. And even if you are an expert, this book will be valuable because it is unlikely that you are expert at all the topics covered here, yet very likely you will need some of the ones you are not (yet) expert at. I follow my own advice. I consider myself an expert (I am a Fellow of the Human Factors Society), but I still learn each time I read from these pages. The 5th edition has new – and very important – chapters written by the authorities in each topic. It has kept up with the times and become even more valuable as both a text and a reference.From the Foreword to the second edition by John F. Smith, Jr., Chairman of the Board, Chief Executive Officer andPresident, General Motors CorporationThe publication of this second Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics is very timely. It is a comprehensive guide that contains practical knowledge and technical background on virtually all aspects of physical, cognitive, and social ergonomics. As such, it can be a valuable source of information for any individual or organization committed to providing competitive, high-quality products and safe, productive work environments.From the Foreword to the first edition by E. M. Estes, Retired President, General Motors CorporationRegardless of what phase of the economy a person is involved in, this handbook is a very useful tool. Every area of human factors from environmental conditions and motivation to the use of new communications systems, robotics, and business systems is well covered in the handbook by experts in every field.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors ix Contributors xi Foreword xxi Preface xxiii 1. Human Factors Function 1 1. The Discipline of Human Factors and Ergonomics 3Waldemar Karwowski and Wei Zhang 2. Human Systems Integration and Design 38Guy A. Boy 2. Human Factors Fundamentals 55 3. Sensation and Perception 57Robert W. Proctor and Janet D. Proctor 4. Selection and Control of Action 91Robert W. Proctor and Kim-Phuong L. Vu 5. Information Processing 114Christopher D. Wickens and C. Melody Carswell 6. Decision-Making Models, Decision Support, and Problem Solving 159Mark R. Lehto and Gaurav Nanda 7. Mental Workload 203G.M. Hancock, L. Longo, M.S. Young, and P.A. Hancock 8. Social and Organizational Foundation of Ergonomics: Multi-Level Systems Approaches 227Pascale Carayon 9. Emotional Design 236Feng Zhou, Yangjian Ji, and Roger Jianxin Jiao 10. Cross-Cultural Design 252Tom Plocher, Pei-Luen Patrick Rau, Yee-Yin Choong, and Zhi Guo 3. Design of Equipment, Tasks, Jobs, and Environments 281 11. Three-Dimensional (3D) Anthropometry and Its Applications in Product Design 283Liang Ma and Jianwei Niu 12. Basic Biomechanics and Workplace Design 303William S. Marras and Waldemar Karwowski 13. The Changing Nature of Task Analysis 358Erik Hollnagel 14. Workplace Design 368Nicolas Marmaras and Dimitris Nathanael 15. Job and Team Design 383Frederick P. Morgeson and Michael A. Campion 16. Design, Delivery, Evaluation, and Transfer of Effective Training Systems 414Tiffany M. Bisbey, Rebecca Grossman, Kareem Panton, Chris W. Coultas, and Eduardo Salas 17. Situation Awareness 434Mica R. Endsley 4. Design for Health, Safety, and Comfort 457 18. Sound and Noise: Measurement and Design Guidance 459John G. Casali 19. Vibration and Motion 494Neil J. Mansfield and Michael J. Griffin 20. Human Errors and Human Reliability 514Peng Liu, Renyou Zhang, Zijian Yin, and Zhizhong Li 21. Occupational Safety and Health Management 573Jeanne Mager Stellman, Sonalee Rau, and Pratik Thaker 22. Managing low-Back Disorder Risk in the Workplace 597William S. Marras and Waldemar Karwowski 23. Manual Materials Handling: Evaluation and Practical Considerations 630Fadi A. Fathallah and Ira Janowitz 24. Warnings and Hazard Communications 644Michael S. Wogalter, Christopher B. Mayhorn, and Kenneth R. Laughery, Sr. 25. Use of Personal Protective Equipment 668Grażyna Bartkowiak, Krzysztof Baszczyński, Anna Bogdan, Agnieszka Brochocka, Anna Dąbrowska, Rafał Hrynyk, Emilia Irzmańska, Danuta Koradecka, Emil Kozłowski, Katarzyna Majchrzycka, Krzysztof Makowski, Anna Marszałek, Magdalena Młynarczyk, Rafał Młyński, Grzegorz Owczarek, and Janżera 5. Human Performance Modeling 685 26. Mathematical Modeling in Human–Machine System Design and Evaluation 687Changxu Wu and Yili Liu 27. Modeling and Simulation of Human Systems 704Gunther E. Paul 28. Human Supervisory Control of Automation 736Thomas B. Sheridan 29. Digital Human Modeling in Design 761Vincent G. Duffy 30. Extended Reality (XR) Environments 782Kay M. Stanney, Hannah Nye, Sam Haddad, Kelly S. Hale, Christina K. Padron, and Joseph V. Cohn 31. Neuroergonomics 816Hasan Ayaz and Frédéric Dehais 6. System Evaluation 843 32. Accident and Incident Investigation 845Patrick G. Dempsey 33. Human Factors and Ergonomics Audits 853Colin G. Drury and Patrick G. Dempsey 34. Cost/Benefit Analysis for Human Systems Investments 880William B. Rouse and Dennis K. McBride 7. Human–Computer Interaction 893 35. Data Visualization 895Sumanta N. Pattanaik and R. Paul Wiegand 36. Representation Design 947John M. Flach, Kevin B. Bennett, Jonathan W. Butler, and Michael A. Heroux 37. Collecting and Analyzing User Insights 960Matthias Peissner, Kathrin Pollmann, and Nora Fronemann 38. Usability and User Experience: Design and Evaluation 972James R. Lewis and Jeff Sauro 39. Website Design and Evaluation 1016Kim-Phuong L. Vu, Robert W. Proctor, and Ya-Hsin Hung 40. Mobile Systems Design and Evaluation 1037June Wei and Siyi Dong 41. Human Factors in Ambient Intelligence Environments 1058Constantine Stephanidis, Margherita Antona, and Stavroula Ntoa 42. Human-Centered Design of Artificial Intelligence 1085George Margetis, Stavroula Ntoa, Margherita Antona, and Constantine Stephanidis 43. Cybersecurity, Privacy, and Trust 1107Abbas Moallem 44. Human–Robot Interaction 1121Jessie Y.C. Chen and Michael J. Barnes 45. Human Factors in Social Media 1143Qin Gao and Yue Chen 8. Design for Individual Differences 1187 46. Design for All in Digital Technologies 1189Constantine Stephanidis 47. Design for People Experiencing Functional Limitations 1216Gregg C. Vanderheiden, J. Bern Jordan, and Jonathan Lazar 48. Design for Aging 1249Jia Zhou and Qin Gao 49. Design of Digital Technologies for Children 1287Panos Markopoulos, Janet C. Read, and Michail Giannakos 9. Selected Applications 1305 50. Human Factors and Ergonomics Standards 1307Waldemar Karwowski, Redha Taiar, David Rodrick, Bohdana Sherehiy, and Robert R. Fox 51. Data Analytics in Human Factors 1351Matt Holman, Guy Walker, Melissa Bedinger, Annie Visser-Quinn, Kerri McClymont, Lindsay Beevers, and Terry Lansdown 52. Human Factors and Ergonomics in Design of A3: Automation, Autonomy, and Artificial Intelligence 1385Ben D. Sawyer, Dave B. Miller, Matthew Canham, and Waldemar Karwowski 53. Human Factors and Ergonomics in Health Care 1417Pascale Carayon, Kathryn Wust, Bat-Zion Hose, and Megan E. Salwei 54. Human Factors and Ergonomics in Digital Manufacturing 1438Dieter Spath and Martin Braun 55. Human Factors and Ergonomics in Aviation 1460Steven J. Landry 56. Human Side of Space Exploration and Habitation 1480Kevin R. Duda, Dava J. Newman, Joanna Zhang, Nicolas Meirhaeghe, and H. Larissa Zhou 57. Human Factors and Ergonomics for Sustainability 1512Klaus Fischer, Andrew Thatcher, and Klaus J. Zink Index 1529

Read more less

Book SynopsisMusculoskeletal Disorders Hands-on guidance and tools for the prevention of musculoskeletal injuries in the workplace In Musculoskeletal Disorders: The Fatigue Failure Mechanism, a team of accomplished occupational health experts delivers an essential and incisive discussion of how musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) develop and progress, as well as how they can be prevented and controlled. Offering a novel, evidence-based approach to this costly problem, the book has broad implications for employers, insurers, and other stakeholders in workplace health and safety. The authors identify new risk assessment approaches based on the cumulative effects of exposure to highly variable loading conditions. These new approaches can also be applied to evaluate the efficacy of job rotation scenarios and to quantify exoskeleton efficacy. The complexities associated with fatigue failure in biological environments are also explored in addition to suggested models for underTable of ContentsPreface Acknowledgements Author the Editors 1. Introduction 2. Common Musculoskeletal Disorders 3. Structure and Function of The Musculoskeletal System 4. Structure and Function of the Nervous System, and Its Relation to Pain 5. Fundamental Biomechanics Concepts 6. Material Properties of Musculoskeletal and Peripheral Nerve Tissues 7. Fatigue Failure of Musculoskeletal Tissues 8. MSDs as a fatigue failure process 9. Fundamentals of Fatigue Failure Analysis 10. Fatigue failure in a biological environment 11. Injury and Self-Repair of Musculoskeletal Tissues 12. Personal Characteristics and MSD Risk 13. Using Fatigue Failure Principles to Assess MSD Risk 14. Implications for MSD Prevention 15. Optimizing Musculoskeletal Health 16. Status of knowledge and unanswered questions Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisDEEP LEARNING FOR THE EARTH SCIENCES Explore this insightful treatment of deep learning in the field of earth sciences, from four leading voices Deep learning is a fundamental technique in modern Artificial Intelligence and is being applied to disciplines across the scientific spectrum; earth science is no exception. Yet, the link between deep learning and Earth sciences has only recently entered academic curricula and thus has not yet proliferated. Deep Learning for the Earth Sciences delivers a unique perspective and treatment of the concepts, skills, and practices necessary to quickly become familiar with the application of deep learning techniques to the Earth sciences. The book prepares readers to be ready to use the technologies and principles described in their own research. The distinguished editors have also included resources that explain and provide new ideas and recommendations for new research especially useful to those involved in advanced research Table of ContentsForeword xvi by Vipin Kumar, Regents Professor, University of Minnesota Acknowledgments xvii List of Contributors xviii List of Acronyms xxiv 1 Introduction 1 Gustau Camps-Valls, Xiao Xiang Zhu, Devis Tuia, and Markus Reichstein 1.1 A Taxonomy of Deep Learning Approaches 2 1.2 Deep Learning in Remote Sensing 3 1.3 Deep Learning in Geosciences and Climate 7 1.4 Book Structure and Roadmap 9 Part I Deep Learning to Extract Information from Remote Sensing Images 13 2 Learning Unsupervised Feature Representations of Remote Sensing Data with Sparse Convolutional Networks 15 Jose E. Adsuara, Manuel Campos-Taberner, Javier García-Haro, Carlo Gatta, Adriana Romero, and Gustau Camps-Valls 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Sparse Unsupervised Convolutional Networks 17 2.2.1 Sparsity as the Guiding Criterion 17 2.2.2 The EPLS Algorithm 18 2.2.3 Remarks 18 2.3 Applications 19 2.3.1 Hyperspectral Image Classification 19 2.3.2 Multisensor Image Fusion 21 2.4 Conclusions 22 3 Generative Adversarial Networks in the Geosciences 24 Gonzalo Mateo-García, Valero Laparra, Christian Requena-Mesa, and Luis Gómez-Chova 3.1 Introduction 24 3.2 Generative Adversarial Networks 25 3.2.1 Unsupervised GANs 25 3.2.2 Conditional GANs 26 3.2.3 Cycle-consistent GANs 27 3.3 GANs in Remote Sensing and Geosciences 28 3.3.1 GANs in Earth Observation 28 3.3.2 Conditional GANs in Earth Observation 30 3.3.3 CycleGANs in Earth Observation 30 3.4 Applications of GANs in Earth Observation 31 3.4.1 Domain Adaptation Across Satellites 31 3.4.2 Learning to Emulate Earth Systems from Observations 33 3.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 36 4 Deep Self-taught Learning in Remote Sensing 37 Ribana Roscher 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 Sparse Representation 38 4.2.1 Dictionary Learning 39 4.2.2 Self-taught Learning 40 4.3 Deep Self-taught Learning 40 4.3.1 Application Example 43 4.3.2 Relation to Deep Neural Networks 44 4.4 Conclusion 45 5 Deep Learning-based Semantic Segmentation in Remote Sensing 46 Devis Tuia, Diego Marcos, Konrad Schindler, and Bertrand Le Saux 5.1 Introduction 46 5.2 Literature Review 47 5.3 Basics on Deep Semantic Segmentation: Computer Vision Models 49 5.3.1 Architectures for Image Data 49 5.3.2 Architectures for Point-clouds 52 5.4 Selected Examples 55 5.4.1 Encoding Invariances to Train Smaller Models: The example of Rotation 55 5.4.2 Processing 3D Point Clouds as a Bundle of Images: SnapNet 59 5.4.3 Lake Ice Detection from Earth and from Space 62 5.5 Concluding Remarks 66 6 Object Detection in Remote Sensing 67 Jian Ding, Jinwang Wang, Wen Yang, and Gui-Song Xia 6.1 Introduction 67 6.1.1 Problem Description 67 6.1.2 Problem Settings of Object Detection 69 6.1.3 Object Representation in Remote Sensing 69 6.1.4 Evaluation Metrics 69 6.1.4.1 Precision-Recall Curve 70 6.1.4.2 Average Precision and Mean Average Precision 71 6.1.5 Applications 71 6.2 Preliminaries on Object Detection with Deep Models 72 6.2.1 Two-stage Algorithms 72 6.2.1.1 R-CNNs 72 6.2.1.2 R-fcn 73 6.2.2 One-stage Algorithms 73 6.2.2.1 Yolo 73 6.2.2.2 Ssd 73 6.3 Object Detection in Optical RS Images 75 6.3.1 Related Works 75 6.3.1.1 Scale Variance 75 6.3.1.2 Orientation Variance 75 6.3.1.3 Oriented Object Detection 75 6.3.1.4 Detecting in Large-size Images 76 6.3.2 Datasets and Benchmark 77 6.3.2.1 Dota 77 6.3.2.2 VisDrone 77 6.3.2.3 Dior 77 6.3.2.4 xView 77 6.3.3 Two Representative Object Detectors in Optical RS Images 78 6.3.3.1 Mask OBB 78 6.3.3.2 RoI Transformer 82 6.4 Object Detection in SAR Images 86 6.4.1 Challenges of Detection in SAR Images 86 6.4.2 Related Works 86 6.4.3 Datasets and Benchmarks 88 6.5 Conclusion 89 7 Deep Domain Adaptation in Earth Observation 90 Benjamin Kellenberger, Onur Tasar, Bharath Bhushan Damodaran, Nicolas Courty, and Devis Tuia 7.1 Introduction 90 7.2 Families of Methodologies 91 7.3 Selected Examples 93 7.3.1 Adapting the Inner Representation 93 7.3.2 Adapting the Inputs Distribution 97 7.3.3 Using (few, well chosen) Labels from the Target Domain 100 7.4 Concluding remarks 104 8 Recurrent Neural Networks and the Temporal Component 105 Marco Körner and Marc Rußwurm 8.1 Recurrent Neural Networks 106 8.1.1 Training RNNs 107 8.1.1.1 Exploding and Vanishing Gradients 107 8.1.1.2 Circumventing Exploding and Vanishing Gradients 109 8.2 Gated Variants of RNNs 111 8.2.1 Long Short-term Memory Networks 111 8.2.1.1 The Cell State c t and the Hidden State h t 112 8.2.1.2 The Forget Gate f t 112 8.2.1.3 The Modulation Gate V T and the Input Gate I T 112 8.2.1.4 The Output Gate o t 112 8.2.1.5 Training LSTM Networks 113 8.2.2 Other Gated Variants 113 8.3 Representative Capabilities of Recurrent Networks 114 8.3.1 Recurrent Neural Network Topologies 114 8.3.2 Experiments 115 8.4 Application in Earth Sciences 117 8.5 Conclusion 118 9 Deep Learning for Image Matching and Co-registration 120 Maria Vakalopoulou, Stergios Christodoulidis, Mihir Sahasrabudhe, and Nikos Paragios 9.1 Introduction 120 9.2 Literature Review 123 9.2.1 Classical Approaches 123 9.2.2 Deep Learning Techniques for Image Matching 124 9.2.3 Deep Learning Techniques for Image Registration 125 9.3 Image Registration with Deep Learning 126 9.3.1 2D Linear and Deformable Transformer 126 9.3.2 Network Architectures 127 9.3.3 Optimization Strategy 128 9.3.4 Dataset and Implementation Details 129 9.3.5 Experimental Results 129 9.4 Conclusion and Future Research 134 9.4.1 Challenges and Opportunities 134 9.4.1.1 Dataset with Annotations 134 9.4.1.2 Dimensionality of Data 135 9.4.1.3 Multitemporal Datasets 135 9.4.1.4 Robustness to Changed Areas 135 10 Multisource Remote Sensing Image Fusion 136 Wei He, Danfeng Hong, Giuseppe Scarpa, Tatsumi Uezato, and Naoto Yokoya 10.1 Introduction 136 10.2 Pansharpening 137 10.2.1 Survey of Pansharpening Methods Employing Deep Learning 137 10.2.2 Experimental Results 140 10.2.2.1 Experimental Design 140 10.2.2.2 Visual and Quantitative Comparison in Pansharpening 140 10.3 Multiband Image Fusion 143 10.3.1 Supervised Deep Learning-based Approaches 143 10.3.2 Unsupervised Deep Learning-based Approaches 145 10.3.3 Experimental Results 146 10.3.3.1 Comparison Methods and Evaluation Measures 146 10.3.3.2 Dataset and Experimental Setting 146 10.3.3.3 Quantitative Comparison and Visual Results 147 10.4 Conclusion and Outlook 148 11 Deep Learning for Image Search and Retrieval in Large Remote Sensing Archives 150 Gencer Sumbul, Jian Kang, and Begüm Demir 11.1 Introduction 150 11.2 Deep Learning for RS CBIR 152 11.3 Scalable RS CBIR Based on Deep Hashing 156 11.4 Discussion and Conclusion 159 Acknowledgement 160 Part II Making a Difference in the Geosciences with Deep Learning 161 12 Deep Learning for Detecting Extreme Weather Patterns 163 Mayur Mudigonda, Prabhat Ram, Karthik Kashinath, Evan Racah, Ankur Mahesh, Yunjie Liu, Christopher Beckham, Jim Biard, Thorsten Kurth, Sookyung Kim, Samira Kahou, Tegan Maharaj, Burlen Loring, Christopher Pal, Travis O’Brien, Kenneth E. Kunkel, Michael F. Wehner, and William D. Collins 12.1 Scientific Motivation 163 12.2 Tropical Cyclone and Atmospheric River Classification 166 12.2.1 Methods 166 12.2.2 Network Architecture 167 12.2.3 Results 169 12.3 Detection of Fronts 170 12.3.1 Analytical Approach 170 12.3.2 Dataset 171 12.3.3 Results 172 12.3.4 Limitations 174 12.4 Semi-supervised Classification and Localization of Extreme Events 175 12.4.1 Applications of Semi-supervised Learning in Climate Modeling 175 12.4.1.1 Supervised Architecture 176 12.4.1.2 Semi-supervised Architecture 176 12.4.2 Results 176 12.4.2.1 Frame-wise Reconstruction 176 12.4.2.2 Results and Discussion 178 12.5 Detecting Atmospheric Rivers and Tropical Cyclones Through Segmentation Methods 179 12.5.1 Modeling Approach 179 12.5.1.1 Segmentation Architecture 180 12.5.1.2 Climate Dataset and Labels 181 12.5.2 Architecture Innovations: Weighted Loss and Modified Network 181 12.5.3 Results 183 12.6 Challenges and Implications for the Future 184 12.7 Conclusions 185 13 Spatio-temporal Autoencoders in Weather and Climate Research 186 Xavier-Andoni Tibau, Christian Reimers, Christian Requena-Mesa, and Jakob Runge 13.1 Introduction 186 13.2 Autoencoders 187 13.2.1 A Brief History of Autoencoders 188 13.2.2 Archetypes of Autoencoders 189 13.2.3 Variational Autoencoders (VAE) 191 13.2.4 Comparison Between Autoencoders and Classical Methods 192 13.3 Applications 193 13.3.1 Use of the Latent Space 193 13.3.1.1 Reduction of Dimensionality for the Understanding of the System Dynamics and its Interactions 195 13.3.1.2 Dimensionality Reduction for Feature Extraction and Prediction 199 13.3.2 Use of the Decoder 199 13.3.2.1 As a Random Sample Generator 201 13.3.2.2 Anomaly Detection 201 13.3.2.3 Use of a Denoising Autoencoder (DAE) Decoder 202 13.4 Conclusions and Outlook 203 14 Deep Learning to Improve Weather Predictions 204 Peter D. Dueben, Peter Bauer, and Samantha Adams 14.1 Numerical Weather Prediction 204 14.2 How Will Machine Learning Enhance Weather Predictions? 207 14.3 Machine Learning Across the Workflow of Weather Prediction 208 14.4 Challenges for the Application of ML in Weather Forecasts 213 14.5 The Way Forward 216 15 Deep Learning and the Weather Forecasting Problem: Precipitation Nowcasting 218 Zhihan Gao, Xingjian Shi, Hao Wang, Dit-Yan Yeung, Wang-chun Woo, and Wai-Kin Wong 15.1 Introduction 218 15.2 Formulation 220 15.3 Learning Strategies 221 15.4 Models 223 15.4.1 FNN-based Odels 223 15.4.2 RNN-based Models 225 15.4.3 Encoder-forecaster Structure 226 15.4.4 Convolutional LSTM 226 15.4.5 ConvLSTM with Star-shaped Bridge 227 15.4.6 Predictive RNN 228 15.4.7 Memory in Memory Network 229 15.4.8 Trajectory GRU 231 15.5 Benchmark 233 15.5.1 HKO-7 Dataset 234 15.5.2 Evaluation Methodology 234 15.5.3 Evaluated Algorithms 235 15.5.4 Evaluation Results 236 15.6 Discussion 236 Appendix 238 Acknowledgement 239 16 Deep Learning for High-dimensional Parameter Retrieval 240 David Malmgren-Hansen 16.1 Introduction 240 16.2 Deep Learning Parameter Retrieval Literature 242 16.2.1 Land 242 16.2.2 Ocean 243 16.2.3 Cryosphere 244 16.2.4 Global Weather Models 244 16.3 The Challenge of High-dimensional Problems 244 16.3.1 Computational Load of CNNs 247 16.3.2 Mean Square Error or Cross-entropy Optimization? 249 16.4 Applications and Examples 250 16.4.1 Utilizing High-Dimensional Spatio-spectral Information with CNNs 250 16.4.2 The Effect of Loss Functions in Retrieval of Sea Ice Concentrations 253 16.5 Conclusion 257 17 A Review of Deep Learning for Cryospheric Studies 258 Lin Liu 17.1 Introduction 258 17.2 Deep-learning-based Remote Sensing Studies of the Cryosphere 260 17.2.1 Glaciers 260 17.2.2 Ice Sheet 261 17.2.3 Snow 262 17.2.4 Permafrost 263 17.2.5 Sea Ice 264 17.2.6 River Ice 265 17.3 Deep-learning-based Modeling of the Cryosphere 265 17.4 Summary and Prospect 266 Appendix: List of Data and Codes 267 18 Emulating Ecological Memory with Recurrent Neural Networks 269 Basil Kraft, Simon Besnard, and Sujan Koirala 18.1 Ecological Memory Effects: Concepts and Relevance 269 18.2 Data-driven Approaches for Ecological memory Effects 270 18.2.1 A Brief Overview of Memory Effects 270 18.2.2 Data-driven Methods for Memory Effects 271 18.3 Case Study: Emulating a Physical Model Using Recurrent Neural Networks 272 18.3.1 Physical Model Simulation Data 272 18.3.2 Experimental Design 273 18.3.3 RNN Setup and Training 274 18.4 Results and Discussion 276 18.4.1 The Predictive Capability Across Scales 276 18.4.2 Prediction of Seasonal Dynamics 279 18.5 Conclusions 281 Part III Linking Physics and Deep Learning Models 283 19 Applications of Deep Learning in Hydrology 285 Chaopeng Shen and Kathryn Lawson 19.1 Introduction 285 19.2 Deep Learning Applications in Hydrology 286 19.2.1 Dynamical System Modeling 286 19.2.1.1 Large-scale Hydrologic Modeling with Big Data 286 19.2.1.2 Data-limited LSTM Applications 290 19.2.2 Physics-constrained Hydrologic Machine Learning 292 19.2.3 Information Retrieval for Hydrology 293 19.2.4 Physically-informed Machine Learning for Subsurface Flow and Reactive Transport Modeling 294 19.2.5 Additional Observations 296 19.3 Current Limitations and Outlook 296 20 Deep Learning of Unresolved Turbulent Ocean Processes in Climate Models 298 Laure Zanna and Thomas Bolton 20.1 Introduction 298 20.2 The Parameterization Problem 299 20.3 Deep Learning Parameterizations of Subgrid Ocean Processes 300 20.3.1 Why DL for Subgrid Parameterizations? 300 20.3.2 Recent Advances in DL for Subgrid Parameterizations 300 20.4 Physics-aware Deep Learning 301 20.5 Further Challenges ahead for Deep Learning Parameterizations 303 21 Deep Learning for the Parametrization of Subgrid Processes in Climate Models 307 Pierre Gentine, Veronika Eyring, and Tom Beucler 21.1 Introduction 307 21.2 Deep Neural Networks for Moist Convection (Deep Clouds) Parametrization 309 21.3 Physical Constraints and Generalization 312 21.4 Future Challenges 314 22 Using Deep Learning to Correct Theoretically-derived Models 315 PeterA.G.Watson 22.1 Experiments with the Lorenz ’96 System 317 22.1.1 The Lorenz’96 Equations and Coarse-scale Models 318 22.1.1.1 Theoretically-derived Coarse-scale Model 318 22.1.1.2 Models with ANNs 319 22.1.2 Results 320 22.1.2.1 Single-timestep Tendency Prediction Errors 320 22.1.2.2 Forecast and Climate Prediction Skill 321 22.1.3 Testing Seamless Prediction 324 22.2 Discussion and Outlook 324 22.2.1 Towards Earth System Modeling 325 22.2.2 Application to Climate Change Studies 326 22.3 Conclusion 327 23 Outlook 328 Markus Reichstein, Gustau Camps-Valls, Devis Tuia, and Xiao Xiang Zhu Bibliography 331 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisMANAGEMENT OF DATA CENTER NETWORKS Discover state-of-the-art developments in DCNs from leading international voices in the fieldIn Management of Data Center Networks, accomplished researcher and editor Dr. Nadjib Aitsaadi delivers a rigorous and insightful exploration of the network management challenges that present within intra- and inter-data center networks, including reliability, routing, and security. The book also discusses new architectures found in data center networks that aim to minimize the complexity of network management while maximizing Quality of Service, like Wireless/Wired DCNs, server-only DCNs, and more. As DCNs become increasingly popular with the spread of cloud computing and multimedia social networks employing new transmission technologies like 5G wireless and wireless fiber, the editor provides readers with chapters written by world-leading authors on topics like routing, the reliability of inter-data center networks, energy management, and security. The boTable of ContentsAbout the Editor xi Contributors xiii Acronyms xv Introduction xvii 1 Architectures of Data Center Networks: Overview 1Boutheina Dab, Ilhem Fajjari, Dallal Belabed, and Nadjib Aitsaadi 1.1 Taxonomy of DCN Architectures 1 1.1.1 Classification of DCN Architectures 2 1.1.2 Switch-Centric DCN Architectures Overview 3 1.1.2.1 Tree-Based DCN 3 1.1.2.2 Hierarchical DCN Architecture 4 1.1.2.3 Flat DCN Architecture 6 1.1.3 Server-Centric DCN Architectures Overview 7 1.1.4 Enhanced DCN Architectures Overview 10 1.1.4.1 Optical DCN Architecture 10 1.1.4.2 Wireless DCN Architecture 12 1.2 Comparison Between DCN Architectures 15 1.3 Proposed HDCN Architecture 15 1.3.1 HDCN Architecture Based on MSDC Model 19 1.3.1.1 ECMP Protocol 19 1.3.2 60GHz Technology in HDCN 20 1.3.3 Beamforming Technique in HDCN 21 1.4 Conclusion 23 References 23 2 Data Center Optimization Techniques 29Dallal Belabed 2.1 Ethernet Switching and Routing 29 2.2 Data Center Optimization Techniques 38 2.2.1 Virtual Network Embedding 38 2.2.2 Server Consolidation 40 2.2.3 Traffic Engineering 43 2.2.3.1 Link-State Traffic Engineering 44 2.2.3.2 MPLS Traffic Engineering 44 2.2.3.3 TCP Proportional Fairness Model 46 2.3 Conclusion 49 Bibliography 51 3 Resource Management in Hybrid (Wired/Wireless) Data Center Networks 57Boutheina Dab, Ilhem Fajjari, and Nadjib Aitsaadi 3.1 Routing and Wireless Channel Allocation Problematic in HDCN 58 3.1.1 Routing and Wireless Channel Assignment Challenges in HDCN 59 3.1.2 Routing and Wireless Channel Assignment Criteria in HDCN 61 3.2 Wireless Channel Allocation Strategies for One-Hop Communications in HDCN 62 3.2.1 Channel Allocation Problem in Wireless Networks 63 3.2.2 Omni-Directional Antennas Based Strategies 63 3.2.3 Beamforming-Based Strategies 67 3.3 Online Joint Routing and Wireless Channel Allocation Strategies in HDCN 69 3.3.1 Joint Routing and Channel Assignment in Mesh Networks 70 3.3.2 Online Joint Routing and Channel Assignment Strategies in HDCN 71 3.4 Joint Batch Routing and Channel Allocation Strategies in HDCN 75 3.5 Joint Batch Routing and Channel Allocation Strategies in HDCN 75 3.6 Summary 77 3.7 Conclusion 80 References 80 4 Inter-Data Center Networks: Routing and Reliability in Virtual Network Backbone 85Oussama Soualah, Ilhem Fajjari, and Nadjib Aitsaadi 4.1 Overview of Basic Virtual Network Embedding Without Reliability Constraint 85 4.1.1 Online Approaches 86 4.1.2 Batch Approaches 87 4.2 Overview of Virtual Network Embedding with Reliability Constraint 89 4.2.1 Distributed Approaches 89 4.2.2 Centralized Approaches 91 4.2.2.1 Substrate Router Failures 91 4.2.2.2 Substrate Link Failures 92 4.2.2.3 Substrate Router and Link Failures 94 4.2.2.4 Regional Failures 95 4.2.3 Summary 101 4.3 Conclusion 101 References 101 5 An Evaluation Method of Optimal Cost Saving in a Data Center with Proactive Management 105Ruben Milocco, Pascale Minet, Éric Renault, and Selma Boumerdassi 5.1 Introduction 106 5.2 RelatedWork 108 5.3 Framework for DC Modeling 111 5.3.1 Notations and Assumptions 111 5.3.2 Energy Computation 111 5.3.2.1 Single-Resource Case 111 5.3.2.2 Extension to the Multi-resource Case 114 5.4 Cost Formulation 114 5.4.1 Example 115 5.4.2 Methodology 116 5.4.3 Relative Energy Cost Saving 116 5.4.4 Upper Bound Computation 118 5.5 Application to a Real DC 118 5.5.1 Generalities 119 5.5.1.1 Selection of the Sampling Interval 119 5.5.1.2 Selection of Possible Values for the Costs 119 5.5.1.3 Dynamic Capacity Provisioning Based on Energy Prediction 119 5.5.2 Application to a Google Dataset 120 5.5.2.1 Energy Computation 120 5.5.2.2 Evaluation of the Upper Bound 122 5.5.2.3 Computation of the Relative Energy Cost Saving 123 5.5.2.4 Discussion of Results 124 5.6 Conclusion 124 References 125 Index 129

Read more less

Book SynopsisMove your career forward with AWS certification! Prepare for the AWS Certified Data Analytics Specialty Exam with this thorough study guide This comprehensive study guide will help assess your technical skills and prepare for the updated AWS Certified Data Analytics exam. Earning this AWS certification will confirm your expertise in designing and implementing AWS services to derive value from data. The AWS Certified Data Analytics Study Guide: Specialty (DAS-C01) Exam is designed for business analysts and IT professionals who perform complex Big Data analyses. This AWS Specialty Exam guide gets you ready for certification testing with expert content, real-world knowledge, key exam concepts, and topic reviews. Gain confidence by studying the subject areas and working through the practice questions. Big data concepts covered in the guide include: Collection Storage Processing Analysis Visualization DTable of ContentsIntroduction xxi Assessment Test xxx Chapter 1 History of Analytics and Big Data 1 Evolution of Analytics Architecture Over the Years 3 The New World Order 5 Analytics Pipeline 6 Data Sources 7 Collection 8 Storage 8 Processing and Analysis 9 Visualization, Predictive and Prescriptive Analytics 9 The Big Data Reference Architecture 10 Data Characteristics: Hot, Warm, and Cold 11 Collection/Ingest 12 Storage 13 Process/Analyze 14 Consumption 15 Data Lakes and Their Relevance in Analytics 16 What is a Data Lake? 16 Building a Data Lake on AWS 19 Step 1: Choosing the Right Storage – Amazon S3 Is the Base 19 Step 2: Data Ingestion – Moving the Data into the Data Lake 21 Step 3: Cleanse, Prep, and Catalog the Data 22 Step 4: Secure the Data and Metadata 23 Step 5: Make Data Available for Analytics 23 Using Lake Formation to Build a Data Lake on AWS 23 Exam Objectives 24 Objective Map 25 Assessment Test 27 References 29 Chapter 2 Data Collection 31 Exam Objectives 32 AWS IoT 33 Common Use Cases for AWS IoT 35 How AWS IoT Works 36 Amazon Kinesis 38 Amazon Kinesis Introduction 40 Amazon Kinesis Data Streams 40 Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics 54 Amazon Kinesis Video Streams 61 AWS Glue 64 Glue Data Catalog 66 Glue Crawlers 68 Authoring ETL Jobs 69 Executing ETL Jobs 71 Change Data Capture with Glue Bookmarks 71 Use Cases for AWS Glue 72 Amazon SQS 72 Amazon Data Migration Service 74 What is AWS DMS Anyway? 74 What Does AWS DMS Support? 75 AWS Data Pipeline 77 Pipeline Definition 77 Pipeline Schedules 78 Task Runner 79 Large-Scale Data Transfer Solutions 81 AWS Snowcone 81 AWS Snowball 82 AWS Snowmobile 85 AWS Direct Connect 86 Summary 87 Review Questions 88 References 90 Exercises & Workshops 91 Chapter 3 Data Storage 93 Introduction 94 Amazon S3 95 Amazon S3 Data Consistency Model 96 Data Lake and S3 97 Data Replication in Amazon S3 100 Server Access Logging in Amazon S3 101 Partitioning, Compression, and File Formats on S3 101 Amazon S3 Glacier 103 Vault 103 Archive 104 Amazon DynamoDB 104 Amazon DynamoDB Data Types 105 Amazon DynamoDB Core Concepts 108 Read/Write Capacity Mode in DynamoDB 108 DynamoDB Auto Scaling and Reserved Capacity 111 Read Consistency and Global Tables 111 Amazon DynamoDB: Indexing and Partitioning 113 Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator 114 Amazon DynamoDB Streams 115 Amazon DynamoDB Streams – Kinesis Adapter 116 Amazon DocumentDB 117 Why a Document Database? 117 Amazon DocumentDB Overview 119 Amazon Document DB Architecture 120 Amazon DocumentDB Interfaces 120 Graph Databases and Amazon Neptune 121 Amazon Neptune Overview 122 Amazon Neptune Use Cases 123 Storage Gateway 123 Hybrid Storage Requirements 123 AWS Storage Gateway 125 Amazon EFS 127 Amazon EFS Use Cases 130 Interacting with Amazon EFS 132 Amazon EFS Security Model 132 Backing Up Amazon EFS 132 Amazon FSx for Lustre 133 Key Benefits of Amazon FSx for Lustre 134 Use Cases for Lustre 135 AWS Transfer for SFTP 135 Summary 136 Exercises 137 Review Questions 140 Further Reading 142 References 142 Chapter 4 Data Processing and Analysis 143 Introduction 144 Types of Analytical Workloads 144 Amazon Athena 146 Apache Presto 147 Apache Hive 148 Amazon Athena Use Cases and Workloads 149 Amazon Athena DDL, DML, and DCL 150 Amazon Athena Workgroups 151 Amazon Athena Federated Query 153 Amazon Athena Custom UDFs 154 Using Machine Learning with Amazon Athena 154 Amazon EMR 155 Apache Hadoop Overview 156 Amazon EMR Overview 157 Apache Hadoop on Amazon EMR 158 EMRFS 166 Bootstrap Actions and Custom AMI 167 Security on EMR 167 EMR Notebooks 168 Apache Hive and Apache Pig on Amazon EMR 169 Apache Spark on Amazon EMR 174 Apache HBase on Amazon EMR 182 Apache Flink, Apache Mahout, and Apache MXNet 184 Choosing the Right Analytics Tool 186 Amazon Elasticsearch Service 188 When to Use Elasticsearch 188 Elasticsearch Core Concepts (the ELK Stack) 189 Amazon Elasticsearch Service 191 Amazon Redshift 192 What is Data Warehousing? 192 What is Redshift? 193 Redshift Architecture 195 Redshift AQUA 198 Redshift Scalability 199 Data Modeling in Redshift 205 Data Loading and Unloading 213 Query Optimization in Redshift 217 Security in Redshift 221 Kinesis Data Analytics 225 How Does It Work? 226 What is Kinesis Data Analytics for Java? 228 Comparing Batch Processing Services 229 Comparing Orchestration Options on AWS 230 AWS Step Functions 230 Comparing Different ETL Orchestration Options 230 Summary 231 Exam Essentials 232 Exercises 232 Review Questions 235 References 237 Recommended Workshops 237 Amazon Athena Blogs 238 Amazon Redshift Blogs 240 Amazon EMR Blogs 241 Amazon Elasticsearch Blog 241 Amazon Redshift References and Further Reading 242 Chapter 5 Data Visualization 243 Introduction 244 Data Consumers 245 Data Visualization Options 246 Amazon QuickSight 247 Getting Started 248 Working with Data 250 Data Preparation 255 Data Analysis 256 Data Visualization 258 Machine Learning Insights 261 Building Dashboards 262 Embedding QuickSight Objects into Other Applications 264 Administration 265 Security 266 Other Visualization Options 267 Predictive Analytics 270 What is Predictive Analytics? 270 The AWS ML Stack 271 Summary 273 Exam Essentials 273 Exercises 274 Review Questions 275 References 276 Additional Reading Material 276 Chapter 6 Data Security 279 Introduction 280 Shared Responsibility Model 280 Security Services on AWS 282 AWS IAM Overview 285 IAM User 285 IAM Groups 286 IAM Roles 287 Amazon EMR Security 289 Public Subnet 290 Private Subnet 291 Security Configurations 293 Block Public Access 298 VPC Subnets 298 Security Options during Cluster Creation 299 EMR Security Summary 300 Amazon S3 Security 301 Managing Access to Data in Amazon S3 301 Data Protection in Amazon S3 305 Logging and Monitoring with Amazon S3 306 Best Practices for Security on Amazon S3 308 Amazon Athena Security 308 Managing Access to Amazon Athena 309 Data Protection in Amazon Athena 310 Data Encryption in Amazon Athena 311 Amazon Athena and AWS Lake Formation 312 Amazon Redshift Security 312 Levels of Security within Amazon Redshift 313 Data Protection in Amazon Redshift 315 Redshift Auditing 316 Redshift Logging 317 Amazon Elasticsearch Security 317 Elasticsearch Network Configuration 318 VPC Access 318 Accessing Amazon Elasticsearch and Kibana 319 Data Protection in Amazon Elasticsearch 322 Amazon Kinesis Security 325 Managing Access to Amazon Kinesis 325 Data Protection in Amazon Kinesis 326 Amazon Kinesis Best Practices 326 Amazon QuickSight Security 327 Managing Data Access with Amazon QuickSight 327 Data Protection 328 Logging and Monitoring 329 Security Best Practices 329 Amazon DynamoDB Security 329 Access Management in DynamoDB 329 IAM Policy with Fine-Grained Access Control 330 Identity Federation 331 How to Access Amazon DynamoDB 332 Data Protection with DynamoDB 332 Monitoring and Logging with DynamoDB 333 Summary 334 Exam Essentials 334 Exercises/Workshops 334 Review Questions 336 References and Further Reading 337 Appendix Answers to Review Questions 339 Chapter 1: History of Analytics and Big Data 340 Chapter 2: Data Collection 342 Chapter 3: Data Storage 343 Chapter 4: Data Processing and Analysis 344 Chapter 5: Data Visualization 346 Chapter 6: Data Security 346 Index 349

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn how radio access network (RAN) slicing allows 5G networks to adapt to a wide range of environments in this masterful resource Radio Access Network Slicing and Virtualization for 5G Vertical Industriesprovides readers with a comprehensive and authoritative examination of crucial topics in the field of radio access network (RAN) slicing. Learn from renowned experts as they detail how this technology supports and applies to various industrial sectors, including manufacturing, entertainment, public safety, public transport, healthcare, financial services, automotive, and energy utilities. Radio Access Network Slicing and Virtualization for 5G Vertical Industries explains how future wireless communication systems must be built to handle high degrees of heterogeneity, including different types of applications, device classes, physical environments, mobility levels, and carrier frequencies. The authors describe how RAN slicing can be utilized to adapt 5G technologies to such wide-ranTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii Preface xvii List of Contributors xxiii List of Abbreviations xxvii Part I Waveforms and Mixed-Numerology 1 1 ICI Cancellation Techniques Based on Data Repetition for OFDM Systems 3Miaowen Wen, Jun Li, Xilin Cheng and Xiang Cheng 1.1 OFDM History 3 1.2 OFDM Principle 4 1.2.1 Subcarrier Orthogonality 4 1.2.2 Discrete Implementation 5 1.2.3 OFDM in Multipath Channel 6 1.3 Carrier Frequency Offset Effect 8 1.3.1 Properties of ICI Coefficients 9 1.3.2 Carrier-to-Interference Power Ratio 9 1.4 ICI Cancellation Techniques 11 1.4.1 One-Path Cancellation with Mirror Mapping 11 1.4.1.1 MSR Scheme 12 1.4.1.2 MCSR Scheme 13 1.4.2 Two-Path Cancellation with Mirror Mapping 14 1.4.2.1 MCVT Scheme 15 1.4.2.2 MCJT Scheme 15 1.4.3 CIR Comparison 16 1.5 Experiment on Sea 17 1.5.1 Experiment Settings 18 1.5.2 Experiment Results 21 1.6 Summary 22 References 23 2 Filtered OFDM: An Insight into Intrinsic In-Band Interference 25Juquan Mao, Lei Zhang and Pei Xiao 2.1 Introduction 25 2.1.1 Notations 26 2.2 System Model for f-OFDM SISO System 26 2.3 In-Band Interference Analysis and Discussion 30 2.3.1 Channel Diagonalization and In-Band Interference-Free Systems 30 2.3.2 In-Band Interference Power 31 2.3.3 In-Band Interference Mitigation: A Practical Approach for Choosing CR Length 32 2.3.4 An Alternative for In-Band Interference Mitigation: Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE) 33 2.3.4.1 Linear Equalizers 33 2.3.4.2 Nonlinear Equalizers 34 2.4 Numerical Results 34 2.4.1 Numerical Results for In-Band Interference 35 2.5 Conclusion 38 1.2 Appendix 38 1.2.1 Derivation of zk 38 2.3 Appendix 39 2.3.1 Proof of 𝚯preBeing a Strict Upper Triangle 39 3.4 Appendix 39 3.4.1 Proof of Property 2.A.2 39 References 40 3 Windowed OFDM for Mixed-Numerology 5G and Beyond Systems 43Bowen Yang, Xiaoying Zhang, Lei Zhang, Arman Farhang, Pei Xiao and Muhammad Ali Imran 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 W-OFDM System Model 45 3.2.1 Single Numerology System Model 46 3.2.2 System Model for Mixed Numerologies 48 3.3 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis 50 3.3.1 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis for Numerology 1 50 3.3.2 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis for Numerology 2 52 3.4 Numerical Results and Discussion 54 3.5 Conclusions 57 3.6 Derivation of (3.9) 57 3.7 Derivations of (3.28) 58 3.8 Derivations of (3.30) 59 References 59 4 Generalized Frequency Division Multiplexing: Unified Multicarrier Framework 63Ahmad Nimr, Zhongju Li, Marwa Chafii and Gerhard Fettweis 4.1 Overview of MulticarrierWaveforms 63 4.1.1 Time–Frequency Representation 64 4.1.1.1 Discrete-Time Representation 65 4.1.1.2 Relation to Gabor Theory 66 4.1.2 GFDM As a FlexibleWaveform 66 4.1.2.1 GFDM with Multiple Prototype Pulses 67 4.1.3 Generalized Block-Based Multicarrier 68 4.1.3.1 Transmitter 69 4.1.3.2 Receiver 69 4.2 GFDM As a Flexible Framework 70 4.2.1 GFDM Representations 71 4.2.1.1 Filter Bank Representation 71 4.2.1.2 Vector Representation 71 4.2.1.3 2D-Block Representation 72 4.2.1.4 GFDM Matrix Structure 73 4.2.2 Architecture and Extended Flexibility 74 4.2.2.1 Alternative Interpretation of GFDM 75 4.2.2.2 Extended Flexibility 76 4.2.2.3 Flexible Hardware Architecture 76 4.3 GFDM for OFDM Enhancement 78 4.3.1 Transmitter 78 4.3.2 Receiver 79 4.3.2.1 LMMSE GFDM-Based Receiver 79 4.4 Conclusions 80 References 80 5 Filter Bank Multicarrier Modulation 83Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny 5.1 Introduction 83 5.1.1 Notations: 83 5.2 FBMC Methods 84 5.3 Theory 84 5.3.1 CMT 85 5.3.2 SMT 88 5.4 Prototype Filter Design 92 5.4.1 Prototype Filters for Time-Invariant Channels 92 5.4.2 Prototype Filters for Time-Varying Channels 93 5.5 Synchronization and Tracking Methods 94 5.5.1 Preamble Design 95 5.5.2 Channel Tracking 96 5.5.3 Timing Tracking 97 5.6 Equalization 97 5.7 Computational Complexity 98 5.8 Applications 98 References 99 6 Orthogonal Time–Frequency Space Modulation: Principles and Implementation 103Arman Farhang and Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 OTFS Principles 105 6.3 OFDM-Based OTFS 107 6.4 Channel Impact 108 6.5 Simplified Modem Structure 110 6.6 Complexity Analysis 113 6.7 Recent Results and Potential Research Directions 114 References 117 Part II RAN Slicing and 5G Vertical Industries 121 7 Multi-Numerology Waveform Parameter Assignment in 5G 123Ahmet Yazar and Hüseyin Arslan 7.1 Introduction 123 7.1.1 Problem Definitions 125 7.1.2 Literature Review 126 7.2 Waveform Parameter Options 128 7.3 Waveform Parameter Assignment 130 7.4 Conclusion 132 References 132 8 Network Slicing with Spectrum Sharing 137Yue Liu, Xu Yang and Laurie Cuthbert 8.1 The Need for Spectrum Sharing 137 8.2 Historical Approaches to Spectrum Sharing 139 8.2.1 Classifications of Spectrum Sharing 140 8.2.1.1 Orthogonality 140 8.2.1.2 Sharing Rights 141 8.2.1.3 Allocation of Resources 142 8.3 Network Slicing in the RAN 144 8.4 Radio Resource Allocation that Considers Spectrum Sharing 146 8.4.1 Example Radio Resource Allocation for Sharing Through Network Slicing 147 8.4.2 Other Considerations 153 8.5 Isolation 156 8.5.1 Example Isolation Results Using CAC 157 8.5.1.1 Type A: Baseline – CACWithout Network Isolation and Without Protection for Existing Users 158 8.5.1.2 Type B: Optimum Types – B1 and B2 158 8.5.1.3 Type C: Without Compensation – C1 and C2 159 8.6 Conclusions 162 Acknowledgments 163 References 163 9 Access Control and Handoff Policy Design for RAN Slicing 167Yao Sun, Lei Zhang, Gang Feng and Muhammad Ali Imran 9.1 A Framework of User Access Control for RAN Slicing 167 9.1.1 System Model for RAN Slicing 168 9.1.2 UE Association Problem Description 170 9.1.3 Admission Control Mechanisms Design for RAN Slicing 170 9.1.3.1 Optimal QoS AC Mechanism 171 9.1.3.2 Num-AC Mechanism 176 9.1.4 Experiments, Results, and Discussions 177 9.2 Smart Handoff Policy Design for RAN Slicing 179 9.2.1 RAN Slice Based Mobile Network Model 179 9.2.2 Multi-Agent Reinforcement Learning Based Handoff Framework 181 9.2.3 LESS Algorithm for Target BS and NS Selection 181 9.2.3.1 q-Value Update Policy 182 9.2.3.2 Optimal Action Policy 183 9.2.4 Experiment, Results, and Discussions 184 9.3 Summary 186 References 186 10 Robust RAN Slicing 189Ruihan Wen and Gang Feng 10.1 Introduction 189 10.2 Network Model 190 10.2.1 Slice Failure Detection Process 190 10.2.2 System Model 191 10.3 Robust RAN Slicing 193 10.3.1 Failure Recovery Problem Formulation 193 10.3.2 Robust RAN Slicing Problem Formulation 195 10.3.3 Variable Neighborhood Search Based Heuristic for Robust RAN Slicing 196 10.4 Numerical Results 199 10.4.1 Performance Metrics 199 10.4.2 Simulation Scenarios and Settings 200 10.4.3 Results 201 10.5 Conclusions and Future Work 206 References 206 11 Flexible Function Split Over Ethernet Enabling RAN Slicing 209Ghizlane Mountaser and Toktam Mahmoodi 11.1 Flexible Functional Split Toward RAN Slicing 209 11.1.1 Full Centralization and CPRI 209 11.1.2 RAN Functional Split 210 11.1.3 Flexible Functional Split as RAN Slicing Enabler 213 11.2 Fronthaul Reliability and Slicing by Deploying Multipath at the Fronthaul 213 11.2.1 Packet-Based Fronthaul 213 11.2.2 Multipath Packet-Based Fronthaul for Enhancing Reliability 213 11.2.3 Slicing Within Multipath Fronthaul 214 11.3 Experimentation Results Evaluation of Flexible Functional Split for RAN Slicing 214 11.3.1 Experimental Setup 214 11.3.2 Evaluation and Discussion of the Results 215 11.4 Simulation Results Analysis of Multipath Packet-Based Fronthaul for RAN Slicing 217 11.4.1 Simulation System Model 217 References 219 12 Service-Oriented RAN Support of Network Slicing 221Wei Tan, Feng Han, Yinghao Jin and Chenchen Yang 12.1 Introduction 221 12.2 General Concept and Principles 222 12.2.1 Network Slicing Concepts 223 12.2.2 Overall RAN Subsystem 224 12.2.3 Key Principles of Network Slicing in RAN 225 12.3 RAN Subsystem Deployment Scenarios 227 12.4 Key Technologies to Enable Service-Oriented RAN Slicing 229 12.4.1 Device Awareness of RAN Part of Network Slice 230 12.4.2 Slice-Specific RAN Part of Network Slice 232 12.4.3 Mission-Driven Resource Utilization, Sharing, and Aggregation 234 12.4.4 Slice-Aware Connected UE Mobility 235 12.4.5 Slice-Level Handlings for Idle/Inactive UEs 237 12.5 Summary 237 References 238 13 5G Network Slicing for V2X Communications: Technologies and Enablers 239Claudia Campolo, Antonella Molinaro and Vincenzo Sciancalepore 13.1 Introduction 239 13.2 Vehicular Applications 240 13.3 V2X Communication Technologies 241 13.3.1 The C-V2X Technology 242 13.3.1.1 The PC5 Radio Interface 242 13.3.1.2 The LTE-Uu Interface 242 13.3.1.3 Core Network 243 13.3.2 C-V2X Toward 5G 243 13.3.2.1 Radio Interface 243 13.3.2.2 Core Network 244 13.4 Cloudification in V2X Environments 245 13.4.1 The Role of MEC 245 13.4.2 ETSI MEC-Based Programmable Interfaces 246 13.4.3 MEC-Based Support for V2X Applications 247 13.5 Transport and Tunneling Protocol for V2X 248 13.5.1 GTP-U Encapsulation 248 13.5.2 Segment Routing v6 248 13.5.3 Scalability and Flexibility in SRv6 250 13.6 Network Slicing for V2X 251 13.6.1 3GPP Specifications 251 13.6.2 Literature Overview 252 13.7 Lessons Learnt and Guidelines 255 13.7.1 Slice Mapping and Identification 255 13.7.2 Multi-tenancy Management 255 13.7.3 Massive Communications 255 13.7.4 Transparent Mobility 256 13.7.5 Isolation 256 13.8 Conclusions 256 References 256 14 Optimizing Resource Allocation in URLLC for Real-Time Wireless Control Systems 259Bo Chang, Liying Li and Guodong Zhao 14.1 Introduction 259 14.2 System Model with Latency and Reliability Constraints 261 14.2.1 Wireless Control Model 262 14.2.2 Wireless Communication Model 266 14.3 Communication-Control Co-Design 267 14.3.1 Communication Constraint 267 14.3.2 Control Constraint 268 14.3.3 Problem Formulation 269 14.4 Optimal Resource Allocation for The Proposed Co-Design 270 14.4.1 Relationship Between Control and Communication 270 14.4.2 Optimal Resource Allocation 271 14.4.2.1 Problem Conversion 271 14.4.2.2 Problem Solution 272 14.4.3 Optimal Control Convergence Rate 273 14.5 Simulations Results 273 14.5.1 Control Performance 274 14.5.2 Communication Performance 276 14.6 Conclusions 279 References 279 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest developments and recent progress on the key technologies enabling next-generation 6G mobile networks Toward 6G: A New Era of Convergence offers an up-to-date guide to the emerging 6G vision by describing new human-centric services made possible by combinations of mobile robots, avatars, and smartphones, which will be increasingly replaced with wearable displays and haptic interfaces that provide immersive extended reality (XR) experiences. The authorsnoted experts on the topicinclude a review of their work and information on the recent progress on the Tactile Internet and multi-sensory haptic communications. The book highlights decentralized edge computing in particular via Ethereum blockchain technologies, most notably the so-called decentralized autonomous organization (DAO) for crowdsourcing of human skills to solve problems that machines (such as autonomous artificial intelligence agents and robots) alone cannot solve well. The book also coTable of ContentsAuthor Biographies xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Acronyms xix 1 The 6G Vision 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Evolution of Mobile Networks and Internet 3 1.3 6G Network Architectures and Key Enabling Technologies 6 1.3.1 Four-Tier Networks: Space-Air-Ground-Underwater 6 1.3.2 Key Enabling Technologies 7 1.3.2.1 Millimeter-Wave and Terahertz Communications 7 1.3.2.2 Reconfigurable Intelligent Surfaces 8 1.3.2.3 From Network Softwarization to Network Intelligentization 9 1.4 Toward 6G: A New Era of Convergence 11 1.5 Scope and Outline of Book 13 1.5.1 Scope 13 1.5.2 Outline 14 2 Immersive Tactile Internet Experiences via Edge Intelligence 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 The Tactile Internet: Automation or Augmentation of the Human? 26 2.3 Haptic Traffic Characterization 32 2.3.1 Teleoperation Experiments 33 2.3.1.1 6-DoF Teleoperation without Deadband Coding 33 2.3.1.2 1-DoF Teleoperation with Deadband Coding 33 2.3.1.3 Packetization 33 2.3.2 Packet Interarrival Times 34 2.3.3 Sample Autocorrelation 39 2.4 FiWi Access Networks: Revisited for Clouds and Cloudlets 41 2.4.1 FiWi: EPON and WLAN 42 2.4.2 C-RAN: Cloud vs. Cloudlet 45 2.4.3 Low-Latency FiWi Enhanced LTE-A HetNets 45 2.5 Delay Analysis 48 2.5.1 Assumptions 48 2.5.2 Local Teleoperation 48 2.5.3 Nonlocal Teleoperation 53 2.6 Edge Sample Forecast 54 2.7 Results 58 2.8 Conclusions 63 3 Context- and Self-Awareness for Human-Agent-Robot Task Coordination 65 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 System Model 67 3.2.1 Network Architecture 67 3.2.2 Energy and Motion Models of Mobile Robots 69 3.3 Context-Aware Multirobot Task Coordination 71 3.3.1 Illustrative Case Study 71 3.3.2 Problem Formulation 72 3.3.3 The Proposed Algorithm 76 3.4 Self-Aware Optimal Motion Planning 77 3.5 Delay and Reliability Analysis 81 3.5.1 Delay Analysis 81 3.5.1.1 Transmission Delay from MU to OLT 83 3.5.1.2 Transmission Delay from OLT to MR 84 3.5.1.3 End-to-End Delay from MR to MU 84 3.5.2 Reliability Analysis 84 3.6 Results 86 3.7 Conclusion 93 4 Delay-Constrained Teleoperation Task Scheduling and Assignment 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 System Model and Network Architecture 97 4.3 Problem Statement 99 4.3.1 Problem Formulation 99 4.3.2 Model Scalability 102 4.4 Algorithmic Solution 103 4.4.1 Illustrative Case Study 103 4.4.2 Proposed Task Coordination Algorithm 104 4.4.3 Complexity Analysis 106 4.5 Delay Analysis 106 4.5.1 Local Teleoperation 108 4.5.2 Nonlocal Teleoperation 109 4.6 Results 109 4.7 Discussion 118 4.8 Conclusion 118 5 Cooperative Computation Offloading in FiWi-Enhanced Mobile Networks 121 5.1 Introduction 121 5.2 System Model 124 5.3 Energy-Delay Analysis of the Proposed Cooperative Offloading 126 5.3.1 Average Response Time 127 5.3.1.1 Delay Analysis of WiFi Users 130 5.3.1.2 Delay Analysis of 4G LTE-A Users 130 5.3.1.3 Delay Analysis of Backhaul EPON 131 5.3.2 Average Energy Consumption per Task 132 5.4 Energy-Delay Trade-off via Self-Organization 134 5.5 Results 137 5.6 Conclusions 145 6 Decentralization via Blockchain 147 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Blockchain Technologies 150 6.2.1 Ethereum vs. Bitcoin Blockchains 150 6.2.2 Ethereum: The DAO 154 6.3 Blockchain IoT and Edge Computing 155 6.3.1 Blockchain IoT (BIoT): Recent Progress and Related Work 155 6.3.2 Blockchain Enabled Edge Computing 157 6.4 Decentralizing the Tactile Internet 158 6.4.1 AI-enhanced MEC 159 6.4.2 Crowdsourcing 160 6.5 Nudging: From Judge Contract to Nudge Contract 162 6.5.1 Cognitive Assistance: From AI to Intelligence Amplification (IA) 162 6.5.2 HITL Hybrid-Augmented Intelligence 162 6.5.3 Decentralized Self-Organizing Cooperative (DSOC) 163 6.5.4 Nudge Contract: Nudging via Smart Contract 163 6.6 Conclusions 165 7 XR in the 6G Post-Smartphone Era 167 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 6G Vision: Putting (Internet of No) Things in Perspective 169 7.3 Extended Reality (XR): Unleashing Its Full Potential 170 7.3.1 The Reality–Virtuality Continuum 170 7.3.2 The Multiverse: An Architecture of Advanced XR Experiences 171 7.4 Internet of No Things: Invisible-to-Visible (I2V) Technologies 173 7.4.1 Extrasensory Perception Network (ESPN) 175 7.4.2 Nonlocal Awareness of Space and Time: Mimicking the Quantum Realm 176 7.4.2.1 Precognition 178 7.4.2.2 Eternalism 178 7.5 Results 180 7.6 Conclusions 181 Appendix A Proof of Lemmas 183 A.1 Proof of Lemma 3.1 183 A.2 Proof of Lemma 3.2 184 A.3 Proof of Lemma 3.3 185 A.4 Proof of Lemma 5.1 186 Bibliography 191 Index 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisA playbook on product-led strategy for software product teams There''s a common strategy used by the fastest growing and most successful businesses of our time. These companies are building their entire customer experience around their digital products, delivering software that is simple, intuitive and delightful, and that anticipates and exceeds the evolving needs of users. Product-led organizations make their products the vehicle for acquiring and retaining customers, driving growth, and influencing organizational priorities. They represent the future of business in a digital-first world. This book is meant to help you transform your company into a product-led organization, helping to drive growth for your business and advance your own career. It provides: A holistic view of the quantitative and qualitative insights teams need to make better decisions and shape better product experiences. A guide to setting goals for product success and mTable of ContentsPreface ix Introducing Product-led Strategy xv Section One Leveraging Data to Create a Great Product Chapter 1 Start with the End in Mind 3 Chapter 2 You Are What You Measure 27 Chapter 3 Turning Customer Data into Insights 45 Chapter 4 How to Measure Feelings 63 Section Two Product is the Center of the Customer Experience Chapter 5 Marketing in a Product-led World 81 Chapter 6 Converting Users into Customers 95 Chapter 7 Getting Customers Off to a Fast Start Through Onboarding 99 Chapter 8 Delivering Value 121 Chapter 9 Customer Self-Service 133 Chapter 10 Renew and Expand: Creating Customers for Life 145 Section Three A New Way of Delivering Product Chapter 11 Product-led Design 157 Chapter 12 Launching and Driving Adoption 161 Chapter 13 The Art of Letting Go 175 Chapter 14 What Users Want 183 Chapter 15 Dynamic Roadmapping 195 Chapter 16 Building Modern Product Teams 207 Conclusion: A Call to Action 217 Acknowledgments 219 About the Author 221 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisBattery technology is constantly changing, and the concepts and applications of these changes are rapidly becoming increasingly more important as more and more industries and individuals continue to make greener choices in their energy sources. As global dependence on fossil fuels slowly wanes, there is a heavier and heavier importance placed on cleaner power sources and methods for storing and transporting that power. Battery technology is a huge part of this global energy revolution. Rechargeable battery technologies have been a milestone for moving toward a fossil-fuel-free society. They include groundbreaking changes in energy storage, transportation, and electronics. Improvements in battery electrodes and electrolytes have been a remarkable development, and, in the last few years, rechargeable batteries have attracted significant interest from scientists as they are a boon for electric vehicles, laptops and computers, mobile phones, portable electronics, and grid-level electric

Read more less

Book SynopsisBattery technology is constantly changing, and the concepts and applications of these changes are rapidly becoming increasingly more important as more and more industries and individuals continue to make greener choices in their energy sources. As global dependence on fossil fuels slowly wanes, there is a heavier and heavier importance placed on cleaner power sources and methods for storing and transporting that power. Battery technology is a huge part of this global energy revolution. Zinc batteries are an advantageous choice over lithium-based batteries, which have dominated the market for years in multiple areas, most specifically in electric vehicles and other battery-powered devices. Zinc is the fourth most abundant metal in the world, which is influential in its lower cost, making it a very attractive material for use in batteries. Zinc-based batteries have been around since the 1930s, but only now are they taking center stage in the energy, automotive, and other industTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Carbon Nanomaterials for Zn-Ion Batteries 1Prasun Banerjee, Adolfo Franco Jr, Rajender Boddula, K. Chandra Babu Naidu and Ramyakrishna Pothu 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Co4N (CN) - Carbon Fibers Network (CFN) -Carbon Cloth (CC) 2 1.3 N-Doping of Carbon Nanofibers 2 1.4 NiCo2S4 on Nitrogen-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 4 1.5 3D Phosphorous and Sulfur Co-Doped C3N4 Sponge With C Nanocrystal 5 1.6 2D Carbon Nanosheets 6 1.7 N-Doped Graphene Oxide With NiCo2O4 6 1.8 Conclusions 7 Acknowledgements 8 References 8 2 Construction, Working, and Applications of Different Zn-Based Batteries 11G. Ranjith Kumar, K. Chandra Babu Naidu, D. Baba Basha, D. Prakash Babu, M.S.S.R.K.N. Sarma, Ramyakrishna Pothu, and Rajender Boddula 2.1 Introduction 12 2.2 History 13 2.3 Types of Batteries 14 2.3.1 Primary Battery 14 2.3.2 Secondary Battery 14 2.4 Zinc-Carbon Batteries 18 2.5 Zinc-Cerium Batteries 19 2.6 Zinc-Bromine Flow Batteries 20 References 21 3 Nickel and Cobalt Materials for Zn Batteries 25Sonal Singh, Rishabh Sharma and Manika Khanuja 3.1 Introduction 26 3.2 Zinc Batteries 27 3.3 Nickel-Zinc Battery 27 3.3.1 History 27 3.3.2 Basics 28 3.3.3 Materials and Cost 30 3.3.4 Reliability 30 3.3.5 Voltage Drop 30 3.3.6 Performance 31 3.4 Advantages 31 3.5 Challenges 32 3.6 Effect of Metallic Additives, Cobalt and Zinc, on Nickel Electrode 32 3.7 Conclusion 33 References 34 4 Manganese-Based Materials for Zn Batteries 37S. Ramesh, K. Chandrababu Naidu, K. Venkata Ratnam, H. Manjunatha, D. Baba Basha and A. Mallikarjauna 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 History of the Zinc and Zinc Batteries 38 4.3 Characteristics of Batteries 41 4.3.1 Capacity 41 4.3.2 Current 41 4.3.3 Power Density 41 4.4 MN-Based Zn Batteries 42 4.5 Conclusion 44 References 47 5 Electrolytes for Zn-Ion Batteries 51Praveen Kumar Yadav, Sapna Raghav, Jyoti Raghav and S. S. Swarupa Tripathy 5.1 Introduction 52 5.2 Electrolytes for Rechargeable Zinc Ion Batteries (RZIBs) 53 5.2.1 Aqueous Electrolytes (AqEs) 54 5.2.1.1 Pros and Cons of AEs 55 5.2.1.2 Neutral or Mildly Acidic Electrolytes 58 5.2.2 Non-Aqueous Electrolytes 59 5.2.2.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 60 5.2.2.2 Hydrogel or Gel Electrolytes 61 5.2.2.3 Gel Polymer Electrolytes 63 5.2.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolytes 63 5.2.4 Bio-Electrolyte 65 5.3 Summary 65 Abbreviation Table 66 Acknowledgments 66 References 67 6 Anode Materials for Zinc-Ion Batteries 73Muhammad Mudassir Hassan, Muhammad Inam Khan, Abdur Rahim and Nawshad Muhammad 6.1 Introduction 73 6.2 Storage Mechanism 75 6.3 Zinc-Ion Battery Anodes 77 6.4 Future Prospects 81 6.5 Conclusion 81 References 82 7 Cathode Materials for Zinc-Air Batteries 85Seyedeh Maryam Mousavi and Mohammad Reza Rahimpour 7.1 Introduction 85 7.1.1 Cathode Definition 86 7.2 Zinc Cathode Structure 87 7.3 Non-Valuable Materials for Cathode Electrocatalytic 89 7.4 Electrochemical Specifications of Activated Carbon as a Cathode 92 7.4.1 Electrochemical Evaluation of Cathode Substances La1−XCaxCoO3 Zinc Batteries 92 7.5 Extremely Durable and Inexpensive Cathode Air Catalyst 93 7.5.1 Co3O4/Mno2 NPs Dual Oxygen Catalyst as Cathode for Zn-Air Rechargeable Battery 94 7.5.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNT) Employing Nitrogen as Catalyst in the Zinc/Air Battery System 94 7.5.3 Magnesium Oxide NPs Modified Catalyst for the Use of Air Electrodes in Zn/Air Batteries 94 7.5.4 Silver-Magnesium Oxide Nanocatalysts as Cathode for Zn-Air Batteries 95 7.5.5 One-Step Preparation of C-N Ni/Co-Doped Nanotube Hybrid as Outstanding Cathode Catalysts for Zinc-Air Batteries 95 7.6 Hierarchical Co3O4 Nano-Micro Array With Superior Working Characteristics Using Cathode Ray on Pliable and Rechargeable Battery 96 7.7 Dual Function Oxygen Catalyst Upon Active Iron-Based Zn-Air Rechargeable Batteries 97 7.7.1 Co4N and NC Fiber Coupling Connected to a Free-Acting Binary Cathode for Strong, Efficient, and Pliable Air Batteries 98 7.8 Conclusion 98 Nomenclature 99 References 99 8 Anode Materials for Zinc-Air Batteries 103Abbas Ghareghashi and Ali Mohebbi 8.1 Introduction 104 8.2 Zinc Anodes 105 8.2.1 Downsizing of Zn Anodes 106 8.2.2 Design of Membrane Separators 107 8.2.3 The Use of ZnO Instead of Zn 108 8.2.4 Increase of Surface Area in Zn Anode Structure 110 8.2.5 Coating of Zn Anode 111 8.2.5.1 Bismuth Oxide-Based Glasses 112 8.2.5.2 Silica 114 8.2.5.3 Carbon Nanotubes 115 8.2.5.4 ZnO@C 116 8.2.5.5 Zn-Al LDHs 116 8.2.5.6 ZnO@C-ZnAl LDHs 118 8.2.5.7 Tapioca 119 8.2.5.8 TiO2 122 8.3 Conclusions 123 References 124 9 Safety and Environmental Impacts of Zn Batteries 131Saurabh Sharma, Abhishek Anand, Amritanshu Shukla and Atul Sharma 9.1 Introduction 131 9.2 Working Principle of Zinc-Based Batteries 132 9.2.1 Zinc-Air Batteries Basic Principle and Advances 133 9.2.2 Zinc Organic Polymer Batteries 135 9.2.3 Zinc-Ion Batteries 137 9.2.3.1 Zinc-Silver Batteries 137 9.2.3.2 Zinc-Nickel Batteries 138 9.2.3.3 Zinc-Manganese Battery 140 9.3 Batteries: Environment Impact, Solution, and Safety 141 9.3.1 Disposal of Batteries and Environmental Impact 143 9.3.2 Recycling of Zinc-Based Batteries 143 9.4 Conclusion 146 Acknowledgement 147 References 147 10 Basics and Developments of Zinc-Air Batteries 151Seyedeh Maryam Mousavi and Mohammad Reza Rahimpour 10.1 Introduction 151 10.1.1 Public Specifications 151 10.2 Zinc-Air Electrode Chemical Reaction 153 10.3 Zinc/Air Battery Construction 154 10.4 Primary Zn/Air Batteries 157 10.5 Principles of Configuration and Operation 159 10.6 Developments in Electrical Fuel Zn/Air Batteries 161 10.6.1 Zn/Air Versus Metal/Air Systems 161 10.7 Conclusion 162 References 164 11 History and Development of Zinc Batteries 167Pallavi Jain, Sapna Raghav, Ankita Dhillon and Dinesh Kumar 11.1 Introduction 167 11.2 Basic Concept 169 11.2.1 Components of Batteries 169 11.2.2 Classification of Batteries 171 11.2.2.1 Primary Batteries 171 11.2.2.2 Secondary or Rechargeable Batteries (RBs) 171 11.3 Cell Operation 172 11.3.1 Process of Discharge 172 11.3.2 Process of Charge 172 11.4 History 173 11.5 Different Types of Zinc Batteries 174 11.5.1 Zinc-Carbon Batteries 174 11.5.2 Zinc/Manganese Oxide Batteries (Alkaline Batteries) 174 11.5.3 Zinc/Silver Oxide Battery 174 11.5.4 Zn-Air (Zn-O2) Batteries 176 11.5.4.1 Mechanically Rechargeable Batteries (Zn-O2 Batteries) 177 11.5.4.2 Electrically Rechargeable Batteries (Zn-O2 Batteries) 178 11.5.5 Hybrid Zn-O2 Batteries 178 11.5.5.1 Hybrid Zn-Ni/O2 Batteries 178 11.5.5.2 Hybrid Zn-Co/O2 Batteries 179 11.5.6 Aqueous Zinc-Ion Rechargeable Batteries 180 11.5.6.1 Zn2+ Insertion/Extraction Mechanism 180 11.5.6.2 Chemical Conversion Mechanism 180 11.5.6.3 H+ and Zn2+ Insertion/Extraction Mechanism 181 11.6 Future Perspectives 181 11.7 Conclusion 182 Abbreviations 182 Acknowledgement 183 References 183 12 Electrolytes for Zinc-Air Batteries 187Zahra Farmani, Mohammad Amin Sedghamiz, and Mohammad Reza Rahimpour 12.1 Introduction 187 12.2 Aqueous Electrolytes 188 12.2.1 Alkaline Electrolytes 189 12.2.1.1 Dissolution of Zinc in Alkaline Systems 189 12.2.1.2 Insoluble Carbonates Precipitation 192 12.2.1.3 Effect of Water 193 12.2.1.4 Hydrogen Evolution 194 12.2.2 Neutral Electrolytes 195 12.2.3 Acidic Electrolytes 196 12.3 Electrolytes of Non-Aqueous 197 12.3.1 Non-Aqueous Electrolytes 199 12.3 Summary 203 References 206 13 Security, Storage, Handling, Influences and Disposal/Recycling of Zinc Batteries 215Manju Yadav and Dinesh Kumar 13.1 Introduction 215 13.2 Security of Zinc Battery 217 13.2.1 Modifications for Improving Performance 218 13.2.1.1 High Surface Area 218 13.2.1.2 Carbon-Based Electrode Additives 221 13.2.1.3 Discharge-Capturing Electrode Additives 221 13.2.1.4 Electrode Coatings 222 13.2.1.5 Electrolyte Additives 222 13.2.1.6 Heavy-Metals Electrode Additive 222 13.2.1.7 Polymeric Binders 223 13.2.2 Storage and Handling 224 13.3 Influence of Zinc Battery 224 13.3.1 Consumption of Natural Resources 225 13.3.2 Toxicity of Batteries to Humans 226 13.3.3 Toxicity of Batteries to the Aquatic Environment 226 13.4 Disposal/Recycling Options 227 Acknowledgement 228 References 228 14 Materials for Ni-Zn Batteries 235Vaishali Tomar and Dinesh Kumar 14.1 Introduction 235 14.1.1 Functioning Principles of Nickel-Zinc Battery 237 14.1.2 Ni-Zn Battery Design 238 14.2 Expansion of Ni-Zn Battery 239 14.2.1 Active Materials for the Battery 240 14.3 Application 241 14.4 Conclusion 242 Acknowledgement 243 References 243 Index 249

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the most recent advances in electromagnetic vortices In Electromagnetic Vortices: Wave Phenomena and Engineering Applications, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a cutting-edge treatment of electromagnetic vortex waves, including their theoretical foundation, related wave properties, and several potentially transformative applications. The book is divided into three parts. The editors first include resources that describe the generation, sorting, and manipulation of vortex waves, as well as descriptions of interesting wave behavior in the infrared and optical regimes with custom-designed nanostructures. They then discuss the generation, multiplexing, and propagation of vortex waves at the microwave and millimeter-wave frequencies. Finally, the selected contributions discuss several representative practical applications of vortex waves from a system perspective. With coverage that incorporates demonstration examples from a wide range of relateTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xv List of Contributors xvii Preface xxi Part I Fundamentals and Basics of Electromagnetic Vortices 1 1 Fundamentals of Orbital Angular Momentum Beams: Concepts, Antenna Analogies, and Applications 3 Anastasios Papathanasopoulos and Yahya Rahmat-Samii 1.1 Electromagnetic Fields Carry Orbital Angular Momentum 3 1.2 OAM Beams; Properties and Analogies with Conventional Beams 4 1.2.1 Laguerre–Gaussian Modes 5 1.3 Communicating Using OAM: Potentials and Challenges 10 1.3.1 OAM Communication Link Scenarios and Technical Barriers 11 1.3.2 OAM Emerging Applications and Perspectives 14 1.3.2.1 Free-space Communications 14 1.3.2.2 Optical Fiber Communications 17 1.4 OAM Generation Methods 20 1.5 Summary and Perspectives 22 Appendix 1.A OAM Far-field Calculation 23 References 26 2 OAM Radio – Physical Foundations and Applications of Electromagnetic Orbital Angular Momentum in Radio Science and Technology 33 Bo Thidé and Fabrizio Tamburini 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Physics 34 2.2.1 The Classical Electromagnetic Field 34 2.2.2 Electrodynamic Observables 36 2.2.2.1 Behavior at Very Long Distances 41 2.3 Implementation 45 2.3.1 Wireless Information Transfer with Linear Momentum 46 2.3.2 Wireless Information Transfer with Angular Momentum 48 2.3.2.1 Spin Angular Momentum vs. Orbital Angular Momentum 50 2.3.2.2 Angular Momentum Transducers 50 2.3.2.3 Electric Hertzian Dipoles 52 2.3.3 Astronomy Applications 58 Appendix A 61 2.A.1 Theory 61 2.A.1.1 Classical Majorana-Oppenheimer Formalism and Its Affinity to First Quantization Formalism 61 2.A.1.1.1 Riemann–Silberstein Electromagnetic Potentials and Fields 63 A.1.1.1 Purely Electric Sources 66 A.1.1.2 Useful Approximations 67 A.1.2.1 The Paraxial Approximation 68 A.1.2.2 The Far-Zone Approximation 70 2.A.2 Poincaré Invariants and Conserved Quantities of the EM Field 74 A.2.1 Energy 74 A.2.2 Linear Momentum 76 A.2.2.1 Gauge Invariance 78 A.2.2.2 First Quantization Formalism 79 A.2.3 Angular Momentum 80 A.2.3.1 Gauge Invariance 82 A.2.3.2 First Quantization Formalism 83 References 84 Part II Physical Wave Phenomena of Electromagnetic Vortices 97 3 Generation of Microwave Vortex Beams Using Metasurfaces 99 Jia Yuan Yin and Tie Jun Cui 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Metasurfaces for Vortex-beam Generation 100 3.2.1 Reflective Metasurfaces for Vortex-beam Generation 101 3.2.2 Transmission Metasurfaces for Vortex-beam Generation 108 3.2.3 Planar Metasurfaces for Vortex-beam Generation 110 3.2.4 Metasurfaces for Modified Vortex-beam Generation 112 3.2.5 One-dimensional Metasurface for Vortex-beam Generation 113 3.3 Conclusion 114 Acknowledgments 114 References 115 4 Application of Transformation Optics and 3D Printing Technology in Vortex Wave Generation 121 Jianjia Yi, Shah Nawaz Burokur, and Douglas H. Werner 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Theoretical Basis of Transformation Optics and 3D Printing 121 4.2.1 The Concept and Development of Transformation Optics 121 4.2.2 An Overview of 3D Printing Techniques 125 4.3 Several Applications of Transformation Optics in Vortex Waves 128 4.3.1 All-Dielectric Transformed Material for the Generation of OAM Beams 128 4.3.2 All-dielectric Metamaterial Medium for Collimating OAM Vortex Waves 137 4.3.3 A Transformation Optics-Based Lens for Horizontal Radiation of OAM Vortex Waves 147 4.4 Conclusions 153 References 154 5 Millimeter-Wave Transmit-Arrays for High-Capacity and Wideband Generation of Scalar and Vector Vortex Beams 157 Zhi Hao Jiang, Lei Kang, Wei Hong, and Douglas H. Werner 5.1 Introduction 157 5.2 Vector Vortex Beams and Hybrid-Order PSs 159 5.3 Millimeter-Wave Transmit-Array Unit Cell Designs 161 5.3.1 Ka-Band CP Unit Cell Design 161 5.3.2 Q-Band CP Unit Cell Design 165 5.3.3 K-Band Dual-CP Unit Cell Design 166 5.4 Millimeter-Wave Transmit-Arrays for Vortex Beam Multiplexing 171 5.4.1 Far-Field Pattern Calculation for Transmit-Arrays 171 5.4.2 Multiplexing of Scalar Vortex Beams 172 5.4.3 Multiplexing of Vector Vortex Beams with Symmetry Constraints 176 5.4.4 Multiplexing of Vector Vortex Beams with Broken Symmetry 182 5.5 Conclusion 183 Acknowledgment 183 References 184 6 Twisting Light with Metamaterials 189 Natalia M. Litchinitser 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 OAM Beams on the Nanoscale 194 6.3 Active OAM Sources 201 6.4 OAM Light in Engineered Nonlinear Colloidal Systems 206 6.5 Conclusion 214 References 214 7 Generation of Optical Vortex Beams 223 Yuanjie Yang and Cheng-Wei Qiu 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Basic Theory of Optical Vortex 224 7.3 Generation of Optical Vortex 225 7.3.1 Generation of Vortex Beams using Optical Elements 225 7.3.1.1 Spiral Phase Plate 225 7.3.1.2 Fork-grating Hologram 226 7.3.1.3 Spiral Zone Plate Holograms 226 7.3.2 Generation of Vortex Beams Using Digital Devices 227 7.3.3 Generation of Vortex Beams Based on Mode Conversion 229 7.3.4 Generation of Vortex Beams Based on the Superposition of Waves 230 7.3.5 Generation of Vortex Beams Based on Metasurfaces 231 7.4 Generation of Novel Vortex Beams 233 7.4.1 Perfect Vortex Beam 233 7.4.2 Fractional Vortex Beams 235 7.4.3 Anomalous Vortex Beam 237 7.4.4 Vortex Beams with Varying OAM 239 7.5 Conclusion 241 References 241 8 Orbital Angular Momentum Generation, Detection, and Angular Momentum Conservation with Second Harmonic Generation 245 Menglin L. N. Chen, Xiaoyan Y. Z. Xiong, Wei E. I. Sha, and Li Jun Jiang 8.1 Orbital Angular Momentum Generation and Detection 245 8.1.1 OAM Generation 246 8.1.1.1 Complementary Metasurfaces 247 8.1.1.2 Quasi-Continuous Metasurfaces 247 8.1.1.3 Photonic Crystals 250 8.1.2 OAM Detection 252 8.1.2.1 Modified Dynamic Mode Decomposition 252 8.1.2.2 Holographic Metasurfaces 254 8.2 AM Conservation: Nonlinear Optics 256 8.2.1 BEM for Nonlinear Optics 256 8.2.2 Verification of the Algorithm 258 8.2.3 Mixing of Spin and OAM 259 8.2.4 General Angular Momenta Conservation Law 261 8.3 Conclusion 263 References 264 Part III Engineering Applications of Electromagnetic Vortices 269 9 Orbital Angular Momentum Based Structured Radio Beams and its Applications 271 Xianmin Zhang, Shilie Zheng, Wei E. I. Sha, Li Jun Jiang, Xiaowen Xiong, Zelin Zhu, Zhixia Wang, Yuqi Chen, Jiayu Zheng, Xinyue Wang, and Menglin L. N. Chen 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 PS–OAM Based Structured Beams 272 9.2.1 Plane Spiral OAM 272 9.2.2 Structured Radio Beam 273 9.3 Antennas for Structured Beams 276 9.3.1 Antennas for PS–OAM Waves 276 9.3.2 SIW-based Compact Antenna 279 9.3.3 Partial Arc Transmitting Scheme 284 9.4 Potential Applications 286 9.4.1 Radar Detection 286 9.4.2 MIMO System 287 9.4.3 Spatial Field Digital Modulation 289 9.5 Conclusion 291 References 291 10 OAM Multiplexing Using Uniform Circular Array and Microwave Circuit for Short-range Communication 295 Kentaro Murata and Naoki Honma 10.1 Introduction 295 10.2 OAM Multiplexing System and its Mechanism 297 10.2.1 Coaxial UCA Configuration 297 10.2.2 Circulant Channel Matrix 298 10.2.3 DFT/IDFT Beamformers 299 10.3 OAM Multiplexing for Short-range Communications 300 10.3.1 Achievable Rate 300 10.3.2 Array Topology 301 10.3.3 Optimal Array Radius 304 10.3.4 Butler Matrix 309 10.3.5 Performance Evaluation 312 10.4 Conclusion and Key Challenges 317 References 318 11 OAM Communications in Multipath Environments 321 Xiaoming Chen and Wei Xue 11.1 Introduction 321 11.1.1 Fading in Wireless Propagation 321 11.1.1.1 Pass Loss 322 11.1.1.2 Large-Scale Fading 322 11.1.1.3 Small-Scale Fading 322 11.1.2 Diversity and Multiplexing 323 11.1.3 MIMO Systems 324 11.2 OAM Communication in Line-of-sight Environment 325 11.2.1 Conventional OAM Multiplexing 325 11.2.2 OAM Multiplexing with Spatial Equalization 329 11.3 OAM Multiplexing in Multipath Environment 337 11.3.1 Specular Reflection 337 11.3.1.1 Intra-channel Interference 338 11.3.1.2 Inter-channel Interference 341 11.3.2 Indoor Environment 343 11.3.2.1 Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) 343 11.3.2.2 Antenna misalignment 346 11.3.3 Highly Reverberant Environments 349 11.4 Conclusion 354 References 354 12 High-capacity Free-space Optical Communications Using Multiplexing of Multiple OAM Beams 357 Alan E. Willner, Runzhou Zhang, Kai Pang, Haoqian Song, Cong Liu, Hao Song, Xinzhou Su, Huibin Zhou, Nanzhe Hu, Zhe Zhao, Guodong Xie, Yongxiong Ren, Hao Huang, and Moshe Tur 12.1 Introduction 357 12.2 Challenges for an OAM Multiplexing Free-space Optical Communication System 359 12.2.1 Beam divergence 360 12.2.2 Misalignment 361 12.2.3 Atmospheric Turbulence Effects 362 12.2.4 Obstruction 364 12.2.5 Summary 364 12.3 Free-space Optical OAM Links 364 12.3.1 High-capacity OAM Multiplexed Communication Link Under Laboratory Conditions 365 12.3.2 OAM-based FSO Link Beyond Laboratory Distances 368 12.3.3 Summary 371 12.4 Inter-channel Crosstalk Mitigation Methods in OAM-multiplexed FSO Communications 371 12.4.1 Adaptive Optics for Crosstalk Mitigation 371 12.4.1.1 AO Using a Wavefront Sensor (WFS) and a Gaussian Probe Beam 372 12.4.1.2 AO Using WFS and Gaussian Probe Beam in a Quantum Communication Link 374 12.4.1.3 AO Using a Camera for Beam Intensity Measurement 376 12.4.2 Spatial Modes Manipulation for Crosstalk Mitigation 378 12.4.2.1 Turbulence Precompensation by OAM Mode Combination 378 12.4.2.2 Simultaneous Orthogonalizing and Shaping of Multiple LG Beams 380 12.4.3 Digital Signal Processing for Crosstalk Mitigation 381 12.4.3.1 MIMO Equalization for Crosstalk Mitigation in Laboratory 382 12.4.3.2 Turbulence-Resilient Beam Mixing for Crosstalk Mitigation 383 12.4.4 Summary 384 12.5 OAM Multiplexing for Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) Platforms 385 12.5.1 OAM System Design and Demonstrations for UAV Platforms 386 12.5.2 Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) Mitigation for Atmospheric Turbulence in UAV Platforms 389 12.5.3 Summary 390 12.6 OAM Multiplexing in Underwater Environments 391 12.6.1 Underwater Effects for OAM Beam Propagation 392 12.6.2 OAM Multiplexing Demonstrations in Underwater Environments 392 12.6.3 Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) Mitigation for Inter-Channel Crosstalk in Underwater Environments 394 12.6.4 Summary 394 12.7 Summary of this Chapter 394 Acknowledgment 396 References 396 Part IV Multidisciplinary Explorations of Electromagnetic Vortices 401 13 Theory of Vector Beams for Chirality and Magnetism Detection of Subwavelength Particles 403 Mina Hanifeh and Filippo Capolino 13.1 Characterization of Azimuthally and Radially Polarized Beams 403 13.2 Circular Dichroism for a Particle of Subwavelength Size 407 13.2.1 Helicity of an Azimuthally Radially Polarized Vector Beam 409 13.3 Photoinduced Force Microscopy at Nanoscale 411 13.3.1 Magnetic Photoinduced Force Microscopy by Using an APB 412 13.3.2 Chirality Photoinduced Force Microscopy 415 13.4 Conclusion 418 References 418 14 Quantum Applications of Structured Photons 423 Alessio D’Errico and Ebrahim Karimi 14.1 Introduction 423 14.2 Photonic Degrees of Freedom 424 14.3 Single Photon Source: SPDC 426 14.4 Generation and Detection of Structured Photon Quantum States 430 14.4.1 Generation of Structured Photon States 430 14.4.2 Detection of Structured Photons 433 14.5 Quantum Key Distribution 434 14.5.1 BB84 Protocol 436 14.5.2 Alignment-free QKD 437 14.5.3 High-dimensional QKD 438 14.6 Quantum Simulation with Quantum Walks 442 14.6.1 Quantum Walks in the OAM Space 443 14.6.2 Shaping the Walker Space: Cyclic Walks and Walks on 2D Lattices 444 14.6.3 Applications: Wavepacket Dynamics and Detection of Topological Phases 446 14.7 Outlook 450 References 450 Index 457

Read more less

Book SynopsisSPECTRUM SHARING IN COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS Discover the latest advances in spectrum sharing in wireless networks from two internationally recognized experts in the fieldSpectrum Sharing in Cognitive Radio Networks: Towards Highly Connected Environments delivers an in-depth and insightful examination of hybrid spectrum access techniques with advanced frame structures designed for efficient spectrum utilization. The accomplished authors present the energy and spectrum efficient frameworks used in high-demand distributed architectures by relying on the self-scheduled medium access control (SMC-MAC) protocol in cognitive radio networks.The book begins with an exploration of the fundamentals of recent advances in spectrum sharing techniques before moving onto advanced frame structures with spectrum accessing approaches and the role of spectrum prediction and spectrum monitoring to eliminate interference. The authors also cover spectrum mobility, interference,Table of ContentsPreface xiii Special Acknowledgements xxi List of Acronyms xxiii List of Figures xxvii List of Tables xxxiii List of Symbols xxxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Connected Environments 2 1.1.2 Evolution of Wireless Communication 5 1.1.3 Third Generation Partnership Project 10 1.2 Cognitive Radio Technology 10 1.2.1 Spectrum Accessing/Sharing Techniques 13 1.2.1.1 Interweave Spectrum Access 14 1.2.1.2 Underlay Spectrum Access 17 1.2.1.3 Overlay Spectrum Access 17 1.2.1.4 Hybrid Spectrum Access 17 1.3 Implementation of CR Networks 20 1.4 Motivation 22 1.5 Organization of Book 23 1.6 Summary 27 References 27 2 Advanced Frame Structures in Cognitive Radio Networks 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Related Work 40 2.2.1 Frame Structures 40 2.2.2 Spectrum Accessing Strategies 41 2.3 Proposed Frame Structures for HSA Technique 43 2.4 Analysis of Throughput and Data Loss 45 2.5 Simulations and Results 47 2.6 Summary 50 References 51 3 Cognitive Radio Network with Spectrum Prediction and Monitoring Techniques 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Related Work 57 3.2.1 Spectrum Prediction 57 3.2.2 Spectrum Monitoring 58 3.3 System Models 59 3.3.1 System Model for Approach-1 59 3.3.2 System Model for Approach-2 60 3.4 Performance Analysis 61 3.4.1 Throughput Analysis Using Approach-1 61 3.4.2 Analysis of Performance Metrics of the Approach-2 65 3.5 Results and Discussion 67 3.5.1 Proposed Approach-1 67 3.5.2 Proposed Approach-2 69 3.6 Summary 72 References 72 4 Effect of Spectrum Prediction in Cognitive Radio Networks 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.1.1 Spectrum Access Techniques 78 4.2 System Model 80 4.3 Throughput Analysis 87 4.4 Simulation Results and Discussion 89 4.5 Summary 93 References 94 5 Effect of Imperfect Spectrum Monitoring on Cognitive Radio Networks 97 5.1 Introduction 97 5.2 Related Work 99 5.2.1 Spectrum Sensing 99 5.2.2 Spectrum Monitoring 100 5.3 System Model 101 5.4 Performance Analysis of Proposed System Using Imperfect Spectrum Monitoring 102 5.4.1 Computation of Ratio of the Achieved Throughput to Data Loss 108 5.4.2 Computation of Power Wastage 108 5.4.3 Computation of Interference Efficiency 109 5.4.4 Computation of Energy Efficiency 109 5.5 Results and Discussion 110 5.6 Summary 115 References 116 6 Cooperative Spectrum Monitoring in Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Cognitive Radio Networks 121 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Background 122 6.3 System Model 124 6.4 Performance Analysis of Proposed CRN 126 6.4.1 Computation of Achieved Throughput and Data Loss 130 6.4.2 Computation of Interference Efficiency 131 6.4.3 Computation of Energy Efficiency 131 6.5 Results and Discussion 132 6.5.1 Homogeneous Cognitive Radio Network 132 6.5.2 Heterogeneous Cognitive Radio Networks 134 6.6 Summary 143 References 143 7 Spectrum Mobility in Cognitive Radio Networks Using Spectrum Prediction and Monitoring Techniques 147 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 System Model 151 7.3 Performance Analysis 153 7.4 Results and Discussion 156 7.5 Summary 162 References 163 8 Hybrid Self-Scheduled Multichannel Medium Access Control Protocol in Cognitive Radio Networks 167 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Related Work 169 8.2.1 CR-MAC Protocols 169 8.2.2 Interference at PU 171 8.3 System Model and Proposed Hybrid Self-Scheduled Multichannel MAC Protocol 172 8.3.1 System Model 172 8.3.2 Proposed HSMC-MAC Protocol 173 8.4 Performance Analysis 174 8.4.1 With Perfect Spectrum Sensing 176 8.4.2 With Imperfect Spectrum Sensing 178 8.4.3 More Feasible Scenarios 180 8.5 Simulations and Results Analysis 182 8.5.1 With Perfect Spectrum Sensing 182 8.5.2 With Imperfect Spectrum Sensing 185 8.6 Summary 190 References 190 9 Frameworks of Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access Techniques in Cognitive Radio Networks 195 9.1 Introduction 195 9.1.1 Related Work 196 9.1.2 Motivation 199 9.1.3 Organization 199 9.2 CR Spectrum Accessing Strategies 199 9.3 Functions of NOMA System for Uplink and Downlink Scenarios 204 9.3.1 Downlink Scenario for Cellular-NOMA 204 9.3.2 Uplink Scenario for Cellular-NOMA 207 9.4 Proposed Frameworks of CR with NOMA 208 9.4.1 Framework-1 209 9.4.2 Framework-2 210 9.5 Simulation Environment and Results 212 9.6 Research Potentials for NOMA and CR-NOMA Implementations 213 9.6.1 Imperfect CSI 214 9.6.2 Spectrum Hand-off Management 215 9.6.3 Standardization 215 9.6.4 Less Complex and Cost-Effective Systems 215 9.6.5 Energy-Efficient Design and Frameworks 216 9.6.6 Quality-of-Experience Management 216 9.6.7 Power Allocation Strategy for CUs to Implement NOMA Without Interfering PU 217 9.6.8 Cooperative CR-NOMA 217 9.6.9 Interference Cancellation Techniques 217 9.6.10 Security Aspects in CR-NOMA 218 9.6.11 Role of User Clustering and Challenges 218 9.6.12 Wireless Power Transfer to NOMA 219 9.6.13 Multicell NOMA with Coordinated Multipoint Transmission 220 9.6.14 Multiple-Carrier NOMA 221 9.6.15 Cross-Layer Design 221 9.6.16 MIMO-NOMA-CR 222 9.7 Summary 222 References 223 10 Performance Analysis of MIMO-Based CR-NOMA Communication Systems 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Related Work for Several Combinations of CR, NOMA, and MIMO Systems 231 10.3 System Model 234 10.3.1 Downlink Scenarios 236 10.3.2 Uplink Scenario 238 10.4 Performance Analysis 238 10.4.1 Downlink Scenario 238 10.4.1.1 Throughput Computation for MIMO-CR-NOMA 239 10.4.1.2 Throughput Computation for CR-NOMA Systems 240 10.4.1.3 Sum Throughput for CR-OMA, CR-NOMA, CR-MIMO, and CR-NOMA-MIMO Frameworks 240 10.4.2 Uplink Scenario 241 10.4.2.1 Throughput Computation for MIMO-CR-NOMA 241 10.4.2.2 Throughput Calculation for CR-NOMA Systems 242 10.4.2.3 Sum Throughput for CR-OMA, CR-NOMA, CR-MIMO, and CR-NOMA-MIMO Frameworks 242 10.4.2.4 Computation of Interference Efficiency of CU-4 In Case of CR-MIMO-NOMA 243 10.5 Simulation and Results Analysis 243 10.5.1 Simulation Results for Downlink Scenario 243 10.5.2 Simulation Results for Uplink Scenario 245 10.6 Summary 249 References 250 11 Interference Management in Cognitive Radio Networks 255 11.1 Introduction 255 11.1.1 White space 257 11.1.2 Grey Spaces 257 11.1.3 Black Spaces 257 11.1.4 Interference Temperature 257 11.2 Interfering and Non-interfering CRN 258 11.2.1 Interfering CRN 258 11.2.2 Non-Interfering CRN 259 11.3 Interference Cancellation Techniques in the CRN 261 11.3.1 At the CU Transmitter 261 11.3.2 At the CR-Receiver 264 11.4 Cross-Layer Interference Mitigation in Cognitive Radio Networks 268 11.5 Interference Management in Cognitive Radio Networks via Cognitive Cycle Constituents 269 11.5.1 Spectrum Sensing 269 11.5.2 Spectrum Prediction 269 11.5.3 Transmission Below PUs’ Interference Tolerable Limit 271 11.5.4 Using Advanced Encoding Techniques 271 11.5.5 Spectrum Monitoring 272 11.6 Summary 274 References 274 12 Simulation Frameworks and Potential Research Challenges for Internet-of-Vehicles Networks 281 12.1 Introduction 281 12.1.1 Consumer IoT 283 12.1.2 Industrial IoT 283 12.2 Applications of CIoT 284 12.2.1 Smart Home and Automation 284 12.2.2 Smart Wearables 284 12.2.3 Home Security and Smart Domestics 285 12.2.4 Smart Farming 285 12.3 Applications of Industrial IoT 285 12.3.1 Smart Industry 286 12.3.2 Smart Grid/Utilities 286 12.3.3 Smart Communication 286 12.3.4 Smart City 287 12.3.5 Smart Energy Management 287 12.3.6 Smart Retail Management 288 12.3.7 Robotics 288 12.3.8 Smart Cars/Connected Vehicles 289 12.4 Communication Frameworks for IoVs 289 12.4.1 Vehicle-to-Vehicle (V2V) Communication 291 12.4.2 Vehicle to Infrastructure (V2I) Communication 292 12.4.3 Infrastructure to Vehicles (I2V) Communication 293 12.4.4 Vehicle-to-Broadband (V2B) Communication 293 12.4.5 Vehicle-to-Pedestrians (V2P) Communication 293 12.5 Simulation Environments for Internet-of-Vehicles 295 12.5.1 SUMO 296 12.5.2 Network Simulator (NetSim) 296 12.5.3 Ns-2 297 12.5.4 Ns-3 297 12.5.5 OMNeT++ 298 12.6 Potential Research Challenges 299 12.6.1 Social Challenges 299 12.6.2 Technical Challenges 300 12.7 Summary 302 References 302 13 Radio Resource Management in Internet-of-Vehicles 311 13.1 Introduction 311 13.1.1 Dedicated Short-Range Communication 313 13.1.2 Wireless Access for Vehicular Environments 314 13.1.3 Communication Access for Land Mobile (CALM) 314 13.2 Cellular Communication 315 13.2.1 3GPP Releases 315 13.2.2 Long-Term Evolution 317 13.2.3 New Radio 317 13.2.4 Dynamic Spectrum Access 318 13.3 Role of Cognitive Radio for Spectrum Management 319 13.4 Effect of Mobile Nature of Vehicles/Nodes on the Networking 320 13.5 Spectrum Sharing in IoVs 322 13.5.1 Spectrum Sensing Scenarios 322 13.5.2 Spectrum Sharing Scenarios 324 13.5.3 Spectrum Mobility/Handoff Scenarios 325 13.6 Frameworks of Vehicular Networks with Cognitive Radio 326 13.6.1 CR-Based IoVs Networks Architecture 327 13.7 Key Potentials and Research Challenges 328 13.7.1 Key Potentials 328 13.7.2 Research Challenges 329 13.8 Summary 333 References 333 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisGet a firm handle on the engineering reliability process with this insightful and complete resourceNamed one of the Best Industrial Management eBooks of All Time by BookAuthorityAs featured on CNN, Forbes and Inc BookAuthority identifies and rates the best books in the world, based on recommendations by thought leaders and expertsThe newly and thoroughly revised 3rd Edition of Reliability Engineering delivers a comprehensive and insightful analysis of this crucial field. Accomplished author, professor, and engineer, Elsayed. A. Elsayed includes new examples and end-of-chapter problems to illustrate concepts, new chapters on resilience and the physics of failure, revised chapters on reliability and hazard functions, and more case studies illustrating the approaches and methodologies described within.The book combines analyses of system reliability estimation for time independent and time dependent models with the construction of the likeTable of ContentsPreface xi Prelude xv Chapter 1 Reliability and Hazard Functions 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Reliability Definition and Estimation 5 1.3 Hazard Functions 16 1.4 Multivariate Hazard Rate 57 1.5 Competing Risk Model and Mixture of Failure Rates 60 1.6 Discrete Probability Distributions 68 1.7 Mean Time to Failure 71 1.8 Mean Residual Life 74 1.9 Time of First Failure 76 Problems 79 References 91 Chapter 2 System Reliability Evaluation 95 2.1 Introduction 95 2.2 Reliability Block Diagrams 96 2.3 Series Systems 99 2.4 Parallel Systems 101 2.5 Parallel–Series, Series–Parallel, and Mixed-Parallel Systems 103 2.6 Consecutive-k-out-of-n:F System 113 2.7 Reliability of k-out-of-n Systems 121 2.8 Reliability of k-out-of-n Balanced Systems 123 2.9 Complex Reliability Systems 125 2.10 Special Networks 143 2.11 Multistate Models 144 2.12 Redundancy 150 2.13 Importance Measures of Components 154 2.14 Weighted Importance Measures of Components 165 Problems 167 References 182 Chapter 3 Time- and Failure-Dependent Reliability 185 3.1 Introduction 185 3.2 Nonrepairable Systems 185 3.3 Mean Time to Failure 194 3.4 Repairable Systems 204 3.5 Availability 215 3.6 Dependent Failures 223 3.7 Redundancy and Standby 228 Problems 238 References 247 Chapter 4 Estimation Methods of the Parameters 251 4.1 Introduction 251 4.2 Method of Moments 252 4.3 The Likelihood Function 260 4.4 Method of Least Squares 278 4.5 Bayesian Approach 284 4.6 Bootstrap Method 288 4.7 Generation of Failure Time Data 290 Problems 292 References 298 Chapter 5 Parametric Reliability Models 301 5.1 Introduction 301 5.2 Approach 1: Historical Data 302 5.3 Approach 2: Operational Life Testing 303 5.4 Approach 3: Burn-in Testing 303 5.5 Approach 4: Accelerated Life Testing 304 5.6 Types of Censoring 305 5.7 The Exponential Distribution 308 5.8 The Rayleigh Distribution 322 5.9 The Weibull Distribution 331 5.10 The Lognormal Distribution 343 5.11 The Gamma Distribution 350 5.12 The Extreme Value Distribution 357 5.13 The Half-Logistic Distribution 360 5.14 The Frechet Distribution 367 5.15 The Birnbaum–Saunders Distribution 369 5.16 Linear Models 372 5.17 Multicensored Data 374 Problems 378 References 389 Chapter 6 Accelerated Life Testing 393 6.1 Introduction 393 6.2 Types of Reliability Testing 394 6.3 Accelerated Life Testing 403 6.4 ALT Models 406 6.5 Statistics-Based Models: Nonparametric 420 6.6 Physics-Statistics-Based Models 437 6.7 Physics-Experimental-Based Models 446 6.8 Degradation Models 449 6.9 Statistical Degradation Models 453 6.10 Accelerated Life Testing Plans 459 Problems 463 References 476 Chapter 7 Physics of Failures 481 7.1 Introduction 481 7.2 Fault Tree Analysis 481 7.3 Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 488 7.4 Stress–Strength Relationship 490 7.5 PoF: Failure Time Models 492 7.6 PoF: Degradation Models 512 Problems 519 References 524 Chapter 8 System Resilience 527 8.1 Introduction 527 8.2 Resilience Overview 528 8.3 Multi-Hazard 528 8.4 Resilience Modeling 532 8.5 Resilience Definitions and Attributes 535 8.6 Resilience Quantification 536 8.7 Importance Measures 542 8.8 Cascading Failures 544 8.9 Cyber Networks 546 Problems 557 References 559 Chapter 9 Renewal Processes and Expected Number of Failures 563 9.1 Introduction 563 9.2 Parametric Renewal Function Estimation 564 9.3 Nonparametric Renewal Function Estimation 578 9.4 Alternating Renewal Process 588 9.5 Approximations of M(t) 591 9.6 Other Types of Renewal Processes 594 9.7 The Variance of the Number of Renewals 595 9.8 Confidence Intervals for the Renewal Function 601 9.9 Remaining Life at Time t 604 9.10 Poisson Processes 606 9.11 Laplace Transform and Random Variables 609 Problems 611 References 619 Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection 621 10.1 Introduction 621 10.2 Preventive Maintenance and Replacement Models: Cost Minimization 622 10.3 Preventive Maintenance and Replacement Models: Downtime Minimization 631 10.4 Minimal Repair Models 634 10.5 Optimum Replacement Intervals for Systems Subject to Shocks 639 10.6 Preventive Maintenance and Number of Spares 642 10.7 Group Maintenance 649 10.8 Periodic Inspection 653 10.9 Condition-Based Maintenance 663 10.10 On-Line Surveillance and Monitoring 665 Problems 669 References 676 Chapter 11 Warranty Models 679 11.1 Introduction 679 11.2 Warranty Models for Nonrepairable Products 681 11.3 Warranty Models for Repairable Products 701 11.4 Two-Dimensional Warranty 716 11.5 Warranty Claims 718 Problems 725 References 731 Chapter 12 Case Studies 733 12.1 Case 1: A Crane Spreader Subsystem 733 12.2 Case 2: Design of a Production Line 739 12.3 Case 3: An Explosive Detection System 746 12.4 Case 4: Reliability of Furnace Tubes 752 12.5 Case 5: Reliability of Smart Cards 757 12.6 Case 6: Life Distribution of Survivors of Qualification and Certification 760 12.7 Case 7: Reliability Modeling of Telecommunication Networks for the Air Traffic Control System 767 12.8 Case 8: System Design Using Reliability Objectives 776 12.9 Case 9: Reliability Modeling of Hydraulic Fracture Pumps 786 12.10 Case 10: Availability of Medical Information Technology System 791 12.11 Case 11: Producer and Consumer Risk in System of Systems 797 References 804 Appendices Appendix A Gamma Table 805 Appendix B Computer Program To Calculate the Reliability of a Consecutive-k-Out-of-n:F System 811 Appendix C Optimum Arrangement of Components In Consecutive-2-Out-of-N:F Systems 813 Appendix D Computer Program For Solving the Time-Dependent Equations 821 Appendix E The Newton–Raphson Method 823 Appendix F Coefficients of bi’s For i = 1, …, n 829 Appendix G Variance of θ∗2’s In Terms of θ22/n and K3/K∗2 843 Appendix H Computer Listing of the Newton–Raphson Method 849 Appendix I Coefficients (ai and bi) of the Best Estimates of the Mean (μ) and Standard Deviation (σ) In Censored Samples Up To n = 20 From a Normal Population 851 Appendix J Baker’s Algorithm 865 Appendix K Standard Normal Distribution 869 Appendix L Critical Values of χ2 875 Appendix M Solutions of Selected Problems 879 Author Index 887 Subject Index 895

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acronyms xv 1 Introduction to Remote Sensing 1 1.1 How Remote Sensing Works 4 References 9 2 Satellite Orbits 11 2.1 Computation of Elliptical Orbits 15 2.2 Low Earth Orbits 16 2.3 Geosynchronous Orbits 23 2.4 Molniya Orbit 28 2.5 Satellite Orbit Prediction 29 2.6 Satellite Orbital Trade-offs 29 References 31 3 Infrared Sensing 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Radiometry 34 3.3 Radiometric Sensor Response 37 3.3.1 Derivation 37 3.3.2 Example Sensor Response Calculations 40 3.3.3 Response of a Sensor with a Partially-Filled FOV 40 3.4 Blackbody Radiation 41 3.4.1 Planck’s Radiation Law 41 3.4.2 Microwave Blackbody 42 3.4.3 Low-Frequency and High-Frequency Limits 43 3.4.4 Stefan–Boltzmann Law 43 3.4.5 Wein’s Displacement Law 44 3.4.6 Emissivity 44 3.4.7 Equivalent Blackbody Temperature 44 3.5 IR Sea Surface Temperature 45 3.5.1 Contributors to Infrared Measurements 45 3.5.2 Correction of Low-Altitude Infrared Measurements 46 3.5.3 Correction of High-Altitude Infrared Measurements 48 3.6 Atmospheric Radiative Transfer 49 3.7 Propagation in Seawater 54 3.8 Smooth Surface Reflectance 58 3.9 Rough Surface Reflectance 60 3.10 Ocean Thermal Boundary Layer 63 3.11 Operational SST Measurements 66 3.11.1 AVHRR Instrument 66 3.11.2 AVHRR Processing 68 3.11.3 AVHRR SST Algorithms 70 3.11.4 Example AVHRR Images 71 3.11.5 VIIRS Instrument 73 3.11.6 SST Accuracy 75 3.11.7 Applications 77 3.12 Land Temperature – Theory 77 3.13 Operational Land Temperature 80 3.14 Terrestrial Evapotranspiration 86 3.15 Geologic Remote Sensing 87 3.15.1 Linear Mixture Theory and Spectral Unmixing 90 3.16 Atmospheric Sounding 91 References 95 4 Optical Sensing – Ocean Color 99 4.1 Introduction to Ocean Color 99 4.2 Fresnel Reflection 103 4.3 Skylight 106 4.4 Water-Leaving Radiance 107 4.5 Water Column Reflectance 110 4.5.1 Pure Seawater 112 4.5.2 Case 1 Waters 113 4.5.3 Case 2 Waters 114 4.6 Remote Sensing Reflectance 115 4.7 Ocean Color Data – Case 1 Water 117 4.7.1 Other Uses of Ocean Color 118 4.8 Atmospheric Corrections 119 4.9 Ocean Color Satellite Sensors 124 4.9.1 General History 124 4.9.2 SeaWiFS 126 4.9.3 MODIS 130 4.9.4 VIIRS 133 4.10 Ocean Chlorophyll Fluorescence 135 References 140 5 Optical Sensing – Land Surfaces 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Radiation over a Lambertian Surface 143 5.3 Atmospheric Corrections 147 5.4 Scattering from Vegetation 147 5.5 Normalized Difference Vegetation Index 153 5.6 Vegetation Condition and Temperature Condition Indices 158 5.7 Vegetation Indices from Hyperspectral Data 159 5.8 Landsat Satellites 161 5.9 High-resolution EO sensors 164 5.9.1 Introduction 164 5.9.2 First-Generation Systems 164 5.9.3 Second-Generation Systems 168 5.9.4 Third-Generation Systems 172 5.9.5 Commercial Smallsat Systems 174 References 176 6 Microwave Radiometry 179 6.1 Introduction to Microwave Radiometry 179 6.2 Microwave Radiometers 180 6.3 Microwave Radiometry 181 6.3.1 Antenna Pattern 182 6.3.2 Antenna Temperature 184 6.3.3 Examples 185 6.4 Polarization 185 6.4.1 Basic Polarization 185 6.4.2 Jones Vector 187 6.4.3 Stokes Parameters 187 6.5 Passive Microwave Sensing of the Ocean 188 6.5.1 Atmospheric Transmission 189 6.5.2 Seawater Emissivity 189 6.5.3 Fresnel Reflection Coefficients, Emissivity, and Skin Depth 190 6.5.4 Sky Radiometric Temperature 191 6.5.5 Sea Surface Brightness Temperature 193 6.5.6 Wind Direction from Polarization 197 6.6 Satellite Microwave Radiometers 198 6.6.1 SMMR 198 6.6.2 SSM/I and SSMI/S 198 6.6.3 SSM/I Wind Algorithm 200 6.6.4 AMSR-E 203 6.6.5 WindSat 204 6.7 Microwave Radiometry of Sea Ice 207 6.8 Sea Ice Measurements 213 6.9 Microwave Radiometry of Land Surfaces 218 6.10 Atmospheric Sounding 222 References 226 7 Radar 229 7.1 Radar Range Equation 229 7.2 Radar Cross-Section 232 7.3 Radar Resolution 236 7.4 Pulse Compression 239 7.5 Types of Radar 244 7.6 Example Terrestrial Radars 245 7.6.1 Weather Radars 245 7.6.2 HF Surface Wave Radar 248 References 249 8 Altimeters 251 8.1 Introduction to Altimeters 251 8.2 Specular Scattering 254 8.3 Altimeter Wind Speed 257 8.4 Altimeter Significant Wave Height 260 8.5 Altimeter Sea Surface Height 263 8.5.1 Introduction 263 8.5.2 Pulse-limited vs Beam-limited Altimeter 263 8.5.3 Altimeter Pulse Timing Precision 264 8.5.4 Altimeter Range Corrections 264 8.6 Sea Surface Topography 268 8.7 Measuring Gravity and Bathymetry 274 8.8 Delay-Doppler Altimeter 275 References 278 9 Scatterometers 281 9.1 Ocean Waves 281 9.2 Bragg Scattering 287 9.3 RCS Dependence on Wind 291 9.4 Scatterometer Algorithms 293 9.5 Fan-Beam Scatterometers 297 9.6 Conical-Scan Pencil-Beam Scatterometers 300 9.7 Conical-Scan Fan-Beam Scatterometers 304 References 307 10 Synthetic Aperture Radar 309 10.1 Introduction to SAR 309 10.2 SAR Azimuth Resolution 313 10.2.1 Doppler Time History 313 10.2.2 Azimuth Extent, Integration Time, and Doppler Bandwidth 316 10.2.3 Azimuth Resolution 316 10.2.4 SAR Timing, Resolution, and Swath Limits 318 10.2.5 The Magic of SAR Exposed 319 10.3 SAR Image Formation and Image Quality 320 10.4 SAR Imaging of Moving Scatterers 322 10.5 Multimode SARs 325 10.6 Polarimetric SAR 326 10.6.1 Polarimetric Response of Canonical Targets 327 10.6.2 Decompositions 328 10.6.3 Compact Polarimetry 329 10.7 SAR Systems 330 10.7.1 Radarsat-1 332 10.7.2 Envisat 334 10.7.3 PALSAR 335 10.7.4 Radarsat-2 335 10.7.5 TerraSAR-X 335 10.7.6 COSMO-SkyMed 335 10.7.7 Sentinel-1 336 10.7.8 Radarsat Constellation Mission (RCM) 337 10.7.9 Military SARs 337 10.8 Advanced SARs 339 10.8.1 Cross-Track Interferometry 339 10.8.2 Along-Track Interferometry 341 10.8.3 Differential Interferometry 344 10.8.4 Tomographic Interferometry 344 10.8.5 High-Resolution, Wide-Swath SAR 344 10.9 SAR Applications 346 10.9.1 SAR Ocean Surface Waves 347 10.9.2 SAR Winds 353 10.9.3 SAR Bathymetry 360 10.9.4 SAR Ocean Internal Waves 364 10.9.5 SAR Sea Ice 370 10.9.6 SAR Oil Slicks and Ship Detection 374 10.9.7 SAR Land Mapping Applications and Distortions 380 10.9.8 SAR Agricultural Applications 386 References 388 11 Lidar 393 11.1 Introduction 393 11.2 Types of Lidar 393 11.2.1 Direct vs Coherent Detection 394 11.3 Processes Driving Lidar Returns 395 11.3.1 Elastic Scattering 395 11.3.2 Inelastic Scattering 396 11.3.3 Fluorescence 397 11.4 Lidar Range Equation 397 11.4.1 Point Scattering Target 397 11.4.2 Lambertian Surface 398 11.4.3 Elastic Volume Scattering 398 11.4.4 Bathymetric Lidar 398 11.5 Lidar Receiver Types 400 11.5.1 Linear (full waveform) Lidar 400 11.5.2 Single Photon Lidar 401 11.6 Lidar Altimetry 402 11.6.1 NASA Airborne Topographic Mapper 402 11.6.2 Space-Based Lidar Altimeters (IceSat-1 & 2) 403 11.6.3 Bathymetric Lidar 405 11.7 Lidar Atmospheric Sensing 405 11.7.1 ADM-Aeolus 405 11.7.2 NASA CALIOP 408 References 411 12 Other Remote Sensing and Future Missions 413 12.1 Other Types of Remote Sensing 413 12.1.1 GRACE 413 12.1.2 Limb Sounding 414 12.2 Future Missions 414 12.2.1 NASA Missions 415 12.2.2 ESA Missions 416 12.2.3 Summary 418 References 419 Appendix A Constants 421 Appendix B Definitions of Common Angles 423 Appendix C Example Radiometric Calculations 427 Appendix D Optical Sensors 433 D.1 Example Optical Sensors 435 D.1.1 Photodiodes 435 D.1.2 Charge-Coupled Devices 437 D.1.3 CMOS Image Sensors 439 D.1.4 Bolometers and Microbolometers 440 D.2 Optical Sensor Design Examples 442 D.2.1 Computing Exposure Times 442 D.2.2 Impact of Digitization and Shot Noise on Contrast Detection 444 References 445 Appendix E Radar Design Example 447 Appendix F Remote Sensing Resources on the Internet 455 F.1 Information and Tutorials 455 F.2 Data 455 F.3 Data Processing Tools 456 F.4 Satellite and Sensor Databases 456 F.5 Other 456 Appendix G Useful Trigonometric Identities 457 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xvii List of Contributors xix Preface xxv Acknowledgments xxxiii 1 Fog, Edge and Pervasive Computing in Intelligent Internet of Things Driven Applications in Healthcare: Challenges, Limitations and Future Use 1Afroj Alam, Sahar Qazi, Naiyar Iqbal, and Khalid Raza 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Why Fog, Edge, and Pervasive Computing? 3 1.3 Technologies Related to Fog and Edge Computing 6 1.4 Concept of Intelligent IoT Application in Smart (Fog) Computing Era 9 1.5 The Hierarchical Architecture of Fog/Edge Computing 12 1.6 Applications of Fog, Edge and Pervasive Computing in IoT-based Healthcare 15 1.7 Issues, Challenges, and Opportunity 17 1.7.1 Security and Privacy Issues 18 1.7.2 Resource Management 19 1.7.3 Programming Platform 19 1.8 Conclusion 20 Bibliography 20 2 Future Opportunistic Fog/Edge Computational Models and their Limitations 27Sonia Singla, Naveen Kumar Bhati, and S. Aswath 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 What are the Benefits of Edge and Fog Computing for the Mechanical Web of Things (IoT)? 32 2.3 Disadvantages 34 2.4 Challenges 34 2.5 Role in Health Care 35 2.6 Blockchain and Fog, Edge Computing 38 2.7 How Blockchain will Illuminate Human Services Issues 40 2.8 Uses of Blockchain in the Future 41 2.9 Uses of Blockchain in Health Care 42 2.10 Edge Computing Segmental Analysis 42 2.11 Uses of Fog Computing 43 2.12 Analytics in Fog Computing 44 2.13 Conclusion 44 Bibliography 44 3 Automating Elicitation Technique Selection using Machine Learning 47Hatim M. Elhassan Ibrahim Dafallaa, Nazir Ahmad, Mohammed Burhanur Rehman, Iqrar Ahmad, and Rizwan khan 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Related Work 48 3.3 Model: Requirement Elicitation Technique Selection Model 52 3.3.1 Determining Key Attributes 54 3.3.2 Selection Attributes 54 3.3.2.1 Analyst Experience 55 3.3.2.2 Number of Stakeholders 55 3.3.2.3 Technique Time 56 3.3.2.4 Level of Information 56 3.3.3 Selection Attributes Dataset 56 3.3.3.1 Mapping the Selection Attributes 57 3.3.4 k-nearest Neighbor Algorithm Application 57 3.4 Analysis and Results 60 3.5 The Error Rate 61 3.6 Validation 61 3.6.1 Discussion of the Results of the Experiment 62 3.7 Conclusion 62 Bibliography 65 4 Machine Learning Frameworks and Algorithms for Fog and Edge Computing 67Murali Mallikarjuna Rao Perumalla, Sanjay Kumar Singh, Aditya Khamparia, Anjali Goyal, and Ashish Mishra 4.1 Introduction 68 4.1.1 Fog Computing and Edge Computing 68 4.1.2 Pervasive Computing 68 4.2 Overview of Machine Learning Frameworks for Fog and Edge Computing 69 4.2.1 TensorFlow 69 4.2.2 Keras 70 4.2.3 PyTorch 70 4.2.4 TensorFlow Lite 70 4.2.4.1 Use Pre-train Models 70 4.2.4.2 Convert the Model 70 4.2.4.3 On-device Inference 71 4.2.4.4 Model Optimization 71 4.2.5 Machine Learning and Deep Learning Techniques 71 4.2.5.1 Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement Learning 71 4.2.5.2 Machine Learning, Deep Learning Techniques 72 4.2.5.3 Deep Learning Techniques 75 4.2.5.4 Efficient Deep Learning Algorithms for Inference 77 4.2.6 Pros and Cons of ML Algorithms for Fog and Edge Computing 78 4.2.6.1 Advantages using ML Algorithms 78 4.2.6.2 Disadvantages of using ML Algorithms 79 4.2.7 Hybrid ML Model for Smart IoT Applications 79 4.2.7.1 Multi-Task Learning 79 4.2.7.2 Ensemble Learning 80 4.2.8 Possible Applications in Fog Era using Machine Learning 81 4.2.8.1 Computer Vision 81 4.2.8.2 ML- Assisted Healthcare Monitoring System 81 4.2.8.3 Smart Homes 81 4.2.8.4 Behavior Analyses 82 4.2.8.5 Monitoring in Remote Areas and Industries 82 4.2.8.6 Self-Driving Cars 82 Bibliography 82 5 Integrated Cloud Based Library Management in Intelligent IoT driven Applications 85Md Robiul Alam Robel, Subrato Bharati, Prajoy Podder, and M. Rubaiyat Hossain Mondal 5.1 Introduction 86 5.1.1 Execution Plan for the Mobile Application 86 5.1.2 Main Contribution 86 5.2 Understanding Library Management 87 5.3 Integration of Mobile Platform with the Physical Library- Brief Concept 88 5.4 Database (Cloud Based) - A Must have Component for Library Automation 88 5.5 IoT Driven Mobile Based Library Management - General Concept 89 5.6 IoT Involved Real Time GUI (Cross Platform) Available to User 93 5.7 IoT Challenges 98 5.7.1 Infrastructure Challenges 99 5.7.2 Security Challenges 99 5.7.3 Societal Challenges 100 5.7.4 Commercial Challenges 101 5.8 Conclusion 102 Bibliography 104 6 A Systematic and Structured Review of Intelligent Systems for Diagnosis of Renal Cancer 105Nikita, Harsh Sadawarti, Balwinder Kaur, and Jimmy Singla 6.1 Introduction 106 6.2 Related Works 107 6.3 Conclusion 119 Bibliography 119 7 Location Driven Edge Assisted Device and Solutions for Intelligent Transportation 123Saravjeet Singh and Jaiteg Singh 7.1 Introduction to Fog and Edge Computing 124 7.1.1 Need for Fog and Edge Computing 124 7.1.2 Fog Computing 125 7.1.2.1 Application Areas of Fog Computing 125 7.1.3 Edge Computing 126 7.1.3.1 Advantages of Edge Computing 127 7.1.3.2 Application Areas of Fog Computing 129 7.2 Introduction to Transportation System 129 7.3 Route Finding Process 131 7.3.1 Challenges Associated with Land Navigation and Routing Process 132 7.4 Edge Architecture for Route Finding 133 7.5 Technique Used 135 7.6 Algorithms Used for the Location Identification and Route Finding Process 137 7.6.1 Location Identification 137 7.6.2 Path Generation Technique 138 7.7 Results and Discussions 140 7.7.1 Output 140 7.7.2 Benefits of Edge-based Routing 143 7.8 Conclusion 145 Bibliography 146 8 Design and Simulation of MEMS for Automobile Condition Monitoring Using COMSOL Multiphysics Simulator 149Natasha Tiwari, Anil Kumar, Pallavi Asthana, Sumita Mishra, and Bramah Hazela 8.1 Introduction 149 8.2 Related Work 151 8.3 Vehicle Condition Monitoring through Acoustic Emission 151 8.4 Piezo-resistive Micro Electromechanical Sensors for Monitoring the Faults Through AE 152 8.5 Designing of MEM Sensor 153 8.6 Experimental Setup 153 8.6.1 FFT Analysis of Automotive Diesel Engine Sound Recording using MATLAB 155 8.6.2 Design of MEMS Sensor using COMSOL Multiphysics 155 8.6.3 Electrostatic Study Steps for the Optimized Tri-plate Comb Structure 156 8.7 Result and Discussions 157 8.8 Conclusion 158 Bibliography 158 9 IoT Driven Healthcare Monitoring System 161Md Robiul Alam Robel, Subrato Bharati, Prajoy Podder, and M. Rubaiyat Hossain Mondal 9.1 Introduction 161 9.1.1 Complementary Aspects of Cloud IoT in Healthcare Applications 162 9.1.2 Main Contribution 164 9.2 General Concept for IoT Based Healthcare System 164 9.3 View of the Overall IoT Healthcare System- Tiers Explained 165 9.4 A Brief Design of the IoT Healthcare Architecture-individual Block Explanation 166 9.5 Models/Frameworks for IoT use in Healthcare 168 9.6 IoT e-Health System Model 171 9.7 Process Flow for the Overall Model 172 9.8 Conclusion 173 Bibliography 175 10 Fog Computing as Future Perspective in Vehicular Ad hoc Networks 177Harjit Singh, Dr. Vijay Laxmi, Dr. Arun Malik, and Dr. Isha 10.1 Introduction 178 10.2 Future VANET: Primary Issues and Specifications 180 10.3 Fog Computing 181 10.3.1 Fog Computing Concept 183 10.3.2 Fog Technology Characterization 183 10.4 Related Works in Cloud and Fog Computing 185 10.5 Fog and Cloud Computing-based Technology Applications in VANET 186 10.6 Challenges of Fog Computing in VANET 188 10.7 Issues of Fog Computing in VANET 189 10.8 Conclusion 190 Bibliography 191 11 An Overview to Design an Efficient and Secure Fog-assisted Data Collection Method in the Internet of Things 193Sofia, Arun Malik, Isha, and Aditya Khamparia 11.1 Introduction 193 11.2 Related Works 194 11.3 Overview of the Chapter 196 11.4 Data Collection in the IoT 197 11.5 Fog Computing 197 11.5.1 Why fog Computing for Data Collection in IoT? 197 11.5.2 Architecture of Fog Computing 200 11.5.3 Features of Fog Computing 200 11.5.4 Threats of Fog Computing 202 11.5.5 Applications of Fog Computing with the IoT 203 11.6 Requirements for Designing a Data Collection Method 204 11.7 Conclusion 206 Bibliography 206 12 Role of Fog Computing Platform in Analytics of Internet of Things- Issues, Challenges and Opportunities 209Mamoon Rashid and Umer Iqbal Wani 12.1 Introduction to Fog Computing 209 12.1.1 Hierarchical Fog Computing Architecture 210 12.1.2 Layered Fog Computing Architecture 212 12.1.3 Comparison of Fog and Cloud Computing 213 12.2 Introduction to Internet of Things 214 12.2.1 Overview of Internet of Things 214 12.3 Conceptual Architecture of Internet of Things 216 12.4 Relationship between Internet of Things and Fog Computing 217 12.5 Use of Fog Analytics in Internet of Things 218 12.6 Conclusion 218 Bibliography 218 13 A Medical Diagnosis of Urethral Stricture Using Intuitionistic Fuzzy Sets 221Prabjot Kaur and Maria Jamal 13.1 Introduction 221 13.2 Preliminaries 223 13.2.1 Introduction 223 13.2.2 Fuzzy Sets 223 13.2.3 Intuitionistic Fuzzy Sets 224 13.2.4 Intuitionistic Fuzzy Relation 224 13.2.5 Max-Min-Max Composition 224 13.2.6 Linguistic Variable 224 13.2.7 Distance Measure In Intuitionistic Fuzzy Sets 224 13.2.7.1 The Hamming Distance 224 13.2.7.2 Normalized Hamming Distance 224 13.2.7.3 Compliment of an Intuitionistic Fuzzy Set Matrix 225 13.2.7.4 Revised Max-Min Average Composition of A and B (A Φ B) 225 13.3 Max-Min-Max Algorithm for Disease Diagnosis 225 13.4 Case Study 226 13.5 Intuitionistic Fuzzy Max-Min Average Algorithm for Disease Diagnosis 227 13.6 Result 228 13.7 Code for Calculation 229 13.8 Conclusion 233 13.9 Acknowledgement 234 Bibliography 234 14 Security Attacks in Internet of Things 237Rajit Nair, Preeti Sharma, and Dileep Kumar Singh 14.1 Introduction 238 14.2 Reference Model of Internet of Things (IoT) 238 14.3 IoT Communication Protocol 246 14.4 IoT Security 247 14.4.1 Physical Attack 248 14.4.2 Network Attack 252 14.4.3 Software Attack 254 14.4.4 Encryption Attack 255 14.5 Security Challenges in IoT 256 14.5.1 Cryptographic Strategies 256 14.5.2 Key Administration 256 14.5.3 Denial of Service 256 14.5.4 Authentication and Access Control 257 14.6 Conclusion 257 Bibliography 257 15 Fog Integrated Novel Architecture for Telehealth Services with Swift Medical Delivery 263Inderpreet Kaur, Kamaljit Singh Saini, and Jaiteg Singh Khaira 15.1 Introduction 264 15.2 Associated Work and Dimensions 266 15.3 Need of Security in Telemedicine Domain and Internet of Things (IoT) 267 15.3.1 Analytics Reports 268 15.4 Fog Integrated Architecture for Telehealth Delivery 268 15.5 Research Dimensions 269 15.5.1 Benchmark Datasets 269 15.6 Research Methodology and Implementation on Software Defined Networking 270 15.6.1 Key Tools and Frameworks for IoT, Fog Computing and Edge Computing 274 15.6.2 Simulation Analysis 276 15.7 Conclusion 282 Bibliography 282 16 Fruit Fly Optimization Algorithm for Intelligent IoT Applications 287Satinder Singh Mohar, Sonia Goyal, and Ranjit Kaur 16.1 An Introduction to the Internet of Things 287 16.2 Background of the IoT 288 16.2.1 Evolution of the IoT 288 16.2.2 Elements Involved in IoT Communication 288 16.3 Applications of the IoT 289 16.3.1 Industrial 290 16.3.2 Smart Parking 290 16.3.3 Health Care 290 16.3.4 Smart Offices and Homes 290 16.3.5 Augment Maps 291 16.3.6 Environment Monitoring 291 16.3.7 Agriculture 291 16.4 Challenges in the IoT 291 16.4.1 Addressing Schemes 291 16.4.2 Energy Consumption 292 16.4.3 Transmission Media 292 16.4.4 Security 292 16.4.5 Quality of Service (QoS) 292 16.5 Introduction to Optimization 293 16.6 Classification of Optimization Algorithms 293 16.6.1 Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) Algorithm 293 16.6.2 Genetic Algorithms 294 16.6.3 Heuristic Algorithms 294 16.6.4 Bio-inspired Algorithms 294 16.6.5 Evolutionary Algorithms (EA) 294 16.7 Network Optimization and IoT 295 16.8 Network Parameters optimized by Different Optimization Algorithms 295 16.8.1 Load Balancing 295 16.8.2 Maximizing Network Lifetime 295 16.8.3 Link Failure Management 296 16.8.4 Quality of the Link 296 16.8.5 Energy Efficiency 296 16.8.6 Node Deployment 296 16.9 Fruit Fly Optimization Algorithm 297 16.9.1 Steps Involved in FOA 297 16.9.2 Flow Chart of Fruit Fly Optimization Algorithm 298 16.10 Applicability of FOA in IoT Applications 300 16.10.1 Cloud Service Distribution in Fog Computing 300 16.10.2 Cluster Head Selection in IoT 300 16.10.3 Load Balancing in IoT 300 16.10.4 Quality of Service in Web Services 300 16.10.5 Electronics Health Records in Cloud Computing 301 16.10.6 Intrusion Detection System in Network 301 16.10.7 Node Capture Attack in WSN 301 16.10.8 Node Deployment in WSN 302 16.11 Node Deployment Using Fruit Fly Optimization Algorithm 302 16.12 Conclusion 304 Bibliography 304 17 Optimization Techniques for Intelligent IoT Applications 311Priyanka Pattnaik, Subhashree Mishra, and Bhabani Shankar Prasad Mishra 17.1 Cuckoo Search 312 17.1.1 Introduction to Cuckoo 312 17.1.2 Natural Cuckoo 312 17.1.3 Artificial Cuckoo Search 313 17.1.4 Cuckoo Search Algorithm 313 17.1.5 Cuckoo Search Variants 314 17.1.6 Discrete Cuckoo Search 314 17.1.7 Binary Cuckoo Search 314 17.1.8 Chaotic Cuckoo Search 316 17.1.9 Parallel Cuckoo Search 317 17.1.10 Application of Cuckoo Search 317 17.2 Glow Worm Algorithm 317 17.2.1 Introduction to Glow Worm 317 17.2.2 Glow Worm Swarm Optimization Algorithm (GSO) 317 17.3 Wasp Swarm Optimization 321 17.3.1 Introduction to Wasp Swarm and Wasp Swarm Algorithm (WSO) 321 17.3.2 Fish Swarm Optimization (FSO) 322 17.3.3 Fruit Fly Optimization (FLO) 322 17.3.4 Cockroach Swarm Optimization 324 17.3.5 Bumblebee Algorithm 324 17.3.6 Dolphin Echolocation 325 17.3.7 Shuffled Frog-leaping Algorithm 326 17.3.8 Paddy Field Algorithm 327 17.4 Real World Applications Area 328 Summary 329 Bibliography 329 18 Optimization Techniques for Intelligent IoT Applications in Transport Processes 333Muzafer Saračević, Zoran Lončarević, and Adnan Hasanović 18.1 Introduction 333 18.2 Related Works 335 18.3 TSP Optimization Techniques 336 18.4 Implementation and Testing of Proposed Solution 338 18.5 Experimental Results 342 18.5.1 Example Test with 50 Cities 343 18.5.2 Example Test with 100 Cities 344 18.6 Conclusion and Further Works 346 Bibliography 347 19 Role of Intelligent IOT Applications in Fog paradigm: Issues, Challenges and Future Opportunities 351Priyanka Rajan Kumar and Sonia Goel 19.1 Fog Computing 352 19.1.1 Need of Fog computing 352 19.1.2 Architecture of Fog Computing 353 19.1.3 Fog Computing Reference Architecture 354 19.1.4 Processing on Fog 355 19.2 Concept of Intelligent IoT Applications in Smart Computing Era 355 19.3 Components of Edge and Fog Driven Algorithm 356 19.4 Working of Edge and Fog Driven Algorithms 357 19.5 Future Opportunistic Fog/Edge Computational Models 360 19.5.1 Future Opportunistic Techniques 361 19.6 Challenges of Fog Computing for Intelligent IoT Applications 361 19.7 Applications of Cloud Based Computing for Smart Devices 363 Bibliography 364 20 Security and Privacy Issues in Fog/Edge/Pervasive Computing 369Shweta Kaushik and Charu Gandhi 20.1 Introduction to Data Security and Privacy in Fog Computing 370 20.2 Data Protection/ Security 375 20.3 Great Security Practices In Fog Processing Condition 377 20.4 Developing Patterns in Security and Privacy 381 20.5 Conclusion 385 Bibliography 385 21 Fog and Edge Driven Security & Privacy Issues in IoT Devices 389Deepak Kumar Sharma, Aarti Goel, and Pragun Mangla 21.1 Introduction to Fog Computing 390 21.1.1 Architecture of Fog 390 21.1.2 Benefits of Fog Computing 392 21.1.3 Applications of Fog with IoT 393 21.1.4 Major Challenges for Fog with IoT 394 21.1.5 Security and Privacy Issues in Fog Computing 395 21.2 Introduction to Edge Computing 399 21.2.1 Architecture and Working 400 21.2.2 Applications and use Cases 400 21.2.3 Characteristics of Edge Computing 403 21.2.4 Challenges of Edge Computing 404 21.2.5 How to Protect Devices “On the Edge”? 405 21.2.6 Comparison with Fog Computing 405 Bibliography 406 Index 409

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides comprehensive information on swing contracts for flexible reserve provision in wholesale power markets This book promotes a linked swing-contract market design for centrally-managed wholesale power markets to facilitate increased reliance on renewable energy resources and demand-side participation. The proposed swing contracts are firm or option two-part pricing contracts permitting resources to offer the future availability of dispatchable power paths (reserve) with broad types of flexibility in their power attributes. A New Swing-Contract Design for Wholesale Power Markets begins with a brief introduction to the subject, followed by two chapters that cover: general goals for wholesale power market design; history, operations, and conceptual concerns for current U.S. RTO/ISO-managed wholesale power markets; and the relationship of the present study to previous swing-contract research. The next eight chapters cover: a general swing-contract formulation for centrally-managed wholesale power markets; illustrative swing-contract reserve offers;inclusion of reserve offers with price swing; inclusion of price-sensitive reserve bids; and extension to a linked collection of swing-contract markets. Operations in current U.S. RTO/ISO-managed markets are reviewed in the following four chapters, and conceptual and practical advantages of the linked swing-contract market design are carefully considered. The book concludes with an examination of two key issues: How might current U.S. RTO/ISO-managed markets transition gradually to a swing-contract form? And how might independent distribution system operators, functioning as linkage entities at transmission and distribution system interfaces, make use of swing contracts to facilitate their participation in wholesale power markets as providers of ancillary services harnessed from distribution-side resources? In summary, this title: Addresses problems with current wholesale electric power markets by developing a new swing-contract market design from concept to practical implementationProvides introductory chapters that explain the general principles motivating the new market design, hence why a new approach is requiredDevelops a new type of swing contract suitable for wholesale power markets with increasing reliance on renewable energy and active demand-side participation A New Swing-Contract Design for Wholesale Power Markets is an ideal book for electric power system professionals and for students specializing in electric power systems.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Author Biography xiv Acknowledgments xv Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Chapter 2 US RTO/ISO-Managed Wholesale Power Markets: Overview 9 2.1 Chapter Preview 9 2.2 General Goals for Wholesale Power Market Design 9 2.3 US RTO/ISO-Managed Market Operations 10 2.4 Stresses Faced by Current US RTO/ISO-Managed Markets 14 Chapter 3 Motivation For Current Study 17 3.1 Chapter Preview 17 3.2 Problematic Design Aspects of US RTO/ISO-Managed Wholesale Power Markets 17 3.2.1 Artificial Distinction Between Energy and Reserve 17 3.2.2 Problematic use of Hedonic Pricing 18 3.2.3 Revenue Insufficiency and Incentive Problems 19 3.2.4 Computational Fragility of LMP Derivations 20 3.2.5 Performance Payment in Advance of Performance Delivery 22 3.2.6 Minimal Direct Representation of Retail Customer Interests 23 3.2.7 Reliance on Overly Simplistic Cost Conceptions 24 3.2.8 Use of Spot-Market Pricing for Forward Markets 26 3.3 Relation of Current Study to Previous Swing-Contract Work 26 Chapter 4 Swing Contracts For Iso-Managed Wholesale Power Markets 29 4.1 Swing Contract Overview 29 4.2 Swing Contracts: General Formulation 29 4.3 Swing Contracts in Firm or Option Form 31 Chapter 5 Illustrative Swing-Contract Reserve Offers 35 5.1 Chapter Preview 35 5.2 A Simple Energy-Block Swing Contract in Firm Form 37 5.3 An Energy-Block Swing Contract in Option Form 40 5.4 Swing-Contract Implementation of Standard Supply Offers 41 5.5 A Swing Contract Offering Continuous Swing (Flexibility) in Power and Ramp 47 5.6 A Swing Contract Offering Battery Services 49 5.7 Swing-Contract Facilitation of Private Bilateral Contracting 52 Chapter 6 Swing-Contract Market Design 55 6.1 Chapter Preview 55 6.2 General Swing-Contract Market Formulation 55 6.3 Financial and Physical Feasibility of Swing-Contract Offers 58 6.4 Reserve Bids 58 6.5 Handling of Fixed Reserve Bids and Non-Dispatched Power 60 6.6 Performance Penalties and Incentives 60 6.7 ISO Cost Allocation 61 Chapter 7 Swing-Contract Market Optimization: Base-Case Milp Formulation 67 7.1 Chapter Preview 67 7.2 General Assumptions and Notation 68 7.3 Discretization of the ISO’s Optimization Problem 69 7.4 ISO Objective Function 73 7.5 Complete Analytical MILP Formulation 74 7.6 Additional Discussion of Optimization Aspects 76 7.7 Five-Bus Test Case 78 7.8 Thirty Bus Test Case with Adaptive Reserve Zones 81 Chapter 8 Inclusion Of Reserve Offers With Price Swing 85 8.1 Chapter Preview 85 8.2 Cost Function Preliminaries 86 8.3 MILP Tractable form of Reserve Offers with Price Swing 87 Chapter 9 Inclusion Of Price-Sensitive Reserve Bids 93 9.1 Chapter Preview 93 9.2 Incorporation of Benefits 94 9.3 Modeling of Price-Sensitive Reserve Bids 96 9.3.1 Standard Demand Function Formulation 96 9.3.2 Reserve Bids with Time-of-Use Pricing 97 9.3.3 Reserve Bids with Price Swing 97 9.3.4 Reserve Bids Directly Expressed as Benefit Functions 99 9.4 MILP Tractable Approximation of Benefit Functions 100 Chapter 10 The Linked Swing-Contract Market Design 105 10.1 Chapter Preview 105 10.2 Multistage Optimization and Time Inconsistency 107 10.3 Settlement Time-Consistency of Swing-Contract Markets 109 10.4 Swing-Contract Long-Term Forward Markets 111 10.5 Swing-Contract Short-Term Forward Markets 112 10.6 Swing-Contract Very Short-Term Forward Markets 113 10.7 Swing-Contract Deployment in Real-Time Operations 114 Chapter 11 Illustration: Linked Day-Ahead And Hour-Ahead Swing-Contract Markets 117 11.1 Chapter Preview 117 11.2 Hour-Ahead Market with Reserve Offers Consisting of Swing-Contract Portfolios 117 11.3 SCED Solution for Hour-Ahead Swing-Contract Market 122 11.3.1 Overview 122 11.3.2 Power Balance 122 11.3.3 Coverage of the ISO’s Uncertainty Set 123 11.3.4 Constrained Minimization of Expected Cost 125 11.4 Linked Day-Ahead and Hour-Ahead Markets 126 Chapter 12 Standard Modeling Of A Competitive Market 131 12.1 Chapter Preview 131 12.2 Key Definitions 131 12.3 Standard Competitive Market Assumptions 132 12.4 Law of One Price for Commodities 132 12.5 Competitive Market: Basic Formulation 133 12.6 Net Surplus Extraction 136 12.7 Market Efficiency Metric 137 12.8 Market Efficiency and Pricing Rules 139 12.9 Strategic Trade Behavior and Trader Market Power 140 CHAPTER 13 US RTO/ISO-Managed Markets: Efficiency And Market Power 143 13.1 Chapter Preview 143 13.2 Daily Market Operations 144 13.3 Illustrative Analytical DAM Formulation 146 13.4 Net Surplus Extraction in the Illustrative DAM 147 13.5 Market Power in the Illustrative DAM: Type-I Error 152 13.6 Market Power in the Illustrative DAM: Type-II Error 156 13.7 Market Inefficiency in the Illustrative DAM 160 13.8 DAM Performance: General Assessment 163 13.9 Scheduling of Bilateral Contracts 165 Chapter 14 Comparisons With Swing-Contract Markets 167 14.1 Chapter Preview 167 14.2 Product Definition in US RTO/ISO-Managed Markets 168 14.3 Wholesale Power and the Law of One Price (Not) 170 14.4 Differential vs. Uniform Pricing 171 14.5 Comparison of SC and Current US DAM Designs 172 Chapter 15 Advantages Of The Linked Swing-Contract Market Design 175 15.1 Chapter Preview 175 15.2 SC Markets are Physically-Covered Insurance Markets 176 15.3 Longer-Term SC Markets Support New Investment 177 15.3.1 Energy-Only Market 179 15.3.2 Centrally Managed Capacity Market 181 15.3.3 LSE Bilateral Contract Obligations 182 15.4 SC Markets Ensure Revenue Sufficiency 183 15.5 SC Markets Ameliorate Merit-Order Concerns 184 15.6 SC Markets are Robust-Control Mechanisms 185 15.7 SC Markets Reduce Rule Complexity 186 15.8 SC Markets Reduce Gaming Opportunities 187 15.9 SC Markets have Smaller-Sized Optimizations 189 15.10 Additional Advantages of SC Markets 190 15.10.1 Ensure a Level Playing Field for Resource Participation 190 15.10.2 Permit Co-Optimization of Diverse Reserve 191 15.10.3 Appropriately Remunerate Diversity and Flexibility 191 15.10.4 Encourage Accurate Forecasting and Dispatch Following 191 15.10.5 Ensure Settlement Time-Consistency 191 Chapter 16 Gradual Transition To Linked Swing-Contract Markets 193 16.1 Chapter Preview 193 16.2 A DAM Formulation Permitting Gradual Transition 195 16.3 Cost Function Preliminaries for the Transitional DAM 197 16.4 MILP SCUC/SCED Optimization for the Transitional DAM 201 Chapter 17 Swing-Contract Support For Integrated Transmission And Distribution Systems 209 17.1 Chapter Preview 209 17.2 Transactive Energy System Design for ITD Systems 211 17.3 Role of Distribution Utilities 215 17.4 An IDSO-Managed Bid-Based TES Design for Households 216 17.5 IDSOs as Grid-Edge Resource Aggregators 219 17.6 Swing-Contract Support for IDSO Participation in Wholesale Power Markets 220 Chapter 18 Design Evaluation Via The ITD TES Platform 221 18.1 Chapter Preview 221 18.2 Design Readiness Levels 222 18.3 An ITD TES Platform Permitting TES Design Evaluation 223 18.4 Illustrative Test Cases: Overview 226 18.5 Illustrative Test Cases: Report 229 18.5.1 IDSO Peak-Load Reduction Capabilities 229 18.5.2 IDSO Load-Matching Capabilities 229 18.5.3 Household ITD Test Cases: Discussion 233 Chapter 19 Potential Future Research Directions 235 19.1 Effective use of Option Swing Contracts 235 19.2 Representation of Reserve Bids 236 19.3 Compensation for Storage Services 236 19.4 Compensation for Reliability Services 236 19.5 Representation of Power-Paths 237 19.6 Implementation of Contract-Clearing Optimizations for Swing-Contract Markets 237 19.7 Gradual Transition to a Swing-Contract Market 238 Chapter 20 Conclusion: The Dots Keep Connecting 239 Appendix A Appendices 241 References 249 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the foundations and nuances of electrical connectors in this comprehensive and insightful resource Electrical Connectors: Design, Manufacture, Test, and Selection delivers a comprehensive discussion of electrical connectors, from the components and materials that comprise them to their classifications and underwater, power, and high-speed signal applications. Accomplished engineer and author Michael G. Pecht offers readers a thorough explanation of the key performance and reliability concerns and trade-offs involved in electrical connector selection. Readers, both at introductory and advanced levels, will discover the latest industry standards for performance, reliability, and safety assurance. The book discusses everything a student or practicing engineer might require to design, manufacture, or select a connector for any targeted application. The science of contact physics, contact finishes, housing materials, andthe full connector assembly process are all discussed at length, as are test methods, performance, and guidelines for various applications. Electrical Connectors covers a wide variety of other relevant and current topics, like: A comprehensive description of all electrical connectors, including their materials, components, applications, and classificationsA discussion of the design and manufacture of all parts of a connectorApplication-specific criteria for contact resistance, signal quality, and temperature riseAn examination of key suppliers, materials used, and the different types of data providedA presentation of guidelines for end-users involved in connector selection and design Perfect for connector manufacturers who select, design, and assemble connectors for their products or the end users who concern themselves with operational reliability of the systemin which they're installed,Electrical Connectorsalso belongs on the bookshelves of students learning the basics of electrical contacts and those who seek a general reference with best-practice advice on how to choose and test connectors for targeted applications. Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii List of Contributors xv Preface xvii 1 What Is an Electrical Connector? 1Michael G. Pecht and San Kyeong 1.1 Challenges of Separable Connectors 1 1.2 Components of a Connector 2 1.2.1 Contact Springs 2 1.2.2 Contact Finishes 3 1.2.2.1 Noble Metal Contact Finishes 4 1.2.2.2 Non-noble Metal Contact Finishes 4 1.2.3 Connector Housing 4 1.2.4 Contact Interface 5 1.3 Connector Types 6 1.3.1 Board-to-Board Connectors 7 1.3.2 Wire/Cable-to-Wire/Cable Connectors 8 1.3.3 Wire/Cable-to-Board Connectors 10 1.4 Connector Terminology 11 References 14 2 Connector Housing 17Michael G. Pecht 2.1 Mechanical Properties 17 2.2 Electrical Properties 19 2.3 Flammability 21 2.4 Temperature Rating 22 2.5 Housing Materials 23 2.5.1 Thermoplastic Polymers 25 2.5.1.1 Polyesters 25 2.5.1.2 Polyimides, Polyamide-imides, and Polyetherimides 26 2.5.1.3 Polyphenylene Sulfides 26 2.5.1.4 Polyether Ether Ketones 26 2.5.1.5 Liquid-Crystalline Polymers 27 2.5.1.6 Comparison ofThermoplastic Polymers 27 2.5.2 Thermosetting Polymers 27 2.5.3 Additives to Housing Materials 29 2.5.4 Manufacturing of Housing Materials 29 References 30 3 Contact Spring 31Michael G. Pecht 3.1 Copper Alloys 31 3.1.1 Unified Number System (UNS) 31 3.1.2 Properties of Copper Alloys 33 3.2 Nickel Alloys 37 3.3 Conductive Elastomers 37 3.4 Contact Manufacturing 38 References 41 4 Contact Plating 43Michael G. Pecht 4.1 Noble Metal Plating 43 4.1.1 Gold 44 4.1.2 Palladium 46 4.1.3 Combination of Gold and Palladium 47 4.2 Non-noble Metal Plating 47 4.2.1 Silver 48 4.2.1.1 Characteristics of Silver as a Contact Finish 49 4.2.1.2 Potential Tarnish-Accelerating Factors 50 4.2.1.3 Use of Silver in Typical Connectors 53 4.2.1.4 Managing Silver Corrosion 54 4.2.2 Silver-Palladium Alloys 55 4.2.3 Nanocrystalline Silver Alloys 55 4.2.4 Silver-Bismuth Alloys 57 4.2.5 Tin 57 4.2.6 Nickel Contact Finishes 59 4.3 Underplating 59 4.4 Plating Process 60 4.4.1 Electrolytic Plating 61 4.4.1.1 Rack Plating 61 4.4.1.2 Barrel Plating 61 4.4.2 Electroless Plating 62 4.4.3 Cladding 63 4.4.4 Hot Dipping 63 References 63 5 Insertion and Extraction Forces 67Michael G. Pecht 5.1 Insertion and Extraction Forces 67 5.2 Contact Retention 70 5.3 Contact Force and Deflection 70 5.4 Contact Wipe 71 References 73 6 Contact Interface 75Michael G. Pecht and San Kyeong 6.1 Constriction Resistance 76 6.2 Contact Resistance 77 6.3 Other Factors Affecting Contact Resistance 79 6.4 Current Rating 81 6.5 Capacitance and Inductance 82 6.6 Bandpass and Bandwidth 86 References 87 7 The Back-End Connection 89Chien-Ming Huang, San Kyeong and Michael G. Pecht 7.1 Soldered Connection 89 7.2 Press-Fit Connection 93 7.3 Crimping Connection 95 7.4 Insulation Displacement Connection 98 References 98 8 Loads and Failure Mechanisms 103San Kyeong, Lovlesh Kaushik and Michael G. Pecht 8.1 Environmental Loads 104 8.1.1 Temperature 104 8.1.2 Vibration Load 105 8.1.3 Humidity 106 8.1.4 Contamination 107 8.1.5 Differential Pressure 108 8.2 Failure Mechanisms in Electrical Connectors 109 8.2.1 Silver Migration 110 8.2.2 Tin Whiskers 114 8.2.3 Corrosion Failure 119 8.2.3.1 Dry Corrosion 119 8.2.3.2 Galvanic Corrosion 120 8.2.3.3 Pore Corrosion 121 8.2.3.4 Creep Corrosion 121 8.2.3.5 Fretting Corrosion 123 8.2.4 Arc Formation 124 8.2.5 Creep Failure 128 8.2.6 Wear 131 8.2.6.1 Adhesive Wear 132 8.2.6.2 Abrasive Wear 133 8.2.6.3 Fatigue Wear 134 8.2.6.4 Corrosive Wear 134 8.2.6.5 Fretting Wear 135 8.2.7 Frictional Polymerization 136 8.3 Case Study by NASA: Electrical Connectors for Spacecraft 137 References 139 9 Fretting in Connectors 147Deepak Bondre and Michael G. Pecht 9.1 Mechanisms of Fretting Failure 149 9.1.1 Material Factors That Affect Fretting 152 9.1.1.1 Contact Materials 152 9.1.1.2 Hardness 155 9.1.1.3 Surface Finish 155 9.1.1.4 Frictional Polymerization 156 9.1.1.5 Grain Size 156 9.1.1.6 Oxides 157 9.1.1.7 Coefficient of Friction 158 9.1.1.8 Electrochemical Factor 158 9.1.2 Operating Factors That Affect Fretting 158 9.1.2.1 Contact Load 158 9.1.2.2 Fretting Frequency 159 9.1.2.3 Slip Amplitude 162 9.1.2.4 Electric Current 162 9.1.3 Environmental Factors That Affect Fretting 163 9.1.3.1 Humidity 164 9.1.3.2 Temperature 164 9.1.3.3 Dust 165 9.2 Reducing the Damage of Fretting 167 9.2.1 Lubrication 168 9.2.2 Improvement in Design 168 9.2.3 Coatings 169 References 170 10 Testing 173Bhanu Sood andMichael G. Pecht 10.1 Dielectric With standing Voltage Testing 173 10.2 Insulation Resistance Testing 174 10.3 Contact Resistance Testing 176 10.4 Current Rating 179 10.5 Electromagnetic Interference and Electromagnetic Compatibility Testing 180 10.6 Temperature Life Testing 181 10.7 Thermal Cycling Testing 182 10.8 Thermal Shock Testing 182 10.9 Steady-State Humidity Testing 183 10.10 Temperature Cycling with Humidity Testing 184 10.11 Corrosion 184 10.11.1 Dry Corrosion 185 10.11.2 Creep Corrosion 186 10.11.3 Moist Corrosion 187 10.11.4 Fretting Corrosion 187 10.12 Mixed Flowing Gas Testing 188 10.12.1 Battelle Labs MFG Test Methods 189 10.12.2 EIA MFG Test Methods: EIA 364-TP65A 190 10.12.3 IEC MFG Test Methods: IEC 68-2-60 Part 2 190 10.12.4 Telcordia MFG Test Methods: Telcordia GR-63-CORE Section 5.5 191 10.12.5 IBM MFG Test Methods: G1(T) 191 10.12.6 CALCE MFG Chamber Capability 192 10.13 Vibration 192 10.13.1 Mechanical Shock 193 10.13.2 Mating Durability 193 10.14 Highly Accelerated Life Testing 194 10.15 Environmental Stress Screening 194 References 195 11 Supplier Selection 197Michael H. Azarian, Diganta Das and Michael G. Pecht 11.1 Connector Reliability 197 11.2 Capability Maturity Models 198 11.3 Key Reliability Practices 198 11.3.1 Reliability Requirements and Planning 199 11.3.2 Training and Development 200 11.3.3 Reliability Analysis 200 11.3.4 Reliability Testing 201 11.3.5 Supply-Chain Management 201 11.3.6 Failure Data Tracking and Analysis 202 11.3.7 Verification and Validation 202 11.3.8 Reliability Improvement 203 11.4 Reliability Capability of an Organization 203 11.5 The Evaluation Process 204 References 205 12 Selecting the Right Connector 207Ilknur Baylakoglu and San Kyeong 12.1 Connector Requirements Based on Design and Targeted Application 207 12.2 Mating Cycles 208 12.3 Current and Power Ratings 209 12.4 Environmental Conditions 212 12.5 Termination Types 213 12.6 Materials 213 12.6.1 Connector Housing Materials 216 12.6.2 Connector Spring Materials 217 12.7 Contact Finishes 217 12.8 Reliability 218 12.9 Raw Cables and Assemblies 219 12.10 Supplier Reliability Capability Maturity 219 12.11 Connector Selection Team 220 12.12 Selection of Candidate Parts from a Preferred Parts Database 221 12.13 Electronic Product Manufacturers’ Parts Databases 221 12.14 Parts Procurement 223 12.15 Parts Availability 223 12.16 High-Speed Connector Selection 224 12.17 NASA Connector Selection 224 12.18 Harsh Environment Connector Selection 227 12.19 Fiber-Optic Interconnect Requirements by Market 229 12.20 High-Power Subsea Connector Selection 229 12.20.1 Undersea Connector Reliability 231 12.21 Screening Tests 232 12.22 Low-Voltage Automotive Single- and Multiple-Pole Connector Validation 236 12.23 Failure Modes, Mechanisms, and Effects Analysis for Connectors 236 12.24 Connector Experiments 242 12.25 Summary 246 References 246 13 Signal Connector Selection 251Michael G. Pecht 13.1 Issues Involving High-Speed Connectors 251 13.2 Signal Transmission Quality Considerations 252 13.2.1 Interconnect Delays 252 13.2.2 Signal Distortion 252 13.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 253 13.4 Virtual Prototyping 254 13.4.1 TDR Impedance Measurements 255 13.4.1.1 Reflection Coefficient 255 13.4.1.2 TDR Resolution Factors 256 13.4.1.3 TDR Accuracy Factors 257 13.5 Vector Network Analyzer 259 13.6 Simulation Program with Integrated Circuit Emphasis (SPICE) 259 References 260 14 Advanced Technology Attachment Connectors 261Neda Shafiei, Kyle LoGiudice and Michael G. Pecht 14.1 ATA Connector and SATA Connector Overview 261 14.2 History of ATA and SATA 263 14.3 Physical Description of ATA Connectors, ATA Alternative Connectors, and SATA Connectors 264 14.4 ATA Standardization and Revisions 268 14.5 SATA Standardization and Revisions 270 14.6 SATA in the Future 272 References 273 15 Power Connectors 275Michael G. Pecht and San Kyeong 15.1 Requirements for Power Connectors 275 15.2 Power Connector Materials 276 15.3 Types of Power Connectors 277 15.4 Power Contact Resistance 280 15.5 Continuous, Transient, and Overload Current Capacities 282 15.5.1 Continuous Current Capacity 282 15.5.2 Transient Current Capacity 283 15.5.3 Overload Current Capacity 284 15.6 Current Rating Method 284 References 286 16 Electrical Connectors for Underwater Applications 289Flore Remouit, Jens Engström and Pablo Ruiz-Minguela 16.1 Background and Terminology 290 16.1.1 History 291 16.1.2 Terminology 291 16.2 Commercial Off-the-Shelf (COTS) Connectors 292 16.2.1 Rubber-Molded 292 16.2.2 Rigid-Shell or Bulkhead Assemblies 293 16.2.3 Fluid-Filled UnderwaterMateable 294 16.2.4 Inductive Coupling 295 16.2.5 Assemblies (Non-unmateable) 295 16.3 Connector Design 296 16.3.1 Thermal Design 296 16.3.2 Electrical Properties 297 16.3.3 Mechanical Properties 299 16.3.4 Material Choices 300 16.3.5 Specifications for Underwater Connectors 301 16.4 Connector Deployment and Operation 302 16.4.1 Connection Procedure 302 16.4.2 Connection Layout 303 16.4.3 Reliability 305 16.5 Discussion and Conclusion 305 References 306 17 Examples of Connectors 313Lei Su, Xiaonan Yu, San Kyeong andMichael G. Pecht 17.1 Amphenol ICC M-SeriesTM 56 Connectors 313 17.2 Amphenol ICC Paladin®Connectors 313 17.3 Amphenol ICC 3000W EnergyEdgeTM X-treme Card Edge Series 314 17.4 Amphenol ICC FLTStack Connectors 314 17.5 Amphenol ICC HSBridge Connector System 315 17.6 Amphenol ICC MUSBR Series USB 3.0 Type-A Connectors 315 17.7 Amphenol ICCWaterproof USB Type-CTM Connectors 316 17.8 Amphenol ICC NETBridgeTM Connectors 316 17.9 Amphenol Sine Systems DuraMateTM AHDP Circular Connectors 317 17.10 Amphenol Aerospace MIL-DTL-38999 Series III Connectors 318 17.11 Fischer Connectors UltiMateTM Series Connectors 318 17.12 Hirose Electric DF50 Series Connectors 319 17.13 Hirose Electric microSDTM Card Connectors 320 17.14 Molex SAS-3 and U.2 (SFF-8639) Backplane Connectors 320 17.15 Molex NeoPressTM Mezzanine Connectors 321 17.16 Molex ImpelTM Plus Backplane Connectors 321 17.17 Molex EXTreme GuardianTM Power Connectors 322 17.18 Molex ImperiumTM High Voltage/High Current Connectors 323 17.19 TE Connectivity Free Height Connectors 323 17.20 TE Connectivity STRADAWhisper Connectors 323 17.21 TE ConnectivityMULTI-BEAM High-Density (HD) Connectors 324 17.22 TE Connectivity HDMITM Connectors 325 17.23 TE Connectivity AMP CT Connector Series 325 17.24 TE ConnectivityMicro Motor Connectors 326 17.25 TE Connectivity AMPSEAL Connectors 326 17.26 TE Connectivity M12 X-Code Connectors 327 17.27 TE Connectivity SOLARLOK 2.0 Connectors 327 17.28 TE Connectivity Busbar Connectors 328 References 329 Appendix Standards 331 A.1 Standard References for Quality Management and Assurance 332 A.2 General Specifications for Connectors 332 A.3 Safety-Related Standards and Specifications 332 A.4 Standard References for Connector Manufacturing 333 A.5 Standard References for Socket Material Property Characterization 334 A.6 Standard References for Socket Performance Qualification 335 A.7 Standard References for Socket Reliability Qualification 336 A.8 Other Standards and Specifications 338 A.9 Telcordia 338 A.10 Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE) 339 A.11 Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) 339 A.12 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 340 A.12.1 IEC Standards 341 A.12.2 IEC Connectors 341 A.13 Military Standards (MIL-STD) 341 A.14 Standards for Space-Grade Connectors 342 References 345 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover detailed insights into the methods, algorithms, and techniques for deep learning in sensor data analysis Sensor Data Analysis and Management: The Role of Deep Learning delivers an insightful and practical overview of the applications of deep learning techniques to the analysis of sensor data. The book collects cutting-edge resources into a single collection designed to enlighten the reader on topics as varied as recent techniques for fault detection and classification in sensor data, the application of deep learning to Internet of Things sensors, and a case study on high-performance computer gathering and processing of sensor data. The editors have curated a distinguished group of perceptive and concise papers that show the potential of deep learning as a powerful tool for solving complex modelling problems across a broad range of industries, including predictive maintenance, health monitoring, financial portfolio forecasting, and driver assistanTable of ContentsAbout the Editors vii List of Contributors ix Preface xiii 1 Efficient Resource Allocation Using Multilayer Neural Network in Cloud Environment 1N. Vijayaraj, G. Uganya, M. Balasaraswathi, V. Sivasankaran, Radhika Baskar, and A.S. Syed Fiaz 2 Internet of Things for Human-Activity Recognition Based on Wearable Sensor Data 19Dr. Vikram Rajpoot, Sudeep Ray Gaur, Aditya Patel, and Dr. Akash Saxena 3 Evaluation of Feature Selection Techniques in Intrusion Detection Systems Using Machine Learning Models in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 33T.J. Nagalakshmi, M. Balasaraswathi, V. Sivasankaran, D. Ravikumar, S. Joseph Gladwin, and S. Pravin Kumar 4 Neuro-Fuzzy-Based Bidirectional and Biobjective Reactive Routing Schema for Critical Wireless Sensor Networks 73K.M. Karthick Raghunath and G.R. Anantha Raman 5 Feature Detection and Extraction Techniques for Real-Time Student Monitoring in Sensor Data Environments 97Dr. V. Saravanan and Dr (Ms). N. Shanmuga Priya 6 Deep Learning Analysis of Location Sensor Data for Human-Activity Recognition 103Hariprasath Manoharan, Ganesan Sivarajan, and Subramanian Srikrishna 7 A Quantum-Behaved Particle-Swarm-Optimization-Based KNN Classifier for Improving WSN Lifetime 117Ajmi Nader, Helali Abdelhamid, and Mghaieth Ridha 8 Feature Detection and Extraction Techniques for Sensor Data 131Dr. L. Priya, Ms. A. Sathya, and Dr. S. Thanga Revathi 9 Object Detection in Satellite Images Using Modified Pyramid Scene Parsing Networks 147Akhilesh Vikas Kakade, S Rajkumar (Corresponding Author), K Suganthi, and L Ramanathan 10 Coronary Illness Prediction Using the AdaBoost Algorithm 161G. Deivendran, S. Vishal Balaji, B. Paramasivan, S. Vimal (Corresponding Author) 11 Geographic Information Systems and Confidence Interval with Deep Learning Techniques for Traffic Management Systems in Smart Cities 173Prisilla Jayanthi Index 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xxi Acknowledgements xxiii 1 Fundamentals of Electrical Machines 1 1.1 Preliminary Remarks 1 1.2 Basic Laws of Electrical Engineering 1 1.2.1 Ohm’s Law 1 1.2.2 Generalization of Ohm’s Law 2 1.2.2.1 Derivation of Eq. (1.6) 2 1.2.3 Ohm’s Law for Magnetic Circuits 3 1.2.4 Kirchhoff’s Laws for Magnetic Circuits 3 1.2.5 Lorentz Force Law 5 1.2.6 Biot-Savart Law 6 1.2.7 Ampere Circuital Law 17 1.2.8 Faraday’s Law 20 1.2.8.1 Motional emf 24 1.2.9 Flux Linkages and Induced Voltages 29 1.2.10 Induced Voltages 29 1.2.11 Induced Electric Fields 30 1.2.12 Reformulation of Faraday’s Law 31 1.3 Inductance 38 1.3.1 Application of Ampere’s Law to Find B in a Solenoid 39 1.3.2 Magnetic Field of a Toroid 40 1.3.3 The Inductance of Circular Air-Cored Toroid 40 1.3.4 Mutual Inductance 44 1.4 Energy 47 1.5 Overview of Electric Machines 49 1.6 Summary 58 Problems 58 References 67 2 Magnetic Circuits 69 2.1 Preliminary Remarks 69 2.2 Permeability 69 2.3 Classification of Magnetic Materials 70 2.3.1 Uniform Magnetic Field 72 2.3.2 Magnetic-Field Intensity 72 2.4 Hysteresis Loop 74 2.4.1 Hysteresis Loop for Soft Iron and Steel 76 2.5 Eddy-Current and Core Losses 78 2.6 Magnetic Circuits 82 2.6.1 The Magnetic Circuit Concept 82 2.6.2 Magnetic Circuits Terminology 82 2.6.2.1 Limitations of the Analogy Between Electric and Magnetic Circuits 86 2.6.3 Effect of Air Gaps 86 2.6.3.1 Magnetic Circuit with an Air Gap 86 2.6.3.2 Magnetic Forces Exerted by Electromagnets 89 2.7 Field Energy 100 2.7.1 Energy Stored in a Magnetic Field 100 2.7.1.1 The Magnetic Energy in Terms of the Magnetic Induction B 101 2.7.1.2 The Magnetic Energy in Terms of the Current Density J and the Vector Potential A 102 2.7.1.3 The Magnetic Energy in Terms of the Current I and of the Flux 𝛹m 103 2.7.1.4 The Magnetic Energy in Terms of the Currents and Inductances 103 2.8 The Magnetic Energy for a Solenoid Carrying a Current I 104 2.9 Energy Flow Diagram 106 2.9.1 Power Flow Diagram of DC Generator and DC Motor 106 2.9.1.1 Power Flow Diagram and Losses of Induction Motor 108 2.9.1.2 Rotational Losses 109 2.10 Multiple Excited Systems 110 2.11 Doubly Excited Systems 113 2.11.1 Torque Developed 116 2.11.1.1 Excitation Torque 117 2.11.1.2 Reluctance Torque 122 2.12 Concept of Rotating Magnetic Field 126 2.12.1 Rotating Magnetic Field due to Three-Phase Currents 126 2.12.1.1 Speed of Rotating Magnetic Field 130 2.12.1.2 Direction of Rotating Magnetic Field 131 2.12.2 Alternate Mathematical Analysis for Rotating Magnetic Field 131 2.13 Summary 134 Problems 135 References 144 3 Single-Phase and Three-Phase Transformers 147 3.1 Preliminary Remarks 147 3.2 Classification of Transformers 149 3.2.1 Classification Based on Number of Phases 149 3.2.1.1 Single-Phase Transformers 149 3.2.1.2 Three-Phase Transformers 149 3.2.1.3 Multi-Phase Transformers 150 3.2.2 Classification Based on Operation 150 3.2.2.1 Step-Up Transformers 150 3.2.2.2 Step-Down Transformers 151 3.2.3 Classification Based on Construction 151 3.2.3.1 Core-Type Transformers 151 3.2.3.2 Shell-Type Transformers 151 3.2.4 Classification Based on Number of Windings 153 3.2.4.1 Single-Winding Transformer 153 3.2.4.2 Two-Winding Transformer 153 3.2.4.3 Three-Winding Transformer 153 3.2.5 Classification Based on Use 153 3.2.5.1 Power Transformer 153 3.2.5.2 Distribution Transformer 154 3.3 Principle of Operation of the Transformer 154 3.3.1 Ideal Transformer 154 3.4 Impedance Transformation 157 3.5 DOT Convention 158 3.6 Real/Practical Transformer 158 3.7 Equivalent Circuit of a Single-Phase Transformer 160 3.8 Phasor Diagrams Under Load Condition 166 3.9 Testing of Transformer 170 3.9.1 Open-Circuit Test 171 3.9.2 Short-Circuit Test 172 3.10 Performance Measures of a Transformer 175 3.10.1 Voltage Regulation 175 3.10.1.1 Condition for Maximum Voltage Regulation 177 3.10.1.2 Condition for Zero Voltage Regulation 177 3.10.2 Efficiency of Transformer 180 3.10.3 Maximum Efficiency Condition 181 3.11 All-Day Efficiency or Energy Efficiency 185 3.12 Autotransformer 186 3.13 Three-Phase Transformer 190 3.13.1 Input (Y), Output (Δ) 192 3.13.2 Input Delta (Δ), Output Star (Y) 194 3.13.3 Input Delta (Δ), Output Delta (Δ) 195 3.13.4 Input Star (Y), Output Star (Y) 196 3.14 Single-Phase Equivalent Circuit of Three-Phase Transformer 197 3.15 Open-Delta Connection or V Connection 200 3.16 Harmonics in a Single-Phase Transformer 205 3.16.1 Excitation Phenomena in a Single-Phase Transformer 208 3.16.2 Harmonics in a Three-Phase Transformer 210 3.16.2.1 Star-Delta Connection with Grounded Neutral 213 3.16.2.2 Star-Delta Connection without Grounded Neutral 214 3.16.3 Summary 214 3.16.4 Star-Star with Isolated Neutral 214 3.17 Disadvantages of Harmonics in Transformer 215 3.17.1 Effect of Harmonic Currents 215 3.17.2 Electromagnetic Interference 215 3.17.3 Effect of Harmonic Voltages 215 3.17.4 Summary 216 3.17.5 Oscillating Neutral Phenomena 216 3.18 Open Circuit and Short-Circuit Conditions in a Three-Phase Transformer 217 3.19 Matlab/Simulink Model of a Single-Phase Transformer 219 3.20 Matlab/Simulink Model of Testing of Transformer 222 3.21 Matlab/Simulink Model of Autotransformer 223 3.22 Matlab/Simulink Model of Three-Phase Transformer 223 3.23 Supplementary Solved Problems 232 3.24 Summary 249 3.25 Problems 249 References 255 4 Fundamentals of Rotating Electrical Machines and Machine Windings 257 4.1 Preliminary Remarks 257 4.2 Generator Principle 257 4.2.1 Simple Loop Generator 257 4.2.2 Action of Commutator 259 4.2.3 Force on a Conductor 260 4.2.3.1 DC Motor Principle 260 4.2.3.2 Motor Action 261 4.3 Machine Windings 261 4.3.1 Coil Construction 261 4.3.1.1 Coil Construction: Distributed Winding 261 4.3.1.2 Coil Construction: Concentrated Winding 262 4.3.1.3 Coil Construction: Conductor Bar 262 4.3.2 Revolving (Rotor) Winding 262 4.3.3 Stationary (Stator) Winding 262 4.3.4 DC ArmatureWindings 262 4.3.4.1 Pole Pitch (Yp) 263 4.3.4.2 Coil Pitch or Coil Span (Ycs) 263 4.3.4.3 Back Pitch (Yb) 263 4.3.4.4 Front Pitch (Yf) 264 4.3.4.5 Resultant Pitch (Y) 264 4.3.4.6 Commutator Pitch (a) 264 4.3.5 Lap Winding 265 4.3.5.1 Lap Multiple or Parallel Windings 265 4.3.5.2 Formulas for Lap Winding 266 4.3.5.3 Multiplex, Single, Double, and Triple Windings 267 4.3.5.4 Meaning of the Term Re-entrant 268 4.3.5.5 Multiplex Lap Windings 268 4.3.6 WaveWinding 279 4.3.6.1 Formulas forWave Winding 281 4.3.6.2 MultiplexWave or Series-ParallelWinding 282 4.3.6.3 Formulas for Series-Parallel Winding 283 4.3.7 Symmetrical Windings 284 4.3.7.1 Possible SymmetricalWindings for DC Machines of a Different Number of Poles 284 4.3.8 Equipotential Connectors (Equalizing Rings) 284 4.3.9 Applications of Lap andWave Windings 286 4.3.10 Dummy or Idle Coils 310 4.3.10.1 Dummy Coils 310 4.3.11 Whole-CoilWinding and Half-CoilWinding 311 4.3.12 Concentrated Winding 312 4.3.13 Distributed Winding 312 4.4 Electromotive Force (emf) Equation 313 4.4.1 emf Equation of an Alternator [1] 313 4.4.1.1 Winding Factor (Coil Pitch and Distributed Windings) 313 4.4.2 Winding Factors 313 4.4.2.1 Pitch Factor or Coil Pitch (Pitch Factor (Kp) or Coil Span Factor [Kc]) 314 4.4.3 Distribution Factor (Breadth Factor (Kb) or Distribution Factor (Kd)) 315 4.4.3.1 Distribution Factor (Kd) 315 4.5 Magnetomotive Force (mmf) of ACWindings 316 4.5.1 mmf and Flux in Rotating Machine 316 4.5.2 Main Air-Gap Flux (Field Flux) 316 4.5.3 mmf of a Coil [5] 316 4.5.3.1 mmf 316 4.5.3.2 mmf of Distributed Windings 317 4.5.3.3 mmf SpaceWave of a Single Coil 317 4.5.3.4 mmf SpaceWave of One Phase of a Distributed Winding [6] 319 4.6 Harmonic Effect [7] 322 4.6.1 The Form Factor and the emf per Conductor 322 4.6.2 TheWave Form 323 4.6.3 Problem Due to Harmonics 324 4.6.4 Elimination or Suppression of Harmonics 324 4.6.4.1 Shape of Pole Face 324 4.6.4.2 Use of Several Slots per Phase per Pole 324 4.6.4.3 Use of Short-Pitch Windings 325 4.6.4.4 Effect of the Y- and Δ -Connection on Harmonics 327 4.6.4.5 Harmonics Produced by Armature Slots 328 4.7 Basic Principles of Electric Machines 330 4.7.1 AC Rotating Machines 331 4.7.1.1 The Rotating Magnetic Field 331 4.7.1.2 The Relationship between Electrical Frequency and the Speed of Magnetic Field Rotation 333 4.7.1.3 Reversing the Direction of the Magnetic Field Rotation 335 4.7.1.4 The Induced Voltage in AC Machines 335 4.7.1.5 The Induced Voltage in a Coil on a Two-Pole Stator 335 4.7.1.6 The Induced Voltage in a Three-Phase Set of Coils 337 4.7.1.7 The rms Voltage in a Three-Phase Stator 338 4.7.2 The Induced Torque in an AC Machine 338 4.8 Summary 339 Problems 339 References 340 5 DC Machines 341 5.1 Preliminary Remarks 341 5.2 Construction and Types of DC Generator 342 5.2.1 Construction of DC Machine 342 5.2.2 Types of DC Generator 343 5.3 Principle of Operation of DC Generator 345 5.3.1 Voltage Build-Up in a DC Generator 346 5.3.2 Function of Commutator 347 5.4 Commutation Problem and Solution 349 5.4.1 Brush Shifting 349 5.4.2 Commutating Poles 350 5.4.3 Compensating Windings 350 5.5 Types of Windings 351 5.6 emf Equations in a DC Generator 351 5.7 Brush Placement in a DC Machine 353 5.8 Equivalent Circuit of DC Generator 354 5.9 Losses of DC Generator 354 5.10 Armature Reaction 360 5.10.1 No-Load Operation 361 5.10.2 Loaded Operation 361 5.11 Principle of Operation of a DC Motor 362 5.11.1 Equivalent Circuit of a DC Motor 363 5.12 emf and Torque Equations of DC Motor 364 5.13 Types of DC Motor 364 5.13.1 Separately Excited DC Motor 364 5.13.2 Self-Excited DC Motor 365 5.13.2.1 Shunt DC Motor 365 5.13.2.2 Series DC Motor 366 5.14 Characteristics of DC Motors 367 5.14.1 Separately Excited and DC Shunt Motor 368 5.14.2 DC Series Motor 369 5.14.3 Compound Motor 370 5.15 Starting of a DC Motor 371 5.15.1 Design of a Starter for a DC Motor 372 5.15.2 Types of Starters 373 5.15.2.1 Three-Point Starter 373 5.15.2.2 Four-Point Starter 374 5.16 Speed Control of a DC Motor 374 5.16.1 Separately Excited and DC Shunt Motor 375 5.16.2 DC Series Motor 376 5.17 Solved Examples 378 5.18 Matlab/Simulink Model of a DC Machine 387 5.18.1 Matlab/Simulink Model of a Separately/ Shunt DC Motor 387 5.18.2 Matlab/Simulink Model of a DC Series Motor 387 5.18.3 Matlab/Simulink Model of a Compound DC Motor 388 5.19 Summary 392 Problems 392 Reference 399 6 Three-Phase Induction Machine 401 6.1 Preliminary Remarks 401 6.2 Construction of a Three-Phase Induction Machine 402 6.2.1 Stator 402 6.2.2 Stator Frame 403 6.2.3 Rotor 403 6.3 Principle Operation of a Three-Phase Induction Motor 404 6.3.1 Slip in an Induction Motor 406 6.3.2 Frequency of Rotor Voltage and Current 407 6.3.3 Induction Machine and Transformer 408 6.4 Per-phase Equivalent Circuit of a Three-Phase Induction Machine 408 6.5 Power Flow Diagram in a Three-Phase Induction Motor 415 6.6 Power Relations in a Three-Phase Induction Motor 416 6.7 Steps to Find Powers and Efficiency 417 6.8 Per-Phase Equivalent Circuit Considering Stray-Load Losses 420 6.9 Torque and Power using Thevenin’s Equivalent Circuit 421 6.10 Torque-Speed Characteristics 424 6.10.1 Condition for Maximum Torque 427 6.10.2 Condition for Maximum Torque at Starting 429 6.10.3 Approximate Equations 429 6.11 Losses in a Three-Phase Induction Machine 433 6.11.1 Copper Losses or Resistive Losses 433 6.11.2 Magnetic Losses 434 6.11.3 Mechanical Losses 434 6.11.4 Stray-Load Losses 434 6.12 Testing of a Three-Phase Induction Motor 435 6.12.1 No-Load Test 435 6.12.2 Blocked Rotor Test 436 6.12.3 DC Test 437 6.12.4 Load Test 438 6.12.5 International Standards for Efficiency of Induction Machines 441 6.12.6 International Standards for the Evaluation of Induction Motor Efficiency 442 6.13 Starting of a Three-Phase Induction Motor 443 6.13.1 Direct-on-Line Start 446 6.13.2 Line Resistance Start 447 6.13.3 Star-Delta Starter 448 6.13.4 Autotransformer Starter 449 6.14 Speed Control of Induction Machine 451 6.14.1 By Varying the Frequency of the Supply 451 6.14.2 Pole Changing Method 452 6.14.2.1 Multiple Numbers of Windings 453 6.14.2.2 Consequent Pole Method 453 6.14.3 Stator Voltage Control 454 6.14.3.1 Voltage/Frequency = Constant Control 455 6.14.3.2 Rotor Resistance Variation 456 6.14.3.3 Rotor Voltage Injection Method 456 6.14.3.4 Cascade Connection of Induction Machines 456 6.14.3.5 Pole-Phase Modulation for Speed Control 458 6.15 Matlab/Simulink Modelling of the Three-Phase Induction Motor 461 6.15.1 Plotting Torque-Speed Curve under Steady-State Condition 464 6.15.2 Dynamic Simulation of Induction Machine 464 6.16 Practice Examples 469 6.17 Summary 482 Problems 482 References 489 7 Synchronous Machines 491 7.1 Preliminary Remarks 491 7.2 Synchronous Machine Structures 492 7.2.1 Stator and Rotor 492 7.3 Working Principle of the Synchronous Generator 496 7.3.1 The Synchronous Generator under No-Load 498 7.3.2 The Synchronous Generator under Load 498 7.4 Working Principle of the Synchronous Motor 501 7.5 Starting of the Synchronous Motor 502 7.5.1 Starting by External Motor 502 7.5.2 Starting by using Damper Winding 503 7.5.3 Starting by Variable Frequency Stator Supply 503 7.6 Armature Reaction in Synchronous Motor 503 7.7 Equivalent Circuit and Phasor Diagram of the Synchronous Machine 506 7.7.1 Phasor Diagram of the Synchronous Generator 508 7.7.2 Phasor Diagram of the Synchronous Motor 510 7.8 Open-Circuit and Short-Circuit Characteristics 514 7.8.1 Open-Circuit Curve 514 7.8.2 Short-Circuit Curve 516 7.8.3 The Unsaturated Synchronous Reactance 517 7.8.4 The Saturated Synchronous Reactance 517 7.8.5 Short-Circuit Ratio 518 7.9 Voltage Regulation 520 7.9.1 Emf or Synchronous Method 521 7.9.2 The Ampere-Turn or mmf Method 522 7.9.3 Zero-Power Factor Method or Potier Triangle Method 526 7.9.3.1 Steps for Drawing Potier Triangles 526 7.9.3.2 Procedure to Obtain Voltage Regulation using the Potier Triangle Method 526 7.10 Efficiency of the Synchronous Machine 529 7.11 Torque and Power Curves 533 7.11.1 Real/Active Output Power of the Synchronous Generator 534 7.11.2 Reactive Output Power of the Synchronous Generator 535 7.11.3 Complex Input Power to the Synchronous Generator 536 7.11.4 Real/Active Input Power to the Synchronous Generator 536 7.11.5 Reactive Input Power to the Synchronous Generator 537 7.12 Maximum Power Output of the Synchronous Generator 537 7.13 Capability Curve of the Synchronous Machine 541 7.14 Salient Pole Machine 545 7.14.1 Phasor Diagram of a Salient Pole Synchronous Generator 547 7.14.2 Power Delivered by a Salient Pole Synchronous Generator 552 7.14.3 Maximum Active and Reactive Power Delivered by a Salient Pole Synchronous Generator 555 7.14.3.1 Active Power 555 7.14.3.2 Reactive Power 555 7.15 Synchronization of an Alternator with a Bus-Bar 558 7.15.1 Process of Synchronization 560 7.16 Operation of a Synchronous Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus-Bar (Constant Vt and f ) 562 7.16.1 Motor Operation of Change in Excitation at Fixed Shaft Power 562 7.16.2 Generator Operation for Change in Output Power at Fixed Excitation 565 7.17 Hunting in the Synchronous Motor 570 7.17.1 Role of the DamperWinding 572 7.18 Parallel Operation of Synchronous Generators 572 7.18.1 The Synchronous Generator Operating in Parallel with the Infinite Bus Bar 574 7.19 Matlab/Simulink Model of a Salient Pole Synchronous Machine 581 7.19.1 Results Motoring Mode 585 7.19.2 Results Generator Mode 585 7.20 Summary 586 Problems 587 Reference 591 8 Single-Phase and Special Machines 593 8.1 Preliminary Remarks 593 8.2 Single-phase Induction Machine 593 8.2.1 Field System in a Single-phase Machine 594 8.3 Equivalent Circuit of Single-phase Machines 597 8.3.1 Equivalent Circuit Analysis 599 8.3.1.1 Approximate Equivalent Circuit 600 8.3.1.2 Thevenin’s Equivalent Circuit 601 8.4 How to Make a Single-phase Induction Motor Self Starting 602 8.5 Testing of an Induction Machine 608 8.5.1 DC Test 609 8.5.2 No-load Test 609 8.5.3 Blocked-Rotor Test 610 8.6 Types of Single-Phase Induction Motors 612 8.6.1 Split-Phase Induction Motor 612 8.6.2 Capacitor-Start Induction Motor 612 8.6.3 Capacitor-Start Capacitor-Run Induction Motor (Two-Value Capacitor Method) 613 8.7 Single-Phase Induction Motor Winding Design 614 8.7.1 Split-Phase Induction Motor 617 8.7.2 Capacitor-Start Motors 618 8.8 Permanent Split-Capacitor (PSC) Motor 621 8.9 Shaded-Pole Induction Motor 622 8.10 Universal Motor 622 8.11 Switched-Reluctance Motor (SRM) 624 8.12 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machines 624 8.13 Brushless DC Motor 625 8.14 Mathematical Model of the Single-phase Induction Motor 626 8.15 Simulink Model of a Single-Phase Induction Motor 627 8.16 Summary 633 Problems 633 Reference 637 9 Motors for Electric Vehicles and Renewable Energy Systems 639 9.1 Introduction 639 9.2 Components of Electric Vehicles 641 9.2.1 Types of EVs 641 9.2.1.1 Battery-Based EVs 642 9.2.1.2 Hybrid EVs 643 9.2.1.3 Fuel-Cell EVs 646 9.2.2 Significant Components of EVs 649 9.2.2.1 Battery Bank 649 9.2.2.2 DC-DC Converters 661 9.2.2.3 Power Inverter 662 9.2.2.4 Electric Motor 663 9.2.2.5 Transmission System or Gear Box 663 9.2.2.6 Other Components 663 9.3 Challenges and Requirements of Electric Machines for EVs 663 9.3.1 Challenges of Electric Machines for EVs 664 9.3.2 Requirements of Electric Machines for EVs 664 9.4 Commercially Available Electric Machines for EVs 667 9.4.1 DC Motors 667 9.4.2 Induction Motor 667 9.4.3 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors (PMSM) 668 9.4.4 Brushless DC Motors 668 9.4.5 Switched Reluctance Motors (SRMs) 669 9.5 Challenges and Requirements of Electric Machines for RES 669 9.6 Commercially Available Electric Machines for RES 671 9.6.1 DC Machine 671 9.6.2 Induction Machines 671 9.6.3 Synchronous Machines 674 9.6.4 Advanced Machines for Renewable Energy 675 9.7 Summary 676 References 677 10 Multiphase (More than Three-Phase) Machines Concepts and Characteristics 679 10.1 Preliminary Remarks 679 10.2 Necessity of Multiphase Machines 679 10.2.1 Evolution of Multiphase Machines 680 10.2.2 Advantages of Multiphase Machines 683 10.2.2.1 Better Space Harmonics Profile 683 10.2.2.2 Better Torque Ripple Profile 684 10.2.2.3 Improved Efficiency 686 10.2.2.4 Fault Tolerant Capability 686 10.2.2.5 Reduced Ratings of Semiconductor Switches and Better Power/Torque Distribution 688 10.2.2.6 Torque Enhancement by Injecting Lower-Order Harmonics into Stator Currents 688 10.2.3 Applications of Multiphase Machines 689 10.3 Working Principle 691 10.3.1 Multiphase Induction Machine 691 10.3.2 Multiphase Synchronous Machine 691 10.4 Stator-Winding Design 692 10.4.1 Three-PhaseWindings 695 10.4.1.1 Single-Layer Full-Pitch Winding 695 10.4.1.2 Single-Layer Short-Pitch Winding 698 10.4.1.3 Double-Layer Full-PitchWinding 699 10.4.1.4 Double-Layer Short-Pitch Winding 699 10.4.1.5 Fractional-Slot Winding 701 10.4.2 Five-PhaseWindings 701 10.4.3 Six-Phase Windings 706 10.4.3.1 Symmetrical Winding of Six-Phase Machine 707 10.4.3.2 Asymmetrical Winding 710 10.4.4 Nine-PhaseWindings 710 10.5 Mathematical Modelling of Multiphase Machines 715 10.5.1 Mathematical Modelling of Multiphase Induction Machines in Original Phase-Variable Domain 715 10.5.2 Transformation Matrix for Multiphase Machines 718 10.5.3 Modelling of Multiphase Induction Machines in Arbitrary Reference Frames 720 10.5.4 Commonly used Reference Frames 722 10.5.5 Modelling of a Multiphase Synchronous Machine 723 10.6 Vector Control Techniques for Multiphase Machines 725 10.6.1 Indirect Field-Oriented Control or Vector-Control Techniques for Multiphase Induction Machines 726 10.6.2 Vector Control for Multiphase Synchronous Machines 730 10.7 Matlab/Simulink Model of Multiphase Machines 731 10.7.1 Dynamic Model of the Nine-Phase Induction Machine 731 10.7.2 Dynamic Model of the Nine-Phase Synchronous Machine 734 10.8 Summary 741 Problems 741 References 742 11 Numerical Simulation of Electrical Machines using the Finite Element Method 745 11.1 Introduction 745 11.2 Methods of Solving EM Analysis 747 11.2.1 Analytical Techniques 749 11.2.2 Numerical Techniques 750 11.2.2.1 Finite Difference Method 752 11.2.2.2 Finite Element Method 753 11.2.2.3 Solution of Laplace Equation Using the Finite Element Method 753 11.3 Formulation of 2-Dimensional and 3-Dimensional Analysis 758 11.3.1 Maxwell Equations 759 11.3.1.1 Gauss Law 759 11.3.1.2 Gauss Law of Magnetism 760 11.3.1.3 Ampere’s Integral Law 761 11.3.1.4 Faraday’s Integral Law 761 11.3.1.5 Differential Form of Maxwell Equations 761 11.3.2 FEM Adaptive Meshing 763 11.3.3 FEM Variation Principle 764 11.4 Analysis and Implementation of FEM Machine Models 765 11.4.1 RMxprt Design to Implement a Maxwell Model of Machine 765 11.4.2 Power Converter Design in Simplorer 776 11.4.3 Integration of Power Converter with a Maxwell Model for Testing Drive 776 11.5 Example Model of Three-Phase IM in Ansys Maxwell 2D 778 11.6 Summary 793 References 793 Index 795

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface v List of Acronyms and Abbreviations ix Introduction 1 Challenges of Traditional Physical and Cyber Systems 1 Research Trends in Cyber-Physical Systems (CPSs) 3 Stability of CPSs 3 Reliability of CPSs 6 Opportunities for CPS Applications 7 Managing Reliability and Feasibility of CPSs 7 Ensuring Cybersecurity of CPSs 9 Fundamentals of CPSs 13 Models for Exploring CPSs 14 Control-Block-Diagram of CPSs 14 Control Signal in CPSs 14 Degraded Actuator and Sensor 14 Time-Varying Model of CPSs 15 Implementation in TrueTime Simulator 16 Introduction of TrueTime Simulator 16 Architecture of CPSs in TrueTime 17 Evaluation and Verification of CPSs 18 CPS Performance Evaluation 18 CPS Performance Index 18 Reliability Evaluation of CPSs 19 CPS Model Verification 20 CPS Performance Improvement 21 PSO-Based Reliability Enhancement 22 Optimal PID-Automatic Generation Control (AGC) 23 Stability Enhancement of CPSs 29 Integration of Physical and Cyber Models 30 Basics of Wide-Area Power Systems (WAPS) 30 Physical Layer 30 Cyber Layer 31 WAPS Realized in TrueTime 32 An Illustrative WAPS 33 Illustrative Physical Layer 33 Illustrative Cyber Layer 34 Illustrative Integrated System 36 Settings of Stability Analysis 36 Settings of Delay Predictions 37 Settings of Illustrative WAPS 37 Cases for Illustrative WAPS 38 Hidden Markov Model (HMM)-Based Stability Improvement 38 Online Smith Predictor 38 Initialization of Discrete HMM (DHMM) 39 Parameter Estimation of DHMM 41 Delay Prediction via DHMM 43 Smith Predictor Structure 44 Delay Predictions 44 Settings of DHMM 45 Prediction Comparison 46 Performance of Smith Predictor 47 Settings of Smith Predictor 47 Analysis of Case 1 47 Analysis of Case 2 48 Stability Enhancement of Illustrative WAPS 49 Eigenvalue Analysis and Delay Impact 49 Sensitivity Analysis of Network Parameters 49 Optimal AGC 50 Optimal Controller Performance 50 Scenario 1 Analysis 51 Scenario 2 Analysis 51 Scenario 3 Analysis 52 Scenario 4 Analysis 52 Robustness of Optimal AGC 52 Reliability Analysis of CPSs 65 Conceptual Distributed Generation Systems (DGSs) 65 Mathematical Model of Degraded Network 65 Model of Transmission Delay 66 Model of Packet Dropout 67 Scenarios of Degraded Network 68 Modeling and Simulation of DGSs 69 DGS Model 69 Preliminary Model 69 Power Source Model 70 Data Interpolation 71 Reliability Estimation Via Optimal Power Flow (OPF) 71 Data Prediction 71 Monte Carlo Simulation (MCS) of DGSs 73 OPF of DGSs 74 Actual Cost and Reliability Analysis 75 OPF of DGSs Against Unreliable Network 76 Settings of Networked DGSs 76 OPF Under Different Demand Levels 78 OPF Under Entire Period 79 Maintenance of Aging CPSs 87 Data-driven Degradation Model for CPSs 88 Degraded Control System 88 Parameter Estimation via EM Algorithm 89 Load Frequency Control (LFC) Performance Criteria 90 Maintenance Model and Cost Model 91 Performance Based Maintenance (PBM) Model 91 Cost Model 93 Applications to DGSs 94 Output of Aging Generators 94 Impact of Aging on DGSs 94 Settings of Aging DGSs 94 Validations of Generator Performance Indexes 95 Quantitative Aging Impact 96 Applications to Gas Turbine Plant 98 Settings of Networked DGS Sensitivity Analysis of PBM 98 Impact of Degradation on LFC 98 Numerical Sensitivity Analysis 98 Pictorial Sensitivity Analysis 99 Optimal Maintenance Strategy 100 Maintenance Models Comparison 100 Game Theory Based CPS Protection Plan 109 Vulnerability Model for CPSs 110 Multi-state Attack-Defence Game 111 Backgrounds of Game Model for CPSs 111 Mathematical Game Model 112 Attack Consequence and Optimal Defence 113 Damage Cost Model 113 Attack Uncertainty 114 Optimal Defence Plan 115 Applications to DGSs with Uncertain Cyber-Attacks 116 Settings of Game Model 116 Optimal Protection with Constant Resource Allocation 116 Impact Under Constant Case 116 Optimal Constant Resource Allocation Fraction 117 Optimal Protection with Dynamic Resource Allocation 118 Vulnerability Model Under Dynamic Case 119 Optimal Dynamic Resource Allocation Fraction 120 Optimization Results Justification 121 Bayesian Based Cyberteam Deployment 125 Poisson Distribution based Cyber-attacks 125 Impacts of DoS Attack 125 Poisson Arrival Model Verification 126 Average Arrival Attacks 127 Cost of Multi-node Bandit Model 128 Regret Function of Worst Case 128 Upper Bound on Cost 129 Thompson-Hedge Algorithm 130 Hedge Algorithm 130 Details of Thompson-Hedge Algorithm 131 Separation of Target Regret 132 Upper Bound of Λ_1 133 Upper Bound of Λ_2 133 Upper Bound of Regret R^TH 134 Applications to Smart Grids 135 Operation Cost of Smart Grid 135 Numerical Analysis of Cost Sequences 137 Performance of Thompson-Hedge Algorithm 137 Comparison Study Against R.EXP3 137 Sensitivity to the Variation 140 Recent Advances in CPS Modeling, Stability and Reliability 145 Modeling Techniques for CPS Components 145 Inverse Gaussian Process 145 Hitting Time to a Curved Boundary 146 Estimator Error 147 Theoretical Stability Analysis 148 Impacts of Uncertainties 148 Small Gain Theorem based Stability Criteria 149 Robust Stability Criteria 150 Game Model for CPSs 151 References 153 Index 177

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Contributors xvii 1 Introduction 1Yahya Rahmat-Samii and Erdem Topsakal 2 Ultraflexible Electrotextile Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) Radio-Frequency Coils 11Daisong Zhang and Yahya Rahmat-Samii 2.1 Introduction to MRI and the Basic Antenna Considerations 11 2.2 Motivations, Challenges, and Strategies for MRI RF Coil Design 15 2.2.1 Design Motivations and Challenges for MRI RF Coils 15 2.2.2 Design Strategies and Roadmap of MRI RF Coils 18 2.3 Selection, Fabrication, and Characterization of Electrotextiles for RF Coils 20 2.3.1 Selection and Fabrication of Flexible Material Candidate 20 2.3.2 Characterization of Electrotextiles 22 2.4 Design of Single-Element Flexible RF Coil 26 2.4.1 RF Coil Element Design with a Rigid Material 26 2.4.2 RF Coil Element Design with Electrotextile Cloth 30 2.4.3 RF Coil Element Design with Tunable Circuitry 31 2.5 Design of Flexible RF Coil Array and System Integration with MRI Scanner 31 2.5.1 RF Coil Array Design and Characterization 32 2.5.2 RF Coil Array System Integration with MRI Scanner 33 2.6 Characterization of RF Coil Array 34 2.6.1 Characterization of RF Coil Array System with Phantom 35 2.6.2 Characterization of RF Coil Array System with Cadaver 38 2.7 Conclusion 38 References 38 3 Wearable Sensors for Motion Capture 43Vigyanshu Mishra and Asimina Kiourti 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 The Promise of Motion Capture 45 3.2.1 Healthcare 45 3.2.2 Sports 47 3.2.3 Human–Machine Interfaces 47 3.2.4 Animation/Movies 48 3.2.5 Biomedical Research 48 3.3 Motion Capture in Contrived Settings 49 3.3.1 Camera-Based Motion Capture Laboratory 49 3.3.2 Electromagnetics-Based Sensors 52 3.3.2.1 RADAR Based 52 3.3.2.2 Wi-Fi Based 55 3.3.2.3 RFID Based 57 3.3.3 Magnetic Motion Capture System 59 3.3.4 Imaging Methods 60 3.3.5 Additional Sensors/Tools 60 3.3.5.1 Goniometers 61 3.3.5.2 Force Plates 62 3.4 Wearable Motion Capture (Noncontrived Settings) 63 3.4.1 Inertial Measurement Units (IMUs) 63 3.4.2 Bending/Deformation Sensors 65 3.4.2.1 Strain Based 65 3.4.2.2 Fiber Optics Based 68 3.4.3 Time-of-Flight (TOF) Sensors 70 3.4.3.1 Acoustic Based 70 3.4.3.2 Radio Based 71 3.4.4 Received Signal Strength-based Sensors 73 3.4.4.1 Antenna Based 73 3.4.4.2 Magnetoinductive Sensors/Electrically Small Loop Antennas 74 3.5 Conclusion 78 References 82 4 Antennas and Wireless Power Transfer for Brain-Implantable Sensors 91Leena Ukkonen, Lauri Sydänheimo, Toni Björninen and Shubin Ma 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Implantable Antennas for Wireless Biomedical Devices 92 4.3 Wireless Power Transfer Techniques for Implantable Devices 95 4.3.1 Inductive Power Transfer 95 4.3.2 Ultrasonic Power Transfer 97 4.3.3 Near-Field Capacitive Power Transfer 98 4.3.4 Far-Field Power Transfer 99 4.3.5 Computing the Fundamental Performance Indicators of Near-Field WPT Systems Using Two-Port Network Approach 100 4.4 Human Body Models for Implantable Antenna Development 107 4.4.1 Comparison of Human Head Phantoms with Different Complexities for Intracranial Implantable Antenna Development 110 4.5 Wirelessly Powered Intracranial Pressure Sensing System Integrating Near- and Far-Field Antennas 115 4.5.1 Far-Field Antenna for Data Transmission 116 4.5.2 Antenna for Near-Field Wireless Power Transfer 120 4.6 Far-Field RFID Antennas for Intracranial Wireless Communication 123 4.6.1 Split Ring Resonator-Based Spatially Distributed Implantable Antenna System 123 4.6.2 LC-Tank-Based Miniature Implantable RFID Antenna 127 4.6.3 Antenna Prototype and Wireless Measurement 132 4.7 Conclusion 135 References 136 5 In Vitro and In Vivo Testing of Implantable Antennas 145Ryan B. Green, Mary V. Smith and Erdem Topsakal 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Antenna Materials 146 5.2.1 Biocompatibility 146 5.2.2 Miniaturization 149 5.2.3 Biocompatible Conductors and Thin Films 150 5.2.4 Ports and Cables 153 5.3 Bench Top Testing 154 5.3.1 Ex Vivo Tissues 154 5.3.2 In Vitro Gels 154 5.3.2.1 Mixture and Characterization of Skin-Mimicking Material 156 5.3.2.2 Mixture and Characterization of Adipose-Mimicking Material 164 5.3.2.3 Mixture and Characterization of Muscle-Mimicking Material 166 5.4 In Vivo Testing 171 5.4.1 Different Animal Models for Different Frequency Bands 174 5.4.2 Dielectric Mismatch 177 5.4.3 Practical Testing Concerns 181 5.5 Conclusion 182 Acknowledgment 183 References 183 6 Wireless Localization for a Capsule Endoscopy: Techniques and Solutions 191Yongxin Guo and Guoliang Shao 6.1 Introduction 191 6.1.1 Visual-based Localization Method 194 6.1.2 Radio-frequency Localization 196 6.1.3 Microwave Imaging 198 6.1.4 Magnetic Localization 199 6.2 Static Magnetic Localization 201 6.2.1 Model of the Target Magnet 202 6.2.2 Noise Cancellation and Sensor Calibration 205 6.2.3 Solving the Inverse Problem 207 6.2.4 Sensors Distribution 212 6.2.5 Conclusion of the Static Magnetic Localization 215 6.3 Modulated Magnetic Localization 215 6.3.1 Static Field Modulation 215 6.3.2 Inductive-based Magnetic Localization 216 6.4 Conclusion 225 References 227 7 Study on Channel Characteristics and Performance of Liver-Implanted Wireless Communications 235Pongphan Leelatien, Koichi Ito and Kazuyuki Saito 7.1 Introduction 235 7.2 Study of In-Body Communications at Liver Area Using Simplified Multilayer Phantoms 238 7.2.1 UWB Antenna 239 7.2.2 Measurement Setup 239 7.2.3 Simulation Setup 239 7.2.4 Experimental and Numerical Results 243 7.2.4.1 S11 and S22 Results 243 7.2.4.2 S21 Results 244 7.3 Numerical Study of Liver-Implanted Channel Characteristics Using Digital Human Models 244 7.3.1 Simulation Setup 245 7.3.2 Return Loss Results 246 7.3.3 S21 Results 248 7.3.4 Path Loss Results 250 7.4 The Influence of Antenna Misalignment 252 7.4.1 Simulation Setup 252 7.4.2 Study Results and Analysis 252 7.5 Channel Characteristics for the In- to Off-Body Scenario 256 7.5.1 Simulation Setup 256 7.5.2 Return Loss Results 257 7.5.3 Path Loss Results for the In- to Off-Body Scenario 258 7.6 System Performance Evaluation 260 7.6.1 Link Budget Evaluation and Analysis 260 7.6.1.1 In- to On-Body Scenario 262 7.6.1.2 In- to Off-Body Scenario 263 7.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility Evaluations 263 7.7.1 Analysis 265 7.7.2 SAR Results 265 7.8 Conclusions 268 References 270 8 High-Efficiency Multicoil Wireless Power and Data Transfer for Biomedical Implants and Neuroprosthetics 277Manjunath Machnoor and Gianluca Lazzi 8.1 Introduction 277 8.2 Multicoil System to Achieve Efficient Power Transfer 279 8.2.1 Two-Coil WPT Systems 280 8.2.2 Conventional Three-Coil WPT System 284 8.2.3 Performance of the Two- and Three-Coil Systems as a Function of RX Coil Size 286 8.2.4 Description of the Proposed Three-Coil System 287 8.2.5 Efficient Use of Implanted Wire of the Coil in a Small RX Three-Coil System 292 8.2.5.1 Circuit Technique Description 292 8.2.5.2 Testing the Technique: Comparison 1 292 8.2.6 Reducing Power Dissipation in the Implanted RX 293 8.2.6.1 Circuit Technique Description 293 8.2.6.2 Testing the Technique: Comparison 2 295 8.2.7 Design Procedure and the Advantages of the Proposed Three-Coil System Over the Conventional Three-Coil System Design 298 8.2.7.1 Design Procedure 298 8.2.7.2 Tolerance to Load Changes 299 8.2.7.3 Advantage 2: Reducing Currents in the Secondary Coil 301 8.2.7.4 K12 and Cm for Optimization of System Performance: Layout Design Advantages 302 8.2.7.5 Effects of Tissue and Tissue Parameters on the Power Delivery 303 8.2.8 Experiments: Measurements and Results 304 8.3 Justifying the Advantages of Using Multicoil WPT Systems for Data Transfer 306 8.4 Conclusion 312 References 313 9 Wireless Drug Delivery Devices 319Yang Hao, Ahsan Noor Khan, Alexey Ermakov and Gleb Sukhorukov 9.1 Introduction 319 9.2 Active and Passive Drug Delivery Devices 320 9.3 Capsule-Mediated Active Drug Delivery Process 320 9.4 Transdermal and Implantable Devices 322 9.5 Micro- and Nanoscale Devices 322 9.6 Packaging and Integration of Components 323 9.7 Materials for Drug Delivery Devices 324 9.8 Organ-Specific Drug Delivery Devices 324 9.9 Wireless Communication for Drug Delivery Devices 325 9.9.1 Microchips-Mediated Drug Delivery Devices 326 9.9.2 Micropumps and Microvalves-Mediated Drug Delivery Devices 328 9.9.3 Microrobots-Mediated Drug Delivery 331 9.9.4 Material-Mediated Drug Delivery 332 9.10 Carrier Types for Drug Delivery 335 References 338 10 Minimally Invasive Microwave Ablation Antennas 345Hung Luyen, Yahya Mohtashami, James F. Sawicki, Susan C. Hagness and Nader Behdad 10.1 Introduction 345 10.1.1 Overview of Microwave Ablation Therapy 345 10.1.2 Historical Development and Current Landscape of Research on MWA Antennas 347 10.1.3 Impact of Frequency on MWA Performance 352 10.1.4 Focus of this Chapter 353 10.2 Toward Length Reduction for Ablation Antennas: Demonstration of Higher Frequency Microwave Ablation 354 10.2.1 Electromagnetic Evaluation of Microwave Ablation Antennas Operating in the 1.9–18-GHz Range 354 10.2.2 Performance of Higher Frequency Microwave Ablation in the Presence of Perfusion 355 10.3 Reduced-Diameter, Balun-Equipped Microwave Ablation Antenna Designs 359 10.3.1 Antennas with Conventional Coaxial Baluns Implemented on Air-Filled Coax Sections 361 10.3.2 Coax-Fed Antenna with a Tapered Slot Balun 364 10.4 Balun-Free Microwave Ablation Antenna Designs 367 10.4.1 High-Input Impedance Helical Monopole with an Integrated Impedance-Matching Section 368 10.4.2 Low-Input Impedance Helical Dipole Design 373 10.5 Toward More Flexibility and Customization in Microwave Ablation Treatment 377 10.5.1 Ex Vivo Performance of a Flexible Microwave Ablation Antenna 377 10.5.2 Hybrid Slot/Monopole Antenna with Directional Heating Patterns 380 10.5.3 Non-Coaxial-Based Microwave Ablation Antennas with Symmetric and Asymmetric Heating Patterns 383 10.6 Conclusions 387 References 389 11 Inkjet-/3D-/4D-Printed Nanotechnology-Enabled Radar, Sensing, and RFID Modules for Internet of Things, “Smart Skin,” and “Zero Power” Medical Applications 399Manos M. Tentzeris, Aline Eid, Tong-Hong Lin, Jimmy G.D. Hester, Yepu Cui, Ajibayo Adeyeye, Bijan Tehrani and Syed A. Nauroze 11.1 Introduction 399 11.2 Batteryless “Green” Powering Schemes for Perpetual Wearables 400 11.2.1 Wearable Rectennas Compatible with Legacy Wireless Networks 401 11.2.2 New Opportunities for Power Harvesting from 5G Cellular Networks 402 11.2.2.1 28-GHz Rotman Lens-Based Energy-Harvesting System 402 11.2.2.2 Integration of W-Band Zero-Bias Diode for Harvesting Applications 404 11.3 Additive Manufacturing Technologies for Low-Cost, Compact, and Wearable System 406 11.3.1 Wireless System Packaging for On-Body Devices 406 11.3.2 Energy-Autonomous System-on-Package Designs 407 11.4 Energy-Autonomous Communications for On-Body Sensing Networks 409 11.4.1 Energy-Autonomous Long-Range Wearable Sensor Networks 409 11.4.2 Radar and Backscatter Communications 414 11.4.2.1 FMCW Radar-Enabled Localizable Millimeter-Wave RFID 415 11.4.3 Flexible and Deployable 4D Origami-Inspired “Smart Walls” for EMI Shielding and Communication Applications 416 11.5 Low-Power Sensors for Wearable Wireless Sensing Systems 422 11.5.1 Carbon-Nanomaterials-Based Fully Inkjet-Printed Gas Sensors 422 11.5.2 Energy-Autonomous Micropump System for Wearable and IoT Microfluidic Sensing Devices 425 11.5.3 Fully Inkjet-Printed Encodable Flexible Microfluidic Chipless RFID Sensor 428 11.6 Conclusion 431 References 431 12 High-Density Electronic Integration for Wearable Sensing 435Shubhendu Bhardwaj, Raj Pulugurtha and John L. Volakis 12.1 Introduction 435 12.2 Brief Comparison of Flexible Conductor Technologies 435 12.3 Review and History of E-Fiber-Based RF Technology 437 12.4 Fabrication of Conductive Flexile E-Fiber Surfaces and Loss Performance 438 12.5 Antennas Using Embroidery-Based Conductive Surfaces 441 12.5.1 Patch Antenna for Wireless Power Transfer and Harvesting 442 12.5.2 Body-Worn Antenna for Wireless Communication 443 12.6 Circuits and Systems Using Embroidery-Based Conductive Surfaces 445 12.6.1 Far-Field Radio-Frequency Power Collection System on Clothing 445 12.6.2 Near-Zone Power Collection Using Fabric-Integrated Antennas 448 12.7 Voltage-Controlled Oscillator for Wound-Sensing Applications 449 12.8 High-Density Integration 451 12.8.1 Interconnect Features on Laminate Substrates 451 12.8.2 Interconnects on Flex Substrates 454 12.8.3 Device Assembly 455 12.8.4 3D Packaging 457 12.8.5 Applications of High-Density Packaging in RF and Sensing 459 12.8.6 High-Density RF Flex Packaging 461 12.8.7 Hybrid Flex Sensor-Processing-Communication Systems 462 References 462 13 Coupling-Independent Sensing Systems with Fully Passive Sensors 469Siavash Kananian, George Alexopoulos and Ada Poon 13.1 Introduction 469 13.2 Forced vs. Self-Oscillating Near-Field Readout 475 13.3 Readout Techniques 477 13.3.1 Forced Oscillation Techniques with Nonresonant Primary 477 13.3.2 Forced Oscillation Techniques with Resonant Primary 486 13.3.3 Self-Oscillating Techniques 498 13.4 Comparison of the State of the Art 507 13.5 Conclusion 516 References 517 14 Wireless and Wearable Biomarker Analysis 523Shuyu Lin, Bo Wang, Ryan Shih and Sam Emaminejad 14.1 Introduction 523 14.2 Sweat-Based Biomarkers 524 14.2.1 Metabolites 524 14.2.2 Electrolytes 525 14.2.3 Steroids 525 14.2.4 Proteins 526 14.2.5 Xenobiotics 526 14.3 Wearable Chemical Sensing Interfaces 527 14.3.1 Electroenzymatic Sensors 528 14.3.2 Ion-selective Sensing Interfaces 530 14.3.3 Bioaffinity-based Sensors 531 14.3.4 Synthetic Receptor-based Chemical Sensors 532 14.3.5 Recognition Element-free Sensors 533 14.4 Biofluid Accessibility 533 14.5 Microfluidic Interfaces 534 14.5.1 Types of Microfluidic Interfaces 535 14.5.2 Biofluid Manipulation in Microfluidic Interfaces 536 14.6 Electronic and Wireless Integration 538 References 539 Appendix A Antennas and Sensors for Medical Applications: A Representative Literature Review 547Lingnan Song and Yahya Rahmat-Samii Index 585

Read more less

Book SynopsisA straightforward demystification of electronics and the Internet of Things A Geek Girl''s Guide to Electronics and the Internet of Things breaks down and simplifies electronics and the Internet of Things for the layperson. Written by a leading technical school instructor with a talent for bringing complex topics to everyday people, this book provides concrete examples and practical advice for anyone interested in building, repairing, or studying electronics and functional Internet of Things (IoT) devices. A Geek Girl''s Guide to Electronics and the Internet of Things explores a wide range of topics including, among others: Ohm''s and Watt''s Law Series and Parallel Circuits Diodes, transistors, capacitors and relays Motors and Pulse with Modulation Using light to control electricity Photovoltaic Cells and Transducers Enhancing circuits with Arduino Connecting circuits to nTable of ContentsIntroduction xxiii Part I IoT and Electricity Basics 1 Chapter 1 IoT and Electronics 3 IoT in a Nutshell 4 Parts of an IoT System 4 Devices 4 Sensors 5 Circuits, Software, and Microprocessors 6 Communication 7 Levels 7 Protocols and Standards 7 Data Analytics and Management 8 The User Experience 8 Challenges in Implementing IoT 9 IoT into the Future 9 Chapter 2 Electricity: Its Good and Bad Behavior 11 Try This: Creating Some Static 11 Levitate a Styrofoam Plate 12 Bend Water 12 Creating Light with Static 12 Magically Move a Styrofoam Ball 13 Electricity at an Atomic Level 14 Conductors and Insulators 15 Characteristics of Electricity 17 Current 18 Voltage 18 Resistance 19 Induction and Conduction 19 Try This: Creating a Simple Breadboard Circuit 21 Light-Emitting Diodes 28 Jumper Wires 28 Building the Circuit 29 The Basic Circuit 31 Ohm’s Law 31 Resistor Values and Voltage Dividers 32 Opens and Shorts 35 Circuit Protection Devices 36 Fuses 36 Circuit Breakers 37 Bigger is Not Better 38 Chapter 3 Symbols and Diagrams 39 Types of Diagrams 39 Schematic Symbols 41 So Many Switches! 43 Drawing Your Circuit 48 Try This: Adding a Switch and Creating a Schematic 48 Chapter 4 Introduction to the Arduino Uno 53 What is Arduino? 53 The Arduino Board 54 Analog vs. Digital 60 The Arduino IDE 62 Try This: Creating a Simple Arduino-Controlled Circuit 65 What Went Wrong? 69 What Does the Code Mean? 69 Setup 70 Void 71 Try This: Changing Pins 71 Try This: Creating Arduino Running Lights 72 Try This: Adding a Switch to Your Circuit 74 Try This: Using the Serial Monitor 78 Chapter 5 Dim the Lights 83 Using a Multimeter 84 Try This: Repurposing a Power Supply 86 Measuring Voltage, Current, and Resistance 88 Measuring Voltage 89 Measuring Current 89 Measuring Resistance 90 Continuity 90 Try This: Dimming the Lights 91 Try This: Measuring Circuit Values 93 Using Arduino to Measure Electricity 95 Try This: Using an Arduino Voltmeter 95 Try This: Using an Arduino Ohmmeter 100 Try This: Using an Arduino Ammeter 102 Try This: Using an Arduino Continuity Tester 107 Try This: Building a Dimmable Arduino Camp Light 109 Soldering, Perfboards, and Shrink Tubing 115 Soldering 115 Perfboards 117 Shrink Tubing 118 Chapter 6 Feel the Power 121 Watt’s Law and the Power Wheel 121 Datasheets 122 The Power Wheel 123 Watts and Horsepower 123 Horsepower 124 Efficiency 124 Battery Power 124 The Other Resistor Value 125 Wattmeters 126 Wattmeter 126 Power Distribution 127 Try This: Using an Arduino Wattmeter 128 Setting Up the LCD Screen 129 Component Connections 130 The Test Sketch 132 Troubleshooting 132 Building the Wattmeter 133 Building the Wattmeter 133 Building the Test Circuit 134 Configuring the LCD 135 Programming the Meter 138 Chapter 7 Series and Parallel Circuits 143 Series, Parallel, and Complex Circuits 143 Try This: Testing Series and Parallel Configurations 144 Calculating Values in Series and in Parallel 147 Current 147 Voltage 148 Resistance 149 Power 149 Resistance of a Conductor 150 Sources in Series and Parallel 152 Sources in Series 152 Sources in Parallel 152 Aiding and Opposing Sources 153 Try This: Calculating Circuit Values 155 Calculating the Series Circuit 155 What Went Wrong 156 Calculating the Parallel Circuit 156 What Size Resistor is Needed? 156 Calculating the Complex Circuit 157 Part II Using Common Components 161 Chapter 8 Diodes: The One-Way Street Sign 163 Try This: Creating a Simple Polarity Tester 163 Determining Polarity Tester Maximum Voltage 165 Determining Resistor Needs 166 Typical LED Voltages 167 Putting It on a Perfbord 167 LED Features 168 The Inner Workings of Diodes 169 Determining Anode and Cathode 171 Types of Diodes 172 Diode Uses 172 Try This: Using a Seven-Segment LED 175 Seven-Segment LED 176 Bar LED 181 Chapter 9 Transistors 187 Try This: Using a Transistor as an Amplifier 187 The Purpose of Transistors 192 Types of Transistors 192 Distinguishing Transistor Types 193 Determining Transistor Connections 193 Bipolar Junction Transistors 193 Field Effect Transistors 194 Try This: Using a Transistor as a Switch 196 Verifying the Data 196 Building the Circuit 198 Troubleshooting 200 Chapter 10 Capacitors 201 A Quick Look at Capacitors 201 Try This: Creating a Time Delay Circuit 205 Capacitor Uses 209 Try This: Creating an Astable Multivibrator 210 Try This: Using Capacitors in Series and Parallel 213 Capacitors in Parallel 214 Capacitors in Series 215 Chapter 11 The Magic of Magnetism 217 The Electricity/Magnetism Relationship 218 Magnetism 218 Magnetism’s Relationship with Electricity 220 Try This: Building an Electromagnet 221 Magnetism in Circuits 223 Motors and Generators 224 Inductors 225 Doorbells 227 Relays 229 Parts of a Relay 230 Try This: Building a Relay Oscillator 231 Connecting the Coil 231 Connecting the Controlled Circuit 233 Try This: Setting Up an Emergency Lighting System 234 Connecting the Mains Circuit 236 Connecting the Backup Circuit 237 Chapter is Electricity’s Changing Forms 239 Try This: Creating a Water Alarm 239 Common Transducers 243 Speakers and Microphones 243 Light 245 Light-Controlled Devices 245 Light Output Devices 247 Laser Light 250 Other Transducers 251 Try This: Creating a Night-Light Circuit 252 Try This: Creating an Arduino Laser Security System 255 Building the Circuit 255 How the Voltage Divider Works 260 Other Considerations 262 Chapter 13 Integrated Circuits and Digital Logic 263 Integrated Circuits 263 Try This: Creating an Astable Multivibrator 265 Determining Circuit Timing 266 Examining the IC 267 Building the Circuit 268 Operational Amplifiers 272 Digital Logic 272 Logic Chip Construction 273 The Binary Number System 274 Logic Gates 275 Try This: Exploring AND and OR Gates 277 The AND Gate 278 The OR Gate 280 Logic Probes and Oscilloscopes 281 Part III More Please 285 Chapter 14 Pulse Width Modulation 287 Pulse Width Modulation Explained 287 Try This: Using a PWM LED Dimmer 289 PWM vs. Potentiometer 290 Building the Circuit 291 Observing the Changing Duty Cycle 295 Try This: Using a PWM Motor Control 295 Try This: Trying PWM and an Arduino 299 Chapter 15 Sources of Electricity 307 Chemical Reactions 307 Simple Experiment: Making a Voltaic Cell 308 Types of Batteries 309 Try This: Making a Thermocouple 311 Light 312 Try This: Displaying PV Output on an Arduino 315 Friction 323 Magnetism 324 Pressure 326 Wrapping It Up 326 Chapter 16 Transformers and Power Distribution 327 What is a Transformer? 327 Phase Relationships 330 Power and Turns Ratio 331 Transformer Losses 332 Taps, Autotransformers, and Variacs 334 Try This: Verifying Transformer Output 335 Alternating Current Values 342 Power Distribution Using Transformers 343 Chapter 17 Inverters and Rectifiers 345 Inverters vs. Rectifiers and Their Uses 345 Inverters and PV Systems 346 Other Inverter Uses 347 Rectifier Uses 348 Construction of Inverters 349 Try This: Filtering a Circuit 350 Setting Up the Circuit 351 Filtering the Circuit 353 Construction of Rectifiers 355 Single-Phase vs. Three-Phase Power 357 Try This: Building a Small Variable Power Supply 357 Chapter 18 Radio Waves and Tuned Circuits 363 Radio Waves 363 Try This: Building a Radio Receiver 364 Making Waves 369 Transmitting Radio Waves 369 Receiving Radio Waves 370 AM vs. FM 371 Try This: Building an Arduino FM Radio 371 The Shield 372 The Libraries 373 Verifying the Radio Works 375 Adding Station Tuning 377 Tuned Circuits 381 Part IV Putting the I in IoT 385 Chapter 19 Connecting Your Circuits to the Cloud 387 The Arduino IoT Cloud 387 Try This: Setting Up Your Device 389 Try This: Using Things, Properties, and Widgets 391 Chapter 20 Just for Fun 405 Electronic Fabrics and Wearables 405 Try This: Lighting Up a Teddy Bear 408 Paper Circuits 413 Try This: Creating a Conductive Paint Circuit 414 Try This: Creating a Copper Tape Circuit 416 Try This: Building Squishy Circuits 418 Chapter 21 What’s Next? 423 The World is Your Oyster 423 Recommended Reading and Resources 424 Words of Encouragement 425 Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvances in Hyperspectral Image Processing Techniques Authoritative and comprehensive resource covering recent hyperspectral imaging techniques from theory to applications Advances in Hyperspectral Image Processing Techniques is derived from recent developments of hyperspectral imaging (HSI) techniques along with new applications in the field, covering many new ideas that have been explored and have led to various new directions in the past few years. The work gathers an array of disparate research into one resource and explores its numerous applications across a wide variety of disciplinary areas. In particular, it includes an introductory chapter on fundamentals of HSI and a chapter on extensive use of HSI techniques in satellite on-orbit and on-board processing to aid readers involved in these specific fields. The book's content is based on the expertise of invited scholars and is categorized into six parts. Part I provides general theory. Part II presents various Band Selection tecTable of ContentsEDITOR BIOGRAPHY vii LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS viii PREFACE x PART I GENERAL THEORY 1 1 Introduction: Two Fundamental Principles Behind Hyperspectral Imaging 3Chein-I Chang 2 Overview of Hyperspectral Imaging Remote Sensing from Satellites 41Shen-En Qian 3 Efficient Hardware Implementation for Hyperspectral Anomaly and Target Detection 67Jie Lei, Weiying Xie, Jiaojiao Li, Keyan Wang, Kai Liu, and Yunsong Li PART II BAND SELECTION FOR HYPERSPECTRAL IMAGING 107 4 Constrained Band Selection for Hyperspectral Imaging 109Chein-I Chang 5 Band Subset Selection for Hyperspectral Imaging 147Chein-I Chang 6 Progressive Band Selection Processing for Hyperspectral Image Classification 179Chunyan Yu, Meiping Song, and Chein-I Chang PART III COMPRESSIVE SENSING FOR HYPERSPECTRAL IMAGING 205 7 Restricted Entropy and Spectrum Properties for Hyperspectral Imaging 207Chein-I Chang and Bernard Lampe 8 Endmember Finding in Compressively Sensed Band Domain 228Chein-I Chang and Adam Bekit 9 Hyperspectral Image Classification in Compressively Sensed Band Domain 252Charles J. Della-Porta and Chein-I Chang PART IV FUSION FOR HYPERSPECTRAL IMAGING 279 10 Hyperspectral and LiDAR Data Fusion 281Qian Du, Wei Li, and Chiru Ge 11 Hyperspectral Data Fusion Using Multidimensional Information 293Lifu Zhang, Xia Zhang, Mingyuan Peng, Xuejian Sun, and Xiaoyang Zhao 12 Fusion of Band Selection Methods for Hyperspectral Imaging 341Yulei Wang, Lin Wang, and Chein-I Chang PART V HYPERSPECTRAL DATA UNMIXING 363 13 Model-Inspired Deep Neural Networks for Hyperspectral Unmixing 365Yuntao Qian, Fengchao Xiong, Minchao Ye, and Jun Zhou 14 Analytical Fully Constrained Least Squares Linear Spectral Mixture Analysis 404Chein-I Chang and Hsiao-Chi Li 15 Swarm Intelligence Optimization-Based Spectral Unmixing 422Lianru Gao, Xu Sun, Zhu Han, Lina Zhuang, Wenfei Luo, and Bing Zhang 16 Spectral-Spatial Robust Nonnegative Matrix Factorization for Hyperspectral Unmixing 453Risheng Huang, Xiaorun Li, and Liaoying Zhao PART VI HYPERSPECTRAL IMAGE CLASSIFICATION 483 17 Sparse Representation-Based Hyperspectral Image Classification 485Haoyang Yu, Jun Li, Wei Li, and Bing Zhang 18 Collaborative Classification Based on Hyperspectral Images 506Junping Zhang, Xiaochen Lu, and Tong Li 19 Class Feature-Weighted Hyperspectral Image Classification 543Shengwei Zhong, Jiaojiao Li, Xiaodi Shang, Shuhan Chen, and Chein-I Chang 20 Target Detection Approaches to Hyperspectral Image Classification 565Chein-I Chang, Bai Xue, and Chunyan Yu INDEX 586

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the physical and mathematical-statistical approaches to personal and mobile wireless communication networks Wireless Networks Technologies offers an authoritative account of several current and modern wireless networks and the corresponding novel technologies and techniques. The text explores the main aspects of the physical layer of the technology. The authors?noted experts on the topic?examine the well-known networks (from 2-G to 3-G) in a historical perspective. They also illuminate the physical layer of networks while presenting polarization diversity analysis and positioning of any subscriber located in areas of service both for land-to-land and land-to-atmosphere communication links. The book includes clear descriptions of planning techniques for different integrated femto/pico/micro/macrocell deployments. The authors also examine new technologies of time and frequency dispersy and multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) modern network design iTable of ContentsAcknowledgements xi Preface xiii Acronyms xix Part I Objective 1 1 Overview of Wireless Networks – From 2G to 4G 3 References 6 2 Terrestrial Wireless Networks Based on Standard 2G and 3G Technologies 9 2.1 Bluetooth-WPAN Networks 9 2.2 Wi-Fi–WLAN Networks 11 2.2.1 Integrated WLAN and WPAN Networks 13 2.2.2 Enhancement of the WLAN Technology 14 2.3 WiMAX Networks and 802.16 Technologies 15 2.3.1 Integrated Wi-Fi–WiMAX Networks 17 2.4 LTE Current Technologies 20 References 24 Part II Physical Layer of Wireless Networks Beyond 4G 33 3 Link Budget Design in Terrestrial Communication Networks 35 3.1 Total Path Loss and Link Budget – Physical Layer of Any Network 35 3.1.1 White Noise 36 3.1.2 Slow Fading 36 3.1.3 Fast Fading 37 3.1.4 Antenna Gain 38 3.1.5 Average Attenuation 38 3.1.5.1 Line of sight 38 3.1.5.2 Non-line-of-sight 39 3.2 The Terrain Propagating Models for Total Path Loss Prediction 40 3.2.1 Hata–Okumura Model 40 3.2.2 Bertoni Multidiffraction Model 42 3.2.3 Walfisch—Ikegami Model (COST 231 Standard) Based on Analytical Bertoni Model 43 3.2.4 Stochastic multiparametric model 44 3.2.4.1 Parameters of the model 44 3.2.4.2 Effect of buildings’ overlap profile 45 3.2.4.3 Signal intensity distribution 46 3.3 Validation of Most Suitable Models via the Recent Experiments 47 3.4 Link Budget Design in Land–Atmosphere and Atmosphere–Land Communication Networks 50 3.4.1 Content and Main Parameters of the Troposphere 51 3.4.1.1 The content 51 3.4.1.2 Main parameters of troposphere 52 3.4.2 Effects of Tropospheric Features on Signal Propagation 54 3.4.2.1 Main features occurring in the troposphere 54 3.4.2.2 Molecular–Gaseous absorption 55 3.4.2.3 Effects of rain 57 3.4.2.4 Effects of clouds 60 3.4.2.5 Effects of turbulence 62 3.5 Link Budget Design 67 3.5.1 Path Loss in Free Space 67 3.5.2 Link Budget Design 67 References 70 4 Polarization Diversity Analysis for Networks Beyond 4G 73 4.1 Depolarization Phenomena in Terrain Channels 73 4.2 Model by Stocks Parameters 74 4.3 The Multiparametric Stochastic Model Application for Polarization Parameters Prediction 77 4.4 Numerical Analysis of Probability Functions for Parameters of the Spatial Polarization Ellipse 81 4.4.1 Mixed-residential Areas 81 4.4.2 Suburban and Urban Areas 83 4.5 Analysis of Polarization Ellipse Energetic Parameters 85 4.5.1 The Ratio Δ vs. the BS Height 85 4.5.2 The Δ Ratio vs. the Distance Between BS and MS Antennas 89 4.6 Analysis of the Loss Characteristics 89 4.6.1 Horizontal Component of the Total Elliptically Polarized Field 91 4.6.2 Vertical Component of the Total Field 91 4.7 Path Loss Factor Due to Depolarization Phenomena 92 4.8 Conclusions 95 References 97 5 Theoretical Framework for Positioning of Any Subscriber in Land–Land and Atmosphere–Land Multiuser Links 99 5.1 Signal Power Distribution in the Space, AOA, TOA, and Frequency Domains for Prediction of Operative Parameters of Sectorial and Multibeam Antennas 101 5.1.1 Signal Intensity Distribution in Space Domain. According to 3-D Stochastic Approach 101 5.1.2 Signal Energy Distribution in Angle-of-Arrival (AOA) and Time-of-Arrival (AOA) Domains 102 5.1.3 Signal Power Spectrum in the Frequency and Doppler-Shift (DS) Domains 106 5.2 Localization of Any Subscriber in Land Built-Up Areas 109 5.2.1 3-D Stochastic Model for Different Scenarios of Buildings’ Layout 109 5.2.2 Analysis of the Accuracy of MS Localization in Predefined Urban Scenarios 113 5.2.2.1 Example 1: The statistical model vs. ray-tracing simulation according to the topographic map 113 5.2.2.2 Example 2: MS and BS antennas are below the rooftop level 113 5.2.2.3 Example 3: MS antenna is below and BS antenna is above the rooftop level 115 5.2.2.4 Example 4: Multiple MS locations 116 5.3 Positioning of Any Subscriber in Multiuser Land–Atmosphere Communication Links 122 5.3.1 Signal Distribution in the Time-Delay Domain 122 5.3.2 Signal Distribution in the Doppler-Shift Domain 124 References 126 Part III Advanced Integrated-Cell Technologies for Modern 4G and 5G Networks 129 6 Femto/Pico/Micro/Macrocell Network Deployments for Fourth and Fifth Generations 131 6.1 Channel Capacity Models in Integrated Femtocell–Microcell/Macrocell Networks 133 6.1.1 Shared Spectrum Assignment (SSA) with Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) 134 6.1.2 Shared Spectrum Assignment (SSA) with (OSG) 134 6.1.3 Dedicated Spectrum Assignment (DSA) with Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) 135 6.1.4 Dedicated spectrum assignment (DSA) with open subscriber group (OSG) 135 6.2 Analysis of Femto/Pico/Micro/Macrocell Networks Based on Propagation Phenomena 136 6.2.1 Propagation Aspects in Integrated Indoor and Outdoor Communication Links 136 6.2.1.1 Outdoor propagation model 137 6.2.1.2 Indoor propagation model 139 6.2.2 Experimental Verification of the Total Path Loss in Femtocell–Picocell Areas 143 6.3 Different Integrated Femto/Pico/Micro/Macrocell Network Deployments 145 6.3.1 Femtocells Integrated into Microcell Network Pattern 145 6.3.2 Femto/Pico/Microcell Configuration Deployment 149 6.3.2.1 Results of the numerical computations 153 References 157 Part IV Mega-Cell Satellite Networks–Current and Advanced 161 7 Advanced Multicarrier Diversity in Networks Beyond 4G 163 7.1 Advanced Multicarrier-diversity Techniques 163 7.2 Advanced Frequency Multicarrier-diversity Techniques 165 7.3 Advanced OFDM and OFDMA Technologies 167 7.3.1 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing 168 7.3.2 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access 173 7.4 Advanced Time Multicarrier-diversity Techniques 175 References 178 8 MIMO Modern Networks Design in Space and Time Domains 181 8.1 Main Principles of MIMO 181 8.2 Modeling of MIMO Channel Capacity 184 8.3 Fading Correlation in Space–Time Doman in Urban Environment with Dense Building Layout 187 8.4 Correlation Coefficient Analysis in Urban Scene 188 8.5 MIMO Channel Capacity Estimation 189 8.6 Analysis of MIMO Channel Capacity in Predefined Urban Scenario 190 References 192 9 MIMO Network Based on Adaptive Multibeam Antennas Integrated with Modern LTE Releases 197 9.1 Problems in LTE Releases Deployment 197 9.2 Multibeam MIMO with Adaptive Antennas Against Fading Phenomena in LTE Networks 199 9.3 Analysis of the Multibeam Effect for a Specific Environment 201 9.4 Summary 206 References 208 10 Satellite Communication Networks 211 10.1 Overview of Satellite Types 211 10.2 Signal Types in LSC Links 212 10.3 Overview of Experimentally Approbated Models 214 10.3.1 Lutz Pure Statistical Model 215 10.3.2 Physical–Statistical Approach 216 10.3.2.1 Saunders–Evans physical–statistical model 217 10.3.2.2 Multiparametric stochastic model 219 10.4 Comparison Between Saunders–Evans and the Stochastic MultiparametricModel 223 10.5 Land–Satellite Networks – Current and Advanced Beyond 4G 225 10.5.1 Current Land–Satellite Networks 225 10.5.1.1 Inmarsat 225 10.5.1.2 North American MSAT system 226 10.5.1.3 Australian mobile satellite system (OPTUS) 227 10.5.1.4 Japanese n-star mobile communications system 227 10.5.1.5 Other mobile–satellite systems 228 10.5.2 Advanced Satellite Networks Performance 229 10.5.2.1 Iridium 229 10.5.2.2 Globalstar 231 10.5.2.3 ICO-global 233 10.5.2.4 European inmarsat BGAN 234 10.5.2.5 Advanced GSM–satellite network 235 10.5.3 Operational Parameters Prediction in Advanced Land–Satellite Networks 235 10.6 Summary 238 References 239 Index 241

Read more less